JP2019084438A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of facilitating adjustment to an original amount of operation.SOLUTION: A handle ring 540 can be operated in a section between an initial position θ0 and an operation end point, and a position of the operation end point can be changed. Therefore, by changing (setting) the position of the operation end point to a position corresponding to a desired amount of operation (target position), a player can easily adjust the amount of operation of the handle ring 540 to an original amount of operation by operating the handle ring 540 to the operation end point (more specifically, by operating the handle ring 540 to a position where operation is controlled by the operation end point and further operation is disabled).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 30

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one in which a handle rotation portion is rotatably attached to a handle base, and the firing strength of a ball is adjusted according to the amount of rotation operation of the handle rotation portion. In addition, when the desired firing strength is obtained by the turning operation of the handle turning portion, the turning strength of the handle turning portion is fixed to reduce the player's fatigue while maintaining the firing strength. Have a structure that

JP 2012-005759 A

  A biasing force by a biasing spring is applied to the operating element (handle rotating portion), and when the player releases the hand, the operating position of the operating element is returned to the initial position. Therefore, for example, when the game is interrupted, it is difficult to adjust the operation position of the operating element to the original operation position before interrupting the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which can easily adjust the operating position of the operating element to the original operating position.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with an operating element operated by the player, and the firing intensity of the gaming ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the operating element, The operator is operable in the section from the initial position to the operation end point, and the position of the operation end point is changeable, and the player identifies whether the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position It is made possible.

  According to a second aspect of the present invention, there is provided the gaming machine according to the first aspect, further comprising a button member pressed and operated by the player, and the position of the operation end point being a maximum position by pressing the button member. In the state where the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, the push-in position of the button member is different as compared with the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position.

  According to a third aspect of the present invention, there is provided the gaming machine according to the second aspect, wherein at least one of the wall portion disposed on the outer peripheral surface side of the button member and the outer peripheral surface of the button member is formed with an opening. And the opening at which the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, compared with the state in which the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position, the image is viewed through the opening. The form of the target is different.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to easily adjust the operation amount of the operating element to the original operation amount.

  Here, as a method of adjusting the operation amount of the operation element to a desired operation amount, for example, a method of providing a scale along the movement locus of the operation element, or reference to an arbitrary position along the movement locus of the operation element It is conceivable to make the piece fixable. According to these methods, the operation amount of the operation element is set by operating the operation element with the scale line or the reference piece as the target position (ie, matching the operation position of the operation element with the scale line or the reference element). It can be made easy to adjust to the desired operation amount.

  However, in the method described above, the accuracy of the adjustment of the operator depends on the skill of the player. That is, it is necessary to finely adjust the operating position of the operating element with respect to the target position while visually determining whether the operating position of the operating element matches the target position (scale line or reference piece) or not. Adjustment is difficult. Further, for example, if the operating speed of the operating element is increased, the target position may be passed. Therefore, the operating speed of the operating element needs to be reduced in the vicinity of the target position, which makes quick adjustment difficult.

  According to claim 1, on the other hand, the operator is operable in the section from the initial position to the operation end point, and since the position of the operation end point is changeable, the desired operation amount (target position By changing (setting) the position of the operation end point to the position corresponding to), if the player operates the operating element until the operation end point (ie, the operation is restricted by the operation end point, further operation) The user can easily adjust the amount of operation of the operator to a desired amount of operation by operating the operator to a position where the operator can not perform the operation.

  Thus, for example, it is not necessary to finely adjust while visually determining whether the operation position of the operation element matches the target position, and it is possible to accurately adjust to a desired operation amount. In addition, since the target position is not passed, the operation speed of the operation element can be increased, and the desired operation amount can be quickly adjusted.

  More specifically, when the launch intensity of the gaming ball reaches a desired launch intensity as a result of adjusting the operation amount of the operator, the position corresponding to the state (the operator having the desired launch intensity is obtained Change (set) the position of the operation end point to the position corresponding to the operation amount of. Thereby, for example, even after the game is interrupted for a break and the operator is returned to the initial position, the player operates the operation only by operating the operator to the operation end point as described above. The operation amount of the child can be returned (adjusted) to the original operation amount (that is, the operation amount before interrupting the game), and such return operation can be performed accurately and quickly.

  Furthermore, since it is possible for the player to distinguish whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, it is possible to suppress the situation where the game is played without knowing that the adjustment range of the launch intensity of the game ball is restricted. This can make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

  That is, in the configuration in which the position of the operation end point can be changed when the operator is operable in the section from the initial position to the operation end point, the player is aware that the position of the operation end point is changed. If you are playing without knowing, you will play in the condition that the adjustment range of the launch intensity of the gaming ball is restricted, that is, you can not launch the game sphere with the maximum launch intensity set in advance. As a result, the player may suffer disadvantages.

  On the other hand, according to claim 1, since the player can distinguish whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position (ie, It is possible to suppress the player from playing the game without noticing that the adjustment range of the launch intensity of the game ball is restricted), making it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the position of the operation end point can be changed from the maximum position by the pressing operation of the button member, and the position of the operation end point is the maximum In the state changed from the position, compared with the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position, the pushing position of the button member is different, so the position of the operation end point is maximum based on the difference of the pushing positions of the button members. The player can be made to identify whether the position has been changed. As a result, the player can be prevented from playing a game without noticing that the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, and it is difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

  In this case, according to claim 2, the operation member (button member) operated to change the position of the operation end point from the maximum position is for identifying whether the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position. Since it is also used as an identification member, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and to reduce the product cost.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the second aspect, in the state where the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, comparison with the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position Since the form of the object visually recognized through the opening is different, it is easy and surely for the player whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position based on the difference in the form of the object visually recognized. It can be identified.

  That is, in the configuration in which the determination of whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position based on the difference between the push-in positions of the button members, the judgment criterion is the difference in the degree of push-in. Difficult to distinguish.

  On the other hand, according to the third aspect, since the form of the object visually recognized through the opening is different, the judgment criterion can be binarized, and the two states can be easily distinguished clearly. This allows the player to easily and reliably identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, and as a result, it is possible to play without knowing that the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position. It is possible to suppress the player from playing the game and make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

  It should be noted that, for example, in the two states where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position and the state where the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, one of the states is different. In the state, only the outer peripheral surface of the button member is viewed through the opening, and in the other state, only the members other than the outer peripheral surface of the button member are viewed through the opening (that is, the button member It is binarized as to whether or not the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized, and a configuration to distinguish based on these two values is exemplified.

  Second, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, but the color of the outer peripheral surface of the visually recognized button member is different in one state and the other state (that is, And B) binarized by the color (for example, white and black) of the button member visually recognized through the opening, and the configuration to be distinguished based on the two values is exemplified.

  Third, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is viewed, but the area (proportion occupied in the opening) of the outer peripheral surface of the viewed button member is the one state and the other The configuration that differs depending on the state (that is, the configuration in which the area of the button member (the area occupied by the outer peripheral surface of the button member in the opening) viewed through the opening is binarized and distinguished based on these two values) is illustrated Be done.

  Fourth, in the one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, but the outer peripheral surface of the visually recognized button member is drawn in the opening in the one state and the other state A different configuration (i.e., a configuration in which the outer peripheral surface of the button member is binarized by the shape drawn in the opening and distinguished based on these binary values) is exemplified.

  Fifth, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, and the area of the outer peripheral surface of the visually recognized button member and the shape drawn by the outer peripheral surface of the button member are the same. The position of the outer peripheral surface in the visible opening is different in one state and the other state (that is, it is binarized by the position of the outer peripheral surface of the button member in the opening and distinguished based on these binary values Configuration) is illustrated.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a top view of a handle device, (b) is a front view of a handle device. It is a side view of the handle device in the arrow VI direction view of Drawing 5 (a). It is a front perspective view of handle attachment stand and handle base. It is a rear perspective view of a handle ring. (A) is a rear perspective view of a front cover, (b) is a front view of a guide groove. (A) is a top view of the front cover in the arrow Xa direction view of Fig.9 (a), (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of the front cover in the Xa-Xa line of Fig.10 (a). It is a rear perspective view of a tongue member. It is a disassembled perspective view of the button member which illustrates the connection structure of a handle shaft supporting body and a shaft. (A) is a front view of a switching apparatus, (b) is a side view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XIIIb direction view of Fig.13 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the switching apparatus in the XIVb-XIVb line | wire of FIG. 13 (a), (b) is a side view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XIVb direction view of FIG. 13 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a switching apparatus, (c) is a front view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XVc direction view of Fig.15 (a), (d) is FIG. ) Of the switching device in the direction of the arrow XVd). It is a rear perspective view of a handle base. It is a perspective view in the disassembled state of a handle attachment stand. (A) is a perspective view in the assembled state of a handle mount, (b) is an inner side view of a 1st main body. FIG. 5 is a rear perspective view of a handle mount and a handle base. It is a front perspective view of a handle base in the state where a handle control member was attached. It is a front perspective view of a handle base in the state where a handle control member was removed. (A) And (b) is a perspective view of a steering wheel control member. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle device in the state before displacement operation. It is a partial cross-section side view of a handle device in the state after being displaced. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle device. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle device. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle device. It is a front schematic diagram of the handle device which illustrated the handle ring and the switching device typically. It is a front schematic diagram of the handle device which illustrated the handle ring and the switching device typically. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates the state of rotation operation of a handle device typically. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates the state of rotation operation of a handle device typically. (A) And (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of a handle apparatus. (A) is a top view of the handle device in a 2nd embodiment, (b) is a front view of a handle device. It is a side view of the handle device in the arrow XXXII direction view of FIG. 33 (a). It is a front perspective view of handle attachment stand and handle base. It is a rear perspective view of a handle ring. It is a rear perspective view of a front cover. (A) is a front view of the switching device, (b) is a side view of the switching device in the direction of the arrow XXXVIb in FIG. 38 (a), and (c) is an arrow XXXVIc in FIG. 38 (a). It is a rear view of the switching device in direction view. (A) is sectional drawing of the switching apparatus in the XXXVIIa-XXXVIIa line | wire of FIG. 38 (a), (b) is a side view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XXXVIIb direction view of FIG. 38 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a switching apparatus, (c) is a rear view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XXXVIIIc direction view of FIG. 40 (a), (d) is FIG. ) Of the switching device in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIId. (A) is a front view of the push-in member, (b) is a side view of the push-in member in the arrow XLIb direction view of FIG. 41 (a), (c) is an XLIc- of FIG. 41 (a) It is sectional drawing of the pushing member in a XLIc line. (A) is a front view of a switch member, (b) is a side view of the switch member in the direction of the arrow XLIIb of FIG. 42 (a), and (c) is an XLII c- of FIG. 42 (a). It is sectional drawing of the switch member in a XLIIc line | wire. (A) is a front view of a base body, (b) is sectional drawing of the base body in the XLIIIb-XLIIIb line | wire of FIG. 43 (a). (A) is a side view of a transfer rod, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the transfer rod taken along line XLIVb-XLIVb of FIG. It is the plane development view which developed and illustrated the inner skin of the penetration hole of a base object on a plane. FIG. 46 is a partially enlarged development view of a guide groove in which a region XLVI in FIG. 45 is partially enlarged and illustrated. (A) to (c) are side views of a switch member. It is a rear perspective view in the disassembled state of a handle base, a handle attachment stand, and a linear-motion conversion member. FIG. 31 is a rear perspective view of the handle base 530, the handle mount 2520, and the linear motion conversion member 2800 in an assembled state. It is a rear perspective view in the assembled state of a handle base, a handle attachment stand, and a linear motion conversion member. It is a perspective view in the disassembled state of a handle attachment stand. (A) is a perspective view in the assembled state of a handle attachment stand, (b) is an inner side view of a 1st main body. (A) is a side view of the linear motion conversion member in the arrow LIIa direction view of FIG. 48, (b) is a front view of the linear movement conversion member in the arrow LIIb direction view of FIG. 52 (a), 52 (c) is a side view of the linear motion conversion member in the arrow LIIc direction view of FIG. 52 (b). It is a partial cross section side view of a handle device. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle device. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle device. (A) is a partial enlarged side view of a handle device, (b) is a partial enlarged top view of a handle device. (A) is a partial enlarged side view of a handle device, (b) is a partial enlarged top view of a handle device. (A) is a top view of the handle device in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a side view of the handle device in the arrow LVIIIb direction view of Fig.58 (a). It is sectional drawing of the handle apparatus in the LVIX-LVIX line | wire of FIG. 58 (a). (A) is a side view of the lower base, (b) is a top view of the lower base as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXb in FIG. 60 (a), and (c) is in FIG. 60 (b) It is sectional drawing of the lower side base in a LXc-LXc line. (A) is a side view of the intermediate base, (b) is a top view of the intermediate base in the arrow LXIb direction view of FIG. 61 (a), and (c) is LXIc- of FIG. 61 (b). It is sectional drawing of the intermediate | middle base in a LXIc line. (A) is a side view of the upper base, (b) is a bottom view of the upper base in the direction of arrow LXIIb in FIG. 62 (a), and (c) is LXII c- in FIG. 62 (b). It is sectional drawing of the upper side base in a LXIIc line. (A) is a front view of the sealing member, (b) is a bottom view of the sealing member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIIIb in FIG. 63 (a), and (c) is in FIG. 63 (a) It is sectional drawing of the sealing member in a LXIIIc-LXIIIc line | wire. (A) And (b) is a partial cross section side view of a rotating shaft part and an operation element. (A) is a side view of the rotation shaft, (b) is a rear view of the rotation shaft in the direction of arrow LXVb in FIG. 65 (a), (c) is a partial cross-sectional rear view of the push-up member FIG. FIG. 65 (a) is a top view of the rotary shaft portion in the direction of arrow LXVIa of FIG. 65 (a); FIG. 66 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotary shaft portion taken along line LXIVb-LXVIb of FIG. (A) is a side view of the operating element, and (b) is a top view of the operating element in the direction of the arrow LXVIb of FIG. 67 (a). (A) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the manipulator at line LXVIIIa-LXVIIIa in FIG. 67 (b), and (b) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the manipulator at line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. 67 (b) is there. It is a partial expanded sectional view of a handle device. (A) is a top view of the switching device, (b) is a side view of the switching device in the arrow LXXb direction view of FIG. 70 (a), (c) is an arrow LXXc of FIG. 70 (b) It is a bottom view of the switching device in direction view. FIG. 70 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the switching device along the line LXXIa-LXXIa in FIG. 70 (a), and FIG. 70 (b) is a side view of the switching device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIb in FIG. (A) is a front view of the push-in member, (b) is a side view of the push-in member in the arrow LXXIIb direction view of FIG. 72 (a), (c) is LXXIIc- of FIG. 72 (a) It is sectional drawing of the pushing-in member in a LXXIIc line. (A) is a side view of a transmission stick, (b) is a top view of the transmission stick in the arrow LXXIIIb direction view of Drawing 73 (a). It is a partial cross section side view of a handle device. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle device. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle device. It is a partially expanded perspective view of a rotating shaft part and a switching device. It is a partially expanded perspective view of a rotating shaft part and a switching device. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates the state of slide operation of a handle device typically. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates the state of slide operation of a handle device typically.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, referring to the drawings from FIG. 1, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (ballistic strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, and rails 61, 62, The general winning opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the first through gate 67, the second through gate 670, the variable display unit 80 And the like, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The general winning opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is disposed in the through hole and fixed by a wood screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  Two first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are disposed on the upper right side of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37A is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Aa as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Ab. Similarly, the other first symbol display device 37B is also provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ba as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Bb.

  The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control device 110, and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, these first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. ing. Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while when the ball wins the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Each of the plurality of LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady state or not or in a short time or in a normal state by a lighted state, or indicates by a lighted state whether or not it is fluctuating. It indicates whether the symbol corresponding to the jackpot or the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot or the outlier symbol is displayed by the lighting state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighting state. Each of the 7-segment display devices 37Ab and 37Bb displays the number of rounds in a big hit and an error display. In addition, LED37Aa and 37Ba are comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, and may suggest the various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are entered. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown.

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after jackpots of 15 rounds and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) becomes a short time state. is there.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 by increasing the hitting probability of the second symbol described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, ie, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second entry ball opening It refers to the state of the game where it is easy for the ball to enter 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normally medium is the state of the game which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is increased).

  During a definite change or during a short time, not only is the probability of hitting the second symbol up, but also the time for which the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is open is changed, which is longer than normal. Is set. When the motorized part 640a is in the open state (opened state), the ball enters the second entrance 640 compared to the case where the motorized part 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to ball. Therefore, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 during definite change or time, and it is possible to increase the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the motorized symbol 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time during a definite change or during a short time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened more than during normal operation. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during definite changes or during a short time, and the electric symbol 640a is open during the time and one hit when the electric symbol 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during definite period of time or during a short time, the time when the motorized symbol 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is opened or the number of times the motorized symbol 640a is opened at one time is not the second symbol Only the hit probability may be changed to be increased relative to the normal.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by the ball entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 (start winning) as a trigger while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. 3 The third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of symbols, and the passage of the spheres of the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 trigger the third A second symbol display device 83 configured of an LED that variably displays two symbols is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8-inch size, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. While the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment displays the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) by the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol display thereof A decorative display is performed according to the display of the device 37. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device 83 takes a predetermined time for the symbol “o” and the symbol “x” as a display symbol (second symbol) every time the ball passes the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670. It is a variable display that lights up alternately. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, in the second symbol display device 83, after the variation display of the second symbol, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, in the second symbol display device 83, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the motorized role object 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a predetermined time.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the motorized role 640 a of the second entrance 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 during definite variation and during time saving.

  In addition, the second ball exit 640 during positive or negative time by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting, increasing the opening time and opening frequency of the motorized symbol 640a per hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized role product 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the game board on the left side is configured to be passable. ing. Further, the second through gate 670 is assembled to the game board on the right of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired to the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right of the game board can pass through It is configured. When the ball passes the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed by the second symbol display device 83, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out If there is, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol hold lamp Also in 84, it is lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device 37 and the third symbol other than the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment. It may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is not limited to four times, and may be three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times) It may be set to Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) makes a lottery for a big hit, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side in a front view of the variable display unit 80, a second entrance port 640 where a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) makes a lottery for a big hit, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

  Further, each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as a winning ball when the ball is hit. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are different numbers, for example, The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is three, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is ball entering the second entrance 640 is five. May be

  The second ball entrance 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The motorized accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the motorized accessory 640a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, The motorized role object 640 a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry port 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” becomes easy to be displayed, and the number of times that the motorized role piece 640 a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during definite period of time and short time, the time when the motorized accessory 640a is opened is also longer than usual. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation and time.

  Here, in the case where the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the probability of becoming a big hit is in the low probability state or the high probability state It is the same. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of jackpot is that the ball entered the first entrance 64 in the case where the ball entered the second entrance 640 It is set higher than the case. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have a motorized part like the second ball entry port 640, and the ball can enter the ball at all times.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory is entered. Aim the ball 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 toward the mouth 64 (so-called "left-handed"), and entering the first entrance 64 has many chances for a big hit lottery It is advantageous for the player to obtain and aim to be a big hit.

  On the other hand, during the definite change or time, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in the open state and the second entrance 640 is likely to enter the ball, so to the second entrance 640 Direct the ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and entering the second entrance 640 aims to become a 15R positive variation hit jackpot Is advantageous to the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  Below the first ball entrance 64, a first variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 becomes the jackpot, after the predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the first stop symbol for the jackpot is selected. The LED 37Aa of the symbol display device 37A is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  Further, a second variable winning device 650 is disposed below the second entry port 640, and a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 650a is provided substantially at the center of the second variable winning device 650. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 becomes a jackpot, after the predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the first stop pattern of the jackpot While making LED37Ba of the symbol display device 37B light, the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the big hit is shown. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 650a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  Each of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a, 650a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are on the front side with the horizontally long rectangular opening and closing plate covering the specified winning opening 65a or the specified winning opening 650a, and the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis. It has all the large open mouth solenoids (not shown) for opening and closing drive. The specific winning opening 65a, 650a is normally in a closed state where the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. The special winning opening 65a, 650a is provided with a large opening opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, 650a in the game area, and the LED 37Aa, LED37Ba corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is lit. It is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is open, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is triggered by the ball winning in the specific winning opening 65a, 650a. A game state opened for a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special game state for a time.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided, and the certificate paper and the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is a front frame 14 Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a is guided to the ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device 83 Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a, 650a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side with the axis as an axis and a solenoid for driving a motorized product etc. is connected, and the MPU 201 receives various commands for these through the input / output port 205. Send control signal.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the handle device 51 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 32.

  5 (a) is a top view of the handle device 51, and FIG. 5 (b) is a front view of the handle device 51. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is a side view of the handle device 51 as viewed in the direction of arrow VI in FIG. 5 (a). In FIG. 5A and FIG. 6, the front surface of the lower tray unit 15 is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the handle device 51 mainly includes a handle mount 520, a handle base 530, a handle ring 540, a front cover 550, and a button member 570, and the pachinko machine 10 It projects horizontally from the front of FIG.

  The handle mount 520 has its rear surface (left side in FIG. 5A) fixed to the front surface of the lower tray unit 15, and the handle base 530 is disposed on the front surface of the handle mount 520 (right side in FIG. 5A). Ru. The two members 520 and 530 are connected such that one of them is pivotally supported by the other, and the handle base 530 is integrated with the handle ring 540 with respect to the handle mount 520 with the pivotally supported portion as a center. , And vertically displaceable (see FIGS. 23 and 24 (21)).

  A launch stop switch operating unit 440 is provided on the handle base 530. The firing stop switch operation unit 440 is a lever for switching on / off of the firing stop switch 51b (see FIG. 7) provided inside the handle base 530, and is a left side surface of the handle base 530 (FIG. 5 (b)). It is disposed in a state of protruding from the left side). The player can stop the firing of the game ball regardless of the amount of turning operation (turning position) of the handle ring 540 while pressing the release stop switch operation unit 440.

  The handle ring 540 is rotatably attached to the front surface (right side in FIG. 5A) of the handle base 530, and on the outer peripheral side of the handle ring 540, three finger hooks 540a and 540b for the player to hang a finger on , 540c are formed to protrude.

  The player turns the handle ring 540 in a clockwise (clockwise) direction (that is, from the initial position toward the operation end point (maximum position)) in a front view of the handle device 51 (see FIG. 5B). It is possible to increase the launch strength of the gaming ball by moving operation. That is, the handle ring 540 can be rotated in the section from the initial position to the operation end point, and the firing strength of the gaming ball is adjusted in accordance with the operation amount (rotation position) of the rotation operation.

  In this case, the handle device 51 is formed so that the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 540 can be changed. Specifically, in this embodiment, the central angle (rotational operation angle of the handle ring 540) from the initial position to the maximum position is 120 degrees, and the position of the operation end point is changed within the central angle of 120 degrees. (Setting) is possible.

  For example, when the position of the operation end point is changed (set) to a position where the central angle with the initial position is 90 degrees (that is, the position where the central angle with the maximum position is 30 degrees) When the handle ring 540 is pivoted in the direction from the initial position toward the operation end point, in the section from the initial position to the central angle of 90 degrees, the pivoting operation can be performed as usual, but between the initial position When the central angle of 90 ° reaches the position (ie, the operation end point), the pivoting operation of the handle ring 540 is restricted (ie, no further pivoting operation of the handle ring 540 is possible).

  Note that, as described above, the firing strength of the gaming ball is set in accordance with the resistance value of the variable resistor (that is, the amount of turning operation of the handle ring 540). That is, the firing intensity of the gaming ball is determined based on the operation amount (operation position) by which the handle ring 540 is rotated from the initial position regardless of whether the position of the operation end point is changed (set). Therefore, when the position of the operation end point is not changed, and the rotation operation of the handle ring 540 is possible to a position where the central angle with the initial position is 120 degrees (ie, the maximum position), such a steering ring The firing intensity of the gaming ball when the 540 is rotated from the initial position to the position at a central angle of 90 degrees is such that the central angle between the operation end position and the initial position is 90 degrees as described above. When the position is changed (set), the firing intensity of the game ball is the same as that of the gaming ball when the handle ring 540 is operated to rotate from the initial position to the 90 ° center position (that is, the operation end point). .

  When the player's turning operation is released, the turning position of the handle ring 540 is returned to the initial position by the biasing force of the handle biasing spring 537 (see FIG. 7). In this case, according to the handle ring 540, the pivot position of the handle ring 540 can be arbitrarily set by displacing the handle base 530 with respect to the pivotally supported portion with respect to the handle mount 520 (see FIG. 23). It is comprised so that fixation is possible at a rotation position. That is, the firing strength of the ball can be fixed at an arbitrary strength. The fixing structure of the handle ring 540 will be described later.

  The front cover 550 is formed in a hemispherical shape that is convex toward the front (in FIG. 5A and the right direction in FIG. 6), and is attached to the front of the handle ring 540. At the top of the front cover 550, a circular opening 550a in a front view is formed, and the button member 570 is projected (exposed) from the opening 550a.

  Further, a confirmation window 550b is formed in the front cover 550 so as to be open. The confirmation window 550b is an opening for the player to confirm whether or not the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 540 has been changed (see FIG. 32), and the upper surface side of the handle device 51 (see FIG. 5A). On the outer peripheral surface of the front cover 550 which is the front side), a plurality (three in the present embodiment) is disposed along the circumferential direction with a predetermined interval.

  Whether or not the player has changed the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 540 based on the state (the difference in the color visually recognized as described later in this embodiment) visually recognized through the confirmation window 550b. (In this embodiment, as described later, the position of the operation end point is not changed when black is visually recognized, and the position of the operation end point is changed when white is visually recognized) Can. The identification structure using the confirmation window 550b will be described later.

  The button member 570 is formed in a hemispherical shape concentric with the front cover 550, and in the initial position shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. While being formed, when pushed in, it is sunk into the inside of the front cover 550 (see FIG. 26). Here, the button member 570 is an operation member for changing (setting) and canceling the position of the operation end point.

  Specifically, when the button member 570 is pushed in from the initial position, the position of the operation end point is changed (set) to the operation position of the handle ring 540 at the time when the button member 570 is pushed in. . For example, in a state in which the turning operation of the handle ring 540 is enabled in a section at a central angle of 120 degrees from the initial position to the maximum position (that is, the position of the operation end point is not changed) When the button member 570 is pushed in from the initial position when movement operation is performed and the operation amount of the rotation operation reaches a position where the central angle is 90 degrees from the initial position, the central angle with the initial position is The position of the operation end point is changed (set) to a position of 90 degrees.

  Therefore, the player is in the pivot position where the launch intensity of the gaming ball is the desired launch intensity (e.g., the pivot position at the time of the left hitting suitable for causing the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64). When the turning position of the handle ring 540 can be adjusted, the pressing operation of the button member 570 is performed, and the position of the operation end point is changed (set) to a position corresponding to the turning position of the handle ring 540, For example, in order to take a break, even if the pivoting position of the handle ring 540 is returned to the initial position and the game is interrupted, the pivot position of the handle ring 540 is the original pivot position (that is, the game is suspended) In the case of adjusting to the rotation position before turning and adjusting to the above-mentioned rotation position suitable for left hitting), if the handle ring 540 is turned to the operation end point (that is, the rotation operation is Regulated, more times If the handle ring 540 is turned to a position where the operation can not be performed), the operation amount (rotation position) of the rotation operation of the handle ring 540 is accurately and quickly adjusted to the original operation amount (rotation position) (The original rotational position can be reproduced accurately and quickly).

  For example, as in the case of a structure in which a scale is provided along the direction of the turning operation of the handle ring 540, it is visually checked whether the operation position of the handle ring 540 matches the target position (predetermined scale line). Since it is not necessary to make fine adjustments while determining, it is possible to accurately and quickly adjust to the original operation position (reproduce the original operation position). In addition, since the further turning operation is restricted by the operation end point, the turning operation of the handle ring 540 is not performed past the target position, so the operating speed of the handle ring 540 can be increased. Also from this point, it is possible to quickly adjust to the original operation position (reproduce the original operation position).

  According to the handle device 51, the hemispherical front cover 550 is thus disposed on the front side of the handle ring 540, and the button member 570 protrudes from the opening 550a on the top side of the front cover. Since one hemisphere is formed, the button member 570 can be easily pushed in with the palm using the operation of returning the wrist while keeping the handle ring 540 held by the fingers. it can. Therefore, when the pivot position (operation amount) of the handle ring 540 can be adjusted so that the launch intensity of the gaming ball becomes a desired launch intensity, the pivot position (operation amount) of the handle ring 540 is maintained. The button member 570 can be pressed and operated (that is, while the turning position of the handle ring 540 is shifted and the firing intensity of the gaming ball is suppressed from being inadvertently changed). As a result, the change (setting) of the operation end point can be performed quickly and at an accurate position.

  Release of the change (setting) of the operation end point can be performed by returning the pressed button member 570 to the initial position as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, whereby the handle ring 540 is moved to the maximum position. It becomes possible to rotate. The return structure of the button member 570 to the initial position and the release structure of the operation end point will be described later.

  The handle base 530 will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the handle mounting base 520 and the handle base 530, corresponding to the front perspective view of the handle device 51 with the handle ring 540 and the front cover 550 (both shown in FIGS. 5 and 6) removed. Do.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the handle base 530 has an outer peripheral wall 531 formed in a cylindrical shape with a circular front view, and a bottom wall 532 closing an opening of one of the outer peripheral wall 531 (rear surface, rear left side in FIG. 7). And by these two members 531, 532, the inside is formed in the shape of a container which is recessed to the back side (that is, the front side is opened). On the bottom wall 532, guide columns 533 a, 533 b and 533 c, an inner circumferential wall 534 and a bearing portion 535 are erected from the front of the bottom wall 532 toward the front (front cover 550 side).

  The guide support posts 533a to 533c are portions where the front cover 550 (see FIGS. 5 and 6) is fastened and fixed to the erected tip thereof, and a fastening screw can be inserted therein (ie, the bottom wall 532 side and the erected tip It is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape in which a through hole having an opening at both ends is formed. The fastening screws inserted from the bottom wall 532 side into the through holes of the guide columns 533a to 533c are fastened to the screw pedestals 552a to 552c (see FIG. 9A) of the front cover 550, respectively. The front cover 550 is fixed to the front.

  The inner peripheral wall 534 is formed in a cylindrical shape circular in a front view, and is concentrically disposed on the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral wall 531 with a predetermined distance from the outer peripheral wall 531. The inner circumferential wall 534 is divided at two places in the circumferential direction, and at the two divided parts (notched parts 534a and 534b), the firing stop switch operating part 440 is at one side and the handle limiting member is at the other side. 700 are disposed respectively.

  The bearing portion 535 is formed in a tubular shape having an opening on the front side (the side opposite to the bottom wall 532), and the switching device 600 is rotatably inserted on the inner peripheral side (see FIG. 25). The switching device 600 is a member for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 540, and a rotatable state capable of relative rotation of the switching device 600 with respect to the bearing 535 and a relative rotation impossible. It is possible to switch between two states, ie, the fixed fixed state. The end face on the opening side of the bearing portion 535 is formed as a flat surface perpendicular to the axial direction.

  In the switching device 600, a control protrusion 630 is formed. The restricting protrusion 630 is a rod-like member that protrudes radially outward, and is located on the movement locus of the handle side protrusion 546 (see FIG. 8) when the handle ring 540 is turned. Therefore, when the handle ring 540 is turned in the turning direction (clockwise in the front view (clockwise direction), hereinafter referred to as "increasing direction") to increase the launch strength of the gaming ball, the handle projection 546 is turned. It abuts on the control protrusion 630.

  In this case, when the switching device 600 is in the rotatable state, the control protrusion 630 is pushed in the increasing direction by the handle side protrusion 546, so that the switching device 600 also increases in the bearing portion 535. It is pivoted to On the other hand, when the state of the switching device 600 is switched to the engaged fixed state, relative rotation with respect to the bearing portion 535 of the switching device 600 is disabled (fixed to the bearing portion 535). The movement of the 546 in the increasing direction is restricted by the restriction protrusion 630. Thus, the turning operation of the handle ring 540 in the increasing direction is restricted. That is, the position (rotational position) at which the state of the switching device 600 is switched from the rotatable state to the engaged fixed state is the position at which the handle ring 540 is operated.

  In addition, it is the rotation direction of the handle ring 540, and the rotation direction which reduces the launch strength of the gaming ball is hereinafter referred to as the "decrease direction".

  A biasing force in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front is applied to the switching device 600 from a switching device biasing spring 539 formed as a torsion spring, and the biasing force exerts an initial position (the restricting protrusion 630 , And is returned to the position where the rotation of the switching device 600 is restricted) by being abutted on the handle side protrusion 546 of the handle ring 540 in the initial position.

  The detailed configuration of the switching device 600 and the engagement / fixing structure for the bearing 535 will be described later. Further, switching between the rotatable state and the regulated and fixed state of the switching device 600 is performed by a pressing operation of the button member 570, as described later.

  A driven gear 536 is disposed on the side of the bearing 535. The driven gear 536 is a gear engaged with the main moving gear 544 (see FIG. 8) of the handle ring 540, and is fixed to the resistance axis VRa of the variable resistor (not shown). Therefore, when the driven gear 536 is rotated, the resistance value of the variable resistor VR is changed according to the amount of rotation (rotational position).

  A biasing force in a clockwise direction (clockwise direction) in a front view is applied to the driven gear 536 from a handle biasing spring 537 formed as a torsion spring, and the biasing force exerts an initial position (the stopper portion 536a is a bearing portion 535). Is abutted against the outer circumferential protrusion 535b, and returned to the position where the rotation is regulated. The variable resistor is fixed to the bottom wall 532.

  A firing stop switch 51 b is fixed to the side of the bearing 535 and on the opposite side of the driven gear 536. A swingable swinging piece 51b1 is projected to the side of the firing stop switch 51b, and the firing stop switch 51b is turned on and off by pressing the swinging piece 51b1 by the firing stop switch operation unit 440. Be done.

  The handle ring 540 will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a rear perspective view of the handle ring 540.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the handle ring 540 is directed from the outer peripheral edge portion of the disc portion 541 toward the back side from a disc portion 541 formed in a circular disc shape in a front view circular shape covering the front surface of the handle base 530. And an outer peripheral wall 542 which is formed in a cylindrical shape having a circular front view, and a main moving gear 544 fixed in a posture projecting toward the back to the center of the disc portion 541, its main moving gear 544 and a circle A central hole 544a formed by penetrating the central portion of the plate portion 541 in the plate thickness direction, and a guide hole 545a formed by penetrating the disc portion 541 along the periphery of the central hole 544a, 545 b, and a handle-side protrusion 546 erected from the disc portion 542 toward the back side.

  The handle ring 540 is rotatably held on the handle base 530 by inserting the handle shaft support 574 (see FIG. 11A) of the button member 570 into the central hole 544a of the handle ring 540 (see FIG. In this case, the main driving gear 544 is meshed with the driven gear 536 (see FIG. 7) of the handle base 530. Therefore, when the handle ring 540 is operated to rotate, the driven gear 536 is rotated via the main driving gear 544, and the rotation of the resistance shaft VRa by the rotation of the driven gear 536 changes the resistance of the variable resistor. Therefore, the firing strength of the ball can be adjusted according to the resistance value of the variable resistor (ie, the amount of turning operation of the handle ring 540).

  In the present embodiment, the axial directions of the bearing 535 and the resistance axis VRa are parallel to each other, and the teeth (tooth grooves) of the driven gear 536 extend parallel to the axial direction (see FIG. 7). ). Further, the teeth (tooth grooves) of the main driving gear 544 extend in parallel with the axial direction of the central hole 544a of the handle ring 540.

  The guide holes 545a and 545b are holes that are opened for inserting the guide columns 533a to 533c (see FIG. 7), and are elongated holes shaped along the outer edge of the handle ring 540 (ie, central holes 544a). The ring shape centering on the axis is formed in a shape divided at two points different in phase by 180 °. The guide support post 533a is inserted into the guide hole 545a, and the guide support posts 533b and 533c are inserted into the guide hole 545b.

  Therefore, the guide support 533a and the guide support 533b and 533c are guided in the guide hole 545a and the guide hole 545b, respectively, as the handle ring 540 rotates. Therefore, the pivotable range of the handle ring 540 is limited to the range in which the guide columns 533a to 533c can move relatively in the guide holes 545a and 545b. Specifically, the pivoting range of the handle ring 540 is defined by the guide holes 545b through which the two columns (guide columns 533b and 533c) are inserted, and the pivoting range is approximately 90 degrees in the present embodiment. / 4 laps).

  The handle side protrusion 546 is a portion for transmitting the rotation of the handle ring 540 to the switching device 600, and is formed as a rod-like body having a rectangular cross section. When the handle ring 540 is pivoted, the side surface of the handle side protrusion 546 is in contact with the side surface of the restricting protrusion 630 of the switching device 600, and the handle ring 540 is interposed between the two protrusions 546 and 630. Rotation is transmitted to the switching device 600.

  Next, the front cover 550 will be described with reference to FIG. 9 (a). FIG. 9A is a rear perspective view of the front cover 550. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, the front cover 550 is formed in the shape of a hemispherical container in which the inside is recessed to the front side (that is, the back side is opened), and the top is a circular hole in a front view. While a certain opening 550a is formed, screw pedestals 552a to 552c are erected on the inner wall surface toward the back surface. Guide columns 533a to 533c (see FIG. 7) are fastened and fixed to the screw pedestals 552a to 552c, respectively. Further, on the inner wall surface of the front cover 550, a cylindrical tubular guide portion 554 having the same inner diameter as the opening 550a is extended along the rotational axis direction. The cylindrical guide portion 554 guides the inner fitting wall portion 577 of the button member 570 along the rotational axis direction by the inner peripheral surface thereof.

  Confirmation windows 550 b and 554 b are respectively formed in the front cover 550 and the cylindrical guide portion 554. Here, these confirmation windows 550b and 554b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 (a) is a top view of the front cover 550 in the direction of arrow Xa in FIG. 9 (a), and FIG. 10 (b) is a portion of the front cover 550 at line Xa-Xa in FIG. It is an expanded sectional view.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b), the confirmation window 550b formed in the front cover 550 is composed of a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) rectangular openings in a front view, each of which is an opening Are disposed on a straight line along the longitudinal direction along the circumferential direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 10A) of the front cover 550. The confirmation window 554b disposed in the cylindrical guide portion 554 is an opening formed in the same shape as the confirmation window 550b formed in the front cover 550, and as shown in FIG. It is disposed at the facing position. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the outer wall surface of the button member 570 through the confirmation window 554b of the cylindrical guide portion 554 by visually recognizing the inside through the confirmation window 550b of the front cover 550 (see FIG. 32). ).

  As described above, the confirmation windows 550b and 554b are openings for confirming whether the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 540 has been changed based on the state of being visually recognized through the confirmation window 550b. is there. In this case, the confirmation windows 550b and 554b are disposed on the upper surface side of the front cover 550 in the assembled state of the handle device 51 (see FIG. 5A), so the player facing the pachinko machine 10 to play When starting the game, the player can easily visually recognize the confirmation windows 550b and 554b. Further, since a plurality of confirmation windows 550b and 554b are disposed along the circumferential direction, even when the player is at a position shifted from the front of the handle device 51 to the left and right, such confirmation windows 550b and 554b can be used as the player. Can be clearly identified.

  Referring back to FIG. 9A, the description will be made. Between the front cover 550 and the handle ring 540, a handle biasing spring (not shown) formed as a torsion spring is disposed. The handle biasing spring biases the handle ring 540 counterclockwise in a front view. This biasing direction coincides with the biasing direction in which the handle biasing spring 537 (see FIG. 7) for biasing the driven gear 536 described above biases the handle ring 540 via the driven gear 536 and the main driving gear 544. Do. Therefore, when the player releases the handle ring 540, the handle ring 540 is a handle biasing spring (not shown) disposed between the front cover 550 and the handle ring 540, and a handle that biases the driven gear 536. The biasing force of the two springs with the biasing spring 536 returns to the initial position.

  A base portion 551 is disposed on an inner wall surface of the front cover 550, and a guide groove 553 is recessed on a flat surface of the base portion 551. The guide groove 553 is a groove in a well-known "heart cam system" for causing the button member 570 to function as a push button switch that can be held at two positions, the first position or the second position. The guide groove 553 will be described later (see FIG. 9B).

  Next, the button member 570 will be described. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the button member 570, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the button member 570 illustrating the connection structure between the handle shaft support 574 and the shaft 573.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the button member 570 includes an operation portion 571 forming the front surface of the button member 570, a back surface base 572 protruding from the center of the back surface of the operation portion 571 and a back surface base 572 thereof. A shaft 573 extended, a handle shaft support 574 rotatably attached to the extended end of the shaft 573 and formed in a cylindrical shape, and an end surface of the handle shaft support 574 A connecting shaft 575 and a push-in piece 576, a cylindrical inner fitting wall 577 protruding from the back of the operation portion 571, and a guide pin piece 578 arranged on the outer surface of the back base 572; The operation portion 571, the back surface base 572, the shaft 573, the handle shaft support 574, the connecting shaft 575, and the inner fitting wall 577 are concentrically arranged.

  The operation unit 571 is formed in a shape obtained by cutting a part of a sphere, and protrudes from the opening 550a (see FIG. 9A) of the front cover 550, thereby enabling a player to operate a pressed spherical operated portion. (See FIGS. 25-27).

  The back surface base 572 is a portion that forms a bearing surface of the button biasing spring 590 (see FIGS. 25 to 27). That is, the button biasing spring 590 is formed as a coil spring, and between the front side of the handle ring 540 and the back side of the back base 572 while inserting the shaft 573 and the handle shaft support 574 on the inner peripheral side. In an axially compressed state. Thus, the button member 570 is always biased in the direction away from the handle ring 540 by the elastic recovery force of the button biasing spring 590.

  The shaft 573 includes a shaft-like portion 573a having a circular cross section, and a spherical portion 573b disposed at the tip of the shaft-like portion 573a and having a spherical shape larger in diameter than the shaft-like portion 573a. . The operation portion 571 is integrally formed with the base portion 572, the shaft 573, and the inner fitting wall portion 577 from a resin material.

  The handle shaft support 574 is a cylindrical portion for pivotally supporting the handle ring 540, and is inserted into the central hole 544a of the handle ring 540 (see FIGS. 25 to 27). That is, the outer diameter of the handle shaft support 574 is set to a size slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the central hole 544a of the handle ring 540, and the handle shaft support 574 is inserted into the central hole 544a. Handle ring 540 is pivotally supported by handle shaft support 574.

  In addition, the handle shaft supporting body 574 is formed by bonding two members formed by dividing a cylindrical shape into two in a plane including an axis. In these two members, a ball receiving portion 574b serving as a space for receiving the spherical portion 573b of the shaft 573 and a bearing receiving portion 574a for receiving the shaft-like portion 573a of the shaft 573 and a space in which the spherical portion 573b can not pass. And are formed. Thus, the handle shaft support 574 is mounted on the shaft 573 so as to be rotatable about its axis and immovable in the axial direction.

  Thereby, as described later, when the switching device 600 is rotated with the turning operation of the handle ring 540, only the handle shaft support 574 can be rotated independently from the shaft 573. It is possible to suppress the rotation of the operation unit 571 which is the operated portion. That is, when the player rotates the handle ring 540, it is possible to prevent the operation portion 571 from rotating in the palm of the player's hand and giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  The connection shaft 575 is a portion formed as a shaft having a trapezoidal cross section which is inserted into the connection hole 620 of the switching device 600 (see FIGS. 25 to 27), and is extended on the shaft of the handle shaft support 574 (Ie, formed concentrically with the handle shaft support 574). The connection hole 620 of the switching device 600 is formed as a hole having a trapezoidal cross section corresponding to the outer shape of the connection shaft 575, whereby the connection shaft 575 is axially relative to the connection hole 620 of the switching device 600. It is coupled so as to be movable and relatively unrotatable in the circumferential direction.

  Further, in addition to the fact that the connecting shaft 575 and the connecting hole 620 can be connected so as not to allow relative rotation by forming the connecting shaft 575 as a shaft body having a trapezoidal cross section, positioning of both rotating direction positions (phases) It can be done (the two can regulate the phase that can be combined at only one place). That is, in the assembly process of the handle device 51, after the rotational direction position of the push-in piece 576 is made to coincide with the relief space 661 of the switching device 600, the connecting shaft 575 and the connecting hole 620 need to be connected. In this embodiment, the rotational direction position (phase) of the connecting shaft 575 and the connecting hole 620 is positioned at one position, so that the rotational direction position is wrong (pushing piece 576 (see FIG. 25 to FIG. 27). It is possible to avoid coupling in such a state that the rotational direction position of the light source does not coincide with the relief space 661 of the switching device 600. As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the assembly operation and to suppress the assembly failure.

  The pushing piece 576 is a portion for pushing the biting balls 670a and 670b of the switching device 600 into the biting space 651 (see FIGS. 15 and 26), and the side of the connecting shaft 575 of the handle shaft support 574. It is formed in a plate shape extending along the axis and having a cross-sectional shape (that is, a shape which can be inserted into the biting space 651) corresponding to the biting space 651 of the switching device 600. As a result, when the button member 570 is pushed in, the extended tip end face of the pushing piece 576 bites the bit balls 670 a and 670 b into the bit space 651.

  The connecting shaft 575 and the push-in piece 576 are integrally formed on the handle shaft support 574. Further, as described above, in the button member 570, the connecting shaft 575 is coupled to the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 600 so as not to be relatively rotatable. Therefore, since the handle shaft support 574 and the switching device 600 are integrally rotated through the connection of the connecting shaft 575 and the connecting hole 620, the phase of the push-in piece 576 and the relief space 661 is always matched. Can maintain the That is, even when the switching device 600 is turned to any rotational position (phase) with respect to the handle base 530 (bearing portion 535), when the button member 570 is pushed in, the pushing operation is performed. The pieces 576 allow the pinching balls 670 a, 670 b of the switching device 600 to be pushed into the pinching space 651.

  The inner fitting wall portion 577 is a cylindrical portion for holding the button member 570 so as to be movable relative to the front cover 550 in the axial direction, and is inserted into the cylindrical guide portion 554 of the front cover 550 (see FIG. 25 to 27). That is, the outer diameter of the inner fitting wall 577 is set to a size slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical guide 554 of the front cover 550, and the inner fitting wall 577 is inserted into the cylindrical guide 554. As a result, the button member 570 is rotatably (axially) supported by the front cover 550 so as to be rotatable and axially movable.

  Thus, as described above, the button shaft 570 is held by the bearing 535 of the handle base 530 via the switching device 600 (ie, the coupling of the joint shaft 575 and the coupling hole 620) as described above. The inner fitting wall 577 is held by the cylindrical guide 554 of the front cover 550. That is, since the button member 570 is held at two positions axially separated from the handle base 530 and the front cover 550, which are fixed systems, the button member 570 can be held in a stable state without rattling. As a result, smooth push operation can be achieved.

  Here, the outer peripheral surface of the inner fitting wall portion 577 is formed in a color different from the outer peripheral surface of the operation portion 571. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the outer peripheral surface of the inner fitting wall portion 577 is formed in black, while the outer peripheral surface of the operation portion 571 is formed in white. Therefore, while the button member 570 is in the first position (initial position), the player is allowed to visually recognize the outer peripheral surface (black) of the inner fitting wall portion 577 via the confirmation window 550b of the front cover 550 (FIG. a) Refer to allowing the player to visually recognize the outer peripheral surface (white) of the operation unit 571 via the confirmation window 550b of the front cover 550 when the button member 570 is in the second position (the position where the push operation is performed). (See FIG. 32 (b)). Thereby, the player can determine whether the button member 570 is disposed at the first position or the second position based on the difference in color viewed through the confirmation window 550b (ie, the handle ring 540). Whether or not the position of the operation end point of (1) has been changed can be easily identified.

  The guide pin piece 578 is a member guided by the guide groove 553 (see FIGS. 9A and 9B) formed in the base portion 551 of the front cover 550, and has a bar-like shape in cross section made of a metal material. It is formed by bending the body. The guide pin piece 578 has a proximal end portion rotatably embedded in the rear surface base 572 and a main body portion extending from the proximal end portion in the axial direction of the button member 570 (that is, the direction of the pushing operation). The distal end portion of the main body portion is bent by 90 degrees outward in the radial direction of the button member 570, and the distal end portion is in contact with the guide groove 553 at an angle of 90 degrees.

  When the button member 570 is pushed in, as described above, the guide pin piece 578 moves the guide groove 553 (see FIGS. 9A and 9B), whereby the pushed-in position of the button member 570 is changed. It is switched to the first position or the second position. Here, referring back to FIG. 9B, the structure in which the button member 570 is held at the first position or the second position by the guide pin piece 578 being guided by the guide groove 553 will be described.

  FIG. 9 (b) is a front view of the guide groove 553. 9B, the right side in FIG. 9B corresponds to the operation portion 571 side of the button member 570, and the left side in FIG. 9B corresponds to the handle ring 540 side.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, the guide groove 553 is a recessed groove for guiding the guide pin piece 578 (see FIG. 11) of the button member 570, and is formed as a circumferential path having a heart shape in a front view. At the same time, a plurality of steps are formed with directivity in the path.

  By moving (guided) the guide pin piece 578 along the guide groove 553, the button member 570 is held at either the first position or the second position (see FIGS. 25 and 26). Further, in the process of returning from the second position to the first position, the button member 570 is held at the third position only while being held in the state of being pushed in by the player (see FIG. 27).

  Specifically, with the guide pin piece 578 positioned at the position P1, the button member 570 is positioned at the first position. In this state, the guide pin piece 578 is a biasing force of the button biasing spring 590 (see FIGS. 25 to 27) (a direction in which the button member 570 is separated from the handle ring 540 as described above (FIG. Force) is pressed against the wall portion 553a of the guide groove 553 and maintained at the position P1.

  When the button member 570 at the first position is pushed in, the guide pin piece 578 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 553 (path L1) and passes over the end 553b of the first step, and then the wall portion 553c Hit the As a result, the pushing operation of the button member 570 can not be performed. Thus, the player releases the button member 570 and the operation force in the pushing direction is released.

  Thus, the guide pin piece 578 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 553 by the biasing force of the button biasing spring 590 (path L2), and after crossing over the end 553d of the second step, the wall portion 553e By hitting, it is positioned at position P2. In this case, the guide pin piece 578 is maintained at the position P2 by being pressed against the wall portion 553e of the guide groove 553 by the biasing force of the button biasing spring 590. As a result, the button member 570 is set (held) at the second position.

  When the button member 570 at the second position is pushed in, the guide pin piece 578 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 553 (path L3), and after crossing over the end 553f of the third step, the wall portion 553g Hit the (position P3). As a result, the pushing operation of the button member 570 can not be performed. Thus, the player releases the button member 570 and the operation force in the pushing direction is released.

  Thereby, the guide pin piece 578 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 553 by the biasing force of the button biasing spring 590 (path L4), and after crossing over the end 553h of the fourth step, the wall portion 553a By hitting, it is positioned at the position P1. In this case, the guide pin piece 578 is maintained at the position P1 by being pressed against the wall portion 553a of the guide groove 553 by the biasing force of the button biasing spring 590. As a result, the button member 570 is set (held) at the first position. That is, the button member 570 is returned to the first position as the guide pin piece 578 makes one turn around the guide groove 553 (heart-shaped circumferential path).

  The button member 570 in the second position is pushed in, the guide pin piece 578 abuts against the wall portion 553g, and the state in the position P3 is the third position of the button member 570. That is, while the button member 570 in the second position is pushed by the player to the pushable position (position P3) against the urging force of the button urging spring 590 (ie, the third position) The guide pin piece 578 is formed only while it is kept in abutment with the wall portion 553g.

  In this case, at the first position, the push-in piece 576 of the button member 570 is at the second position and the third position at positions where the biting balls 670a and 670b of the switching device 600 are retracted from the biting space 651 to the flank surface space 761. Then, they are disposed at positions where the biting balls 670a and 670b of the switching device 600 are pushed into the biting space 651 (see FIGS. 25 to 27).

  Next, the switching device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. First, the basic configuration of the switching device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14.

  13 (a) is a front view of the switching device 600, and FIG. 13 (b) is a side view of the switching device 600 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIIIb of FIG. 13 (a). Fig.14 (a) is sectional drawing of the switching apparatus 600 in the XIVa-XIVa line of Fig.13 (a), FIG.14 (b) is a side surface of the switching apparatus 600 in the arrow XIVb direction view of Fig.13 (a). FIG. In FIGS. 13 and 14, the biting balls 670a and 670b, the pushing side biasing spring 680 and the biting side biasing spring 690 are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the switching device 600 is projected radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610, the connection hole 620 formed through the main body 610, and the connecting hole 620. And a locking surface 650 and a flank surface 660 formed by recessing the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610.

  The main body portion 610 is a portion that forms the skeleton of the switching device 600, and is formed in a cylindrical shape. The outer diameter of the main body 610 is set to a size slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the bearing 535 (see FIG. 7) of the handle base 530. Thus, the main body portion 610 is rotatably held in the bearing portion 535 by being inserted into the bearing portion 535 of the handle base 530 (see FIG. 25).

  The connection hole 620 is a through hole to which the connection shaft 575 (see FIG. 11) of the button member 570 is connected, and is formed on the axis of the main body 610 (that is, as a hole concentric with the main body 610). The cross-sectional shape of the connection hole 620 is formed in a shape (trapezoidal shape) corresponding to the connection shaft 575 of the button member 570, whereby, as described above, the connection shaft 575 is relatively movable in the axial direction and circumferentially It is coupled non-rotatably.

  Further, as described above, the cross-sectional shape of the connection hole 620 and the connection shaft 575 is trapezoidal, thereby positioning the rotational direction position (phase) of the both (a phase in which both can be coupled to each other) Can only be regulated). That is, in the assembly process of the handle device 51, after making the rotational direction position of the push-in piece 576 coincide with the relief space 661 of the switching device 600, it is necessary to connect the connecting shaft 575 and the connecting hole 620 In the present embodiment, since the rotational direction position (phase) of the connecting shaft 575 and the connecting hole 620 is positioned at one position in this embodiment, the rotational direction position is incorrect (the button member 570). It can be avoided that the push-in piece 576 is coupled in such a state that the rotational direction does not match the relief space 661. As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the assembly operation and to suppress the assembly failure.

  The restricting protrusion 630 is a portion that is in contact with the handle side protrusion 546 of the handle ring 540, and is formed as a rod-like body having a rectangular cross section. The spring receiving portion 640 is a portion serving as a seating surface for receiving a biasing force acting from the switching device biasing spring 539 (see FIG. 7).

  The restricting protrusion 630 and the spring receiving portion 640 are located on the front side (front side, upper side in FIG. 13B) in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 13B) of the main body 610, and the restricting protrusions The back surfaces (the lower surfaces in FIG. 13B) of the portion 630 and the spring receiving portion 640 are formed as flat surfaces that are flush with each other (that is, the positions of the main body portion 610 in the axial direction are the same). Thereby, in a state where the switching device 600 is inserted into the bearing 535 of the handle base 530, the back surface of the restriction projection 630 and the spring receiving portion 640 abuts on the end face of the bearing 535 on the opening side. Positioning in the axial direction of the (main body portion 610) can be performed (see FIG. 15). Further, since the restriction projection 630 and the spring receiving portion 640 are disposed at intervals in the circumferential direction, two switching devices 600 (the main body portion 610) are provided with respect to the end face on the opening side of the bearing portion 535. The switching device 600 can be stably rotated within the bearing 535 by that amount.

  The biting surface 650 makes the switching device 600 (the main body 610) relative to the bearing 535 by causing the balls 670a and 670b to bite into engagement with the inner circumferential surface of the bearing 530 of the handle base 530. The clearance surface 660 is a portion for making it impossible to rotate (engagement fixed state) (see FIGS. 15B and 15D), and the flank surface 660 is an inner circumferential surface of the bearing portion 530 of the handle base 530 Between the ball 670a and the ball 670b, and the switching device 600 (main body 610) can be rotated relative to the bearing 535 (rotational state) 15 (a) and 15 (c)).

  As shown in FIG. 13A, the biting surface 650 and the flank surface 660 are a part of the recess (bottom surface of the recess) formed by recessing the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610 in a U-shape in a front view. The engagement surface 650 is formed as a flat surface parallel to the axis of the main body 610 (the vertical direction in FIG. 14A), and the flank surface 660 is the upper surface of the engagement surface 650 (FIG. a) It is formed as a flat surface which is continuously connected to the upper side and inclined in the direction closer to the axis of the main body 610 as it is separated from the connection portion.

  Therefore, the biting space 651 formed corresponding to the biting surface 650 (that is, the space formed between the biting surface 650 and the inner circumferential surface of the bearing 535 in the handle base 530) is the main body It is formed as a space having the same cross-sectional shape along the axial direction of 610. In this case, in the biting space 651, in the front view shown in FIG. 13A, between the opposing surfaces of the inner circumferential surface of the bearing portion 535 and the biting surface 650, clearances gradually decreasing in the circumferential direction are formed at both ends. (See FIG. 15 (c) or FIG. 15 (d)).

In addition, a clearance space 661 corresponding to the clearance surface 660 (ie, a space formed between the clearance surface 660 and the inner circumferential surface of the bearing portion 535 in the handle base 530) It is formed as a space in which the cross-sectional area increases as it is separated. That is, the distance between the inner circumferential surface of the bearing portion 535 and the facing of the biting surface 650 is increased as it is separated from the biting space 651. (See FIG. 15 (c) or FIG. 15 (d))
Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the pivotable state and the restricted / fixed state of the switching device 600 and the switching structure of both the states will be described.

  FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b) are cross-sectional views of the switching device 600, and correspond to the cross section along line XIVa-XIVa of FIG. 13 (a). 15 (c) is a front view of the switching device 600 in the direction of arrow XVc in FIG. 15 (a), and FIG. 15 (d) is a front view of the switching device 600 in the direction of arrow XVd in FIG. FIG.

  In FIG. 15, a state in which the switching device 600 is attached (inserted) to the bearing 535 of the handle base 530 is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (c), the bite balls 670a and 670b are disposed in the relief space 661 in FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (d). The state where 670b is arranged in the biting space 651 is illustrated respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the switching device 600 includes biting balls 670a and 670b, a pushing side biasing spring 680 and a biting side biasing spring 690, which are disposed in the biting space 651 or the relief space 661. Ru. The biting balls 670 a and 670 b are members formed in a spherical shape, and when the ball is arranged in the biting space 651, the diameter dimension of the ball is the inner peripheral surface of the bearing 535 and the biting surface 650. The diametrical dimension is set such that it can be caught in the clearance between both ends of the opposite end which gradually decreases in the circumferential direction. When the sphere moves between the inner circumferential surface of the bearing portion 535 and the biting surface 650 and moves to a gap on the circumferential center side, a biting state is not formed between the ball and the gap. , Rollable diameter dimension is set.

  The pushing side biasing spring 680 is interposed between the end of the biting space 651 (the wall opposite to the relief space 661) and the biting balls 670a and 670b in a state of being elastically compressed, and its elastic recovery The force pushes up the biting balls 670 a and 670 b in the axial direction of the main body 610. Thus, in a state where the biting balls 670a and 670b are not pushed in by the pushing pieces 576 of the button member 570 (see FIG. 25), as shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (c) In the state of being pushed in by the pushing piece 576 of the button member 570 (see FIG. 26), as shown in FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (d), it is arranged in the biting space 651. .

  The biting side biasing spring 690 is interposed between the biting balls 670a and 670b in an elastically compressed state, and the elastic recovery force causes the biting balls 670a and 670b to move away from each other. Energize. Accordingly, when the biting balls 670a and 670b are disposed in the biting space 651, as shown in FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (d), the inner peripheral surface and the biting surface of the bearing 535 are engaged. It is caught between the facing of 650 and the clearance which gradually decreases in the circumferential direction.

  The operation of the switching device 600 configured as described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (c), the entrained spheres 670a and 670b are disposed in the relief space 661 (ie, the entrained spheres 670a and 670b are engaged by the push-in piece 576 of the button member 570). In the state where it is not pushed into the insertion space 651 (see FIG. 25), the gap between the facing of the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 and the biting surface 650 and the biting of the biting balls 670a and 670b are not formed Therefore, the switching device 600 (main body 610) is set to be rotatable, and can be rotated relative to the bearing 535 in either direction of the arrows A and B shown in FIG. Be done.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15 (b) and FIG. 15 (d), the entrained spheres 670a and 670b are disposed in the entrapped space 651 (ie, the entrained spheres 670a and 670b by the push-in piece 576 of the button member 570). In a state where the 670 b is pushed into the biting space 651 (see FIG. 26), the biasing force of the biting side biasing spring 690 causes the inner circumferential surface of the bearing portion 535 to face the biting surface 650. Since the balls 670a and 670b are engaged in the clearance gradually decreasing in the circumferential direction, the switching device 600 is set in the engaged fixed state, and the rotation of the switching device 600 (main body 610) relative to the bearing 535 Is blocked (fixed) as follows.

  That is, when the switching device 600 (main body portion 610) tries to rotate in the direction of arrow A shown in FIG. The circumferential end (lower side in FIG. 15 (d)) of the insertion surface 650 acts to further engage the biting ball 670b between the facing to the inner circumferential surface of the bearing 535 and thereby the bearing Relative rotation of the switching device 600 (body portion 610) in the direction of arrow A relative to 535 is blocked.

  Similarly, when the switching device 600 (main body 610) tries to rotate in the direction of arrow B shown in FIG. 15 (d), it is on the rear side in the rotational direction of the main body 610 (rotational direction lag side). The circumferential end (the upper side in FIG. 15D) of the biting surface 650 acts to further bite the biting ball 670a between the facing to the inner circumferential surface of the bearing 535, thereby the bearing Relative rotation of the switching device 600 (body portion 610) in the direction of arrow B relative to 535 is blocked.

  Next, the boss member 560 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 is a rear perspective view of the handle base 530. FIG. In FIG. 16, a state in which the variable resistor and the firing stop switch operation unit 440 and the like are removed is illustrated, and the positional relationship between the shaft 563 and the bearing 523 is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line. .

  As shown in FIG. 16, the boss member 560 is a member for movably connecting the handle base 530 to the handle mount 520 about a pivotally supported portion, and from the back of the handle base 530 It is provided in a projecting manner. That is, as described later, the bearing 523 is formed on the handle mount 520, the shaft 563 is formed on the boss member 560, and the shaft 563 is rotatably supported by the bearing 523. The handle base 530 is displaceable with respect to the handle mount 520 with a pivotally supported portion as a center (fulcrum). The displacement of the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mounting base 520 with the axially supported portion as the center (fulcrum) may be expressed as "rocking" or "pivoting".

  The boss member 560 has a flat base 561 fastened and fixed to the rear surface (bottom wall 532) of the handle base 530, and a projection 562 which protrudes from the base 561 toward the rear surface and is formed in a circular rod shape. A shaft-like shaft 563 in which a pair is projected to the left and right from the outer surface of the projecting portion 562 and a harness guide 564 disposed on the lower surface of the projecting tip of the projecting portion 562 are mainly configured.

  An inclined surface 562 a is formed on the upper surface of the protrusion 562 so as to be inclined downward according to the distance from the base 561 (shaft 563) (that is, toward the harness guide 564). Here, the protruding portion 562 of the boss member 560 is a protruding tip end side (harness guide 564) relative to the shaft 563 due to the displacement centering on the shaft supporting portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) of the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mount 520. Since the part on the side is a part that is displaced upward (see FIGS. 23 and 24), the other member (ie, the switch disposed in the handle mount 520) located above, the IC device, It is necessary to avoid interference with the harness or the reinforcing rib 526 integrally formed on the handle mount 520 or the like.

  In this case, by moving the arrangement position of the other member upward, the handle mount 520 is enlarged by that much, and by forming the inclined surface 562 a on the upper surface of the protrusion 562, the handle mount Interference with other members and the projection part 562 can be avoided while achieving miniaturization of 520. In particular, as the inclined surface 562a is formed as an inclined surface which is inclined downward as it is separated from the shaft 563 as described above, the amount of clearance is increased as the protruding end side with a large amount of displacement is increased, thereby interfering with other members. The rigidity of the protrusion 562 can be secured by minimizing the amount of removal of the protrusion 562 on the side of the shaft 563 where the amount of displacement is small while avoiding effectively.

  A pair of guide walls 562 b for holding the base biasing spring SP (see FIG. 19) is provided upright at the projecting tip end of the projecting portion 562. As described above, by holding the base biasing spring SP between the pair of guide walls 562a, the structure can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced, and the base biasing spring SP is assembled. Thus, the assemblability can be improved. The upper surface of the projecting portion 562 located between the facings of the guide walls 562b is curved in an arc shape in a rear view, and can elastically deform the base urging spring SP smoothly.

  The harness guide 564 is a member for guiding electrical wiring, and is formed in a frame shape in a rear view. Wiring that enters the handle mount 520 from the inside of the handle base 530 through the opening of the bottom wall 532 (such as the wiring of the firing stop switch 51b) or the wire that exists in the handle mount 520 (such as the wiring of a variable resistor) When the handle base 530 is displaced about the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) by being accommodated in the frame of the harness guide 564 (passed in the frame), the upper surface of the projection 562, or It is possible to avoid breaking the wire by sandwiching the wire between the lower surface of the harness guide 564 and the inner wall surface of the other member or the handle mount 520.

  Note that projecting the guide wall 562 b from the upper surface of the projecting portion 562 increases the possibility of sandwiching the wiring with another member or the handle mount 520. In the present embodiment, by providing the harness guide 564 and passing the inside of the frame of the harness guide 564, it is possible to suppress the pinching (breaking) of the wiring. As a result, the guide wall 562b can be made to project on the upper surface of the projection 562, and the structure for holding the base biasing spring SP can be simplified and the assemblability can be improved.

  A mating surface 532 a is formed on the back surface (bottom wall 532) of the handle base 530. The mating surface 532a is a portion to which the upper mating surface 527 (and the lower mating surface 528) of the handle mount 520 abuts, and the entire longitudinal annular area surrounding the periphery of the base 561 of the boss member 560 is It is formed as a flush flat surface.

  Next, the handle mount 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the handle mount 520 in an exploded state. FIG. 18 (a) is a perspective view of the handle mount 520 in an assembled state, and FIG. 18 (b) is an inner side view of the first main body 520a.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the handle mount 520 is formed as a vertically long cylindrical body, and is vertically divided into a first main body 520 a and a second main body 520 b. A positioning projection 521a is provided on one of the mating surfaces of the first main body 520a and the second main body 520b so as to protrude from one side, and a positioning hole 521b for receiving and positioning the positioning projection 521a is located at the other corresponding position. It is recessed. Similarly, an insertion hole 522a for inserting a fastening screw is formed to be penetrated in one side, and a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 522a is fastened to fasten and fix the first main body 520a and the second main body 520b. Fastening holes 522b are recessed at the other corresponding positions.

  A bearing 523, a locking claw 524, an accommodation recess 525, and a reinforcing rib 526 are respectively formed on the inner wall surfaces of the first main body 520 a and the second main body 520 b. The bearing 523 is a bearing portion (recessed portion) for pivotally supporting the shaft 563 of the boss member 560, and a pair of the bearings are arranged to face each other. The locking claw portion 524 is a portion for locking the end of the base biasing spring SP (see FIG. 12), and is formed in a hook shape bent downward while protruding toward the back surface.

  The housing recess 525 and the reinforcing rib 526 are portions disposed at one and the other opposite positions of the first main body 520a and the second main body 520b. That is, the storage recess 525 is a recess for storing and holding a component such as an IC device, and is formed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the component to be stored, and the reinforcing rib 526 is from the inner wall surface to the storage recess 525 The rigidity of the handle mounting base 520 as a whole is enhanced by pressing the components stored in the storage recess 525 by protruding toward the top and by the protruding tip.

  An upper mating surface 527 and a lower mating surface 528, which are brought into contact with the mating surface 532a (see FIG. 16) of the handle base 530, are provided on the front surfaces (right side of FIG. 18A) of the first main body 520a and the second main body 520b. It is formed. The upper mating surface portion 527 and the lower mating surface portion 528 are formed on the front end face of the handle mount 520 (a longitudinally long annular surface in a front view), and each is formed as a flush flat surface. The lower mating surface 528 is inclined toward the back as it is separated from the upper mating surface 527. As a result, the handle base 530 can be displaced relative to the handle mount 520 about the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) (see FIGS. 23 and 24).

  The lower mating surface portion 528 of the first main body 520a is partially enlarged (that is, the plate-like body protrudes radially inward from the inner wall surface of the first main body 520a), and the enlarged portion (protruded portion) Is a pressing surface portion 528a for pressing the pressed surface portion 702a of the handlebar regulation member 700. The reinforcing portion 528 b is continuously provided on the back side of the pressing surface portion 528 a. The reinforcing portion 528 b is formed in a plate shape, and only the upper end side of the pressing surface portion 528 a is connected to the inner wall surface of the first main body 520 a and the step surface 520 a 1. As a result, since the space can be formed between the inner wall surface of the first main body 520a and the reinforcement portion 528b, the resin material is suppressed, and the rigidity of the pressing surface portion 528a is effectively enhanced while reducing the cost of parts. The durability can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the base biasing spring SP will be described. FIG. 19 is a rear perspective view of the handle mount 520 and the handle base 530. In FIG. 19, a state in which the variable resistor and the like are removed is illustrated, and wiring of other components is not illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the base biasing spring SP is formed as a coil spring, and the annular portions at both ends are locked to the locking claws 524 in a state of being elastically deformed in tension (stretched). At the same time, a substantially middle portion of the coil spring is bridged over the protruding end of the protruding portion 562 of the boss member 560 (between the facing of the pair of guide walls 562b).

  As a result, the boss member 560 is biased in a direction (downward) in which the projecting tip end of the projecting portion 562 approaches the locking claw portion 524 around the shaft 563 by the elastic recovery force of the base biasing member SP. As a result, the handle base 530 is displaced upward with respect to the handle mount 520 (see FIG. 23).

  The handle mount 520 is formed to be open at the back, so that the inner space of the handle mount 520 can be exposed from the open portion at the back. As a result, both ends of the base biasing spring SP are locked to the locking claws 524 and work to bridge the middle portion between the pair of guide walls 562 b is performed from the open portion of the back surface of the handle mount 520. Since it can carry out, the improvement of the workability of the attachment work can be aimed at.

  When the handle base 530 is displaced upward (bumped up), the upper mating surface 527 of the handle mount 520 is in contact with the mating surface 532a of the handle base 530. That is, mating surfaces (upper mating surface 527 and mating surface 532a) formed in a flat surface shape are formed on the facing surfaces (matching surfaces) of the handle mounting base 520 and the handle base 530, and these mating surfaces are the handle base In a state where the displacement position 530 is disposed at the initial position (first position), the contact is made by the biasing force of the base biasing spring SP. Due to the close contact, in the initial position, the handle base 530 can be maintained in a stable state without being shaken with the handle mount 520. As a result, for example, the operability at the time of rotating the handle ring 540 can be improved.

  In the state where the displacement position of the handle base 530 is disposed at the initial position, the mating surfaces (upper mating surface 527 and mating surface 532a) in close contact with each other are on the handle mount 520 and the handle base 530 (upper surface). Since it is positioned, when the mating surface is opened (see FIG. 20), foreign matter such as foreign matter, dust, or dirt dropped carelessly by the player can be prevented from entering the inside of the handle mount 520. In particular, the handle base 530 is returned to the initial position (first position) by the biasing force of the base biasing spring SP, and the mating surface (upper mating surface portion 527 and mating surface portion 532a) The configuration disposed above is effective.

  Next, the handle control member 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of the handle base 530 in a state in which the handle restricting member 700 is mounted, and FIG. 21 is a front perspective view of the handle base 530 in a state in which the handle restricting member 700 is removed. FIGS. 20 and 21 illustrate a state in which the variable resistor, the emission stop switch operation unit 440, the switching device 600, and the like are removed.

  As shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21, the handlebar regulation member 700 is attached to the notch portion 534b formed in the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handlebar base 530. In the bottom wall 532 of the handle base 530, a through hole 532b circular in a front view and penetrating from the front surface to the back surface (specifically, the mating surface 532a) is formed. The through hole 532 b and the notch 534 b are parallel to the pivot axis of the handle ring 540.

  The handle regulation member 700 is a resin material member for regulating the return of the handle ring 540 to the initial position (that is, fixing the amount of pivotal operation (rotational position) of the handle ring 540). When the handle base 530 is displaced with respect to the support 520 (center of the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) relative to the mount 520, the handle mount 520 (the pressing surface portion 528a) is pushed forward toward the front, and the circle of the handle ring 540 By pressing the plate portion 541, the rotation of the handle ring 540 is restricted (see FIG. 24). Here, with reference to FIG. 22, the handle control member 700 will be described.

  22 (a) and 22 (b) are perspective views of the handlebar regulating member 700. FIG. The handle control member 700 mainly includes a main body portion 701, a rod portion 702 protruding from the back of the main body portion 701, and a pair of arm portions 703 protruding from both sides of the main body portion 701.

  The main body portion 701 is a portion formed in a plate shape, and at least the upper surface (upper side surface in FIG. 22B) is formed to be concavely curved. As a result, when mounted on the handle base 530, the internal space of the handle base 530 can be secured, and the degree of freedom in attaching other parts can be enhanced, and the workability at the time of the attachment operation can be improved. be able to.

  Slide guide grooves 701 a are recessed in side surfaces on the left and right sides of the main body 701. The slide guide groove 701 a is a linear concave groove having a U-shaped cross section, and is extended in parallel with the direction in which the rod portion 702 projects. The inner peripheral wall 534 (both the side portions of the notch 534b) of the handle base 530 is internally fitted in the slide guide groove 701a in a state where the handle control member 700 is attached to the handle base 530. That is, the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530 is sandwiched between the portion of the main body portion 701 projecting from the bottom side and the base of the arm portion 703. As a result, only movement (slide) in the extending direction of the rod portion 702 of the main body portion 701 (handle regulation member 700) is permitted, and movement in the circumferential direction of the handle base 530 is restricted.

  A flat contact surface 701 b is formed on the front surface of the main body 701. The contact surface portion 701b is a portion that is in contact with the back surface of the disc portion 541 of the handle ring 540 (see FIG. 24), and is perpendicular to the rotation axis of the handle ring 540 (that is, movement (slide) of the main portion 701). Parallel to the direction).

  The rod portion 702 is a rod-like body having a circular cross section and provided so as to protrude from the back surface of the main body portion 701, and is formed so as to be insertable into the through hole 532b in the bottom wall 532 of the handle base 530. A hemispherical pressed surface portion 702 a is formed at the protruding end of the rod portion 702. The protruding length of the rod portion 702 from the back surface of the main body portion 701 is larger than the thickness of the bottom wall 532, and when the handlebar regulating member 700 is attached to the handle base 530, the rod portion 702 is pressed against The surface portion 702a protrudes from the back surface (the mating surface portion 532a) of the bottom wall 532 (see FIG. 23).

  Since the pressed surface portion 702a of the rod portion 702 is formed in a hemispherical shape, the handle base 530 is displaced with respect to the handle mount 520 centering on the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523), and the handle mount 520 When the pressed surface portion 702a is pressed by the pressing surface portion 528a (see FIGS. 23 and 24), the handlebar regulation member 700 can be stably moved (slided). That is, in this embodiment, the pressing surface portion 528a of the handle mount 520 moves around the shaft 563 while the handle restricting member 700 slides (moves linearly), and the relative positional relationship between the both is indeterminate. At a certain point, the pressing surface portion 528a of the handle mount 520 is formed as a flat surface, and the pressed surface portion 702a of the steering wheel regulating member 700 is formed as a spherical surface which bulges toward the pressing surface portion 528a. The force component for sliding the handlebar regulation member 700 in the direction toward the handle ring 540 can be continuously generated by moving along with the displacement centering on the bearing portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523). Thus, the handle control member 700 is clogged (that is, the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530 is caught in the slide guide groove 701a or the rod portion 702 is caught in the through hole 532b) and stabilized. Can slide.

  The arm portion 703 is a rod-like body having a substantially rectangular cross section protruding from the side surfaces on both sides of the main body portion 701, and the bottom surface of the arm portion 703 has a curvature corresponding to the inner peripheral surface of the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530. It is curved and formed. Thus, in the state where the handlebar regulation member 700 is mounted on the handlebar base 530 (the inner peripheral wall 534 is fitted in the slide guide groove 701a of the main body 701), the bottom surface of the arm 703 is the inner periphery of the inner peripheral wall 534 It can be made into the state where it was made to curve along a field, and it can control that arm section 703 falls off from receiving projection 538. Further, by extending the arm portion 703 along the circumferential direction of the handle base 530, it is possible to make the arm portion 703 longer while suppressing the influence on the arrangement space of other components. At the same time, a space necessary for elastic deformation of the arm 703 can be secured.

  Referring back to FIG. 20 and FIG. A pair of receiving projections 538 are provided on the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530 so as to project radially inward from the inner peripheral surface thereof. The receiving projection 538 is a portion for elastically deforming by constraining the arm portion 702 of the handle regulating member 700 and regulating its movement, and corresponds to the tip portion of the arm portion 703 of the handle regulating member 700. It is arranged at the position.

  The front surface (the side facing the handle ring 540) of the notch 534b in the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530 (slide holding portion for slidably holding the handle restricting member 700 toward the handle ring 540) is opened. It is formed. Therefore, since the handle control member 700 can be easily mounted to the notch portion 534b by utilizing the open portion, it is possible to reduce the assembly cost relating to the operation of mounting the handle control member 700.

  In addition, since the open portion of the notch 534b is the side facing the handle ring 540 (see FIG. 23), the handle restriction member 700 is notched by the handle ring 540 being disposed on the handle base 530. It does not fall off the open part of 534b.

  Further, a receiving projection 538 for receiving the arm portion 703 of the handlebar regulation member 700 is provided in a protruding manner on the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handlebar base 530. While the handle ring 540 is attached to the handle base 530 (i.e., in the state shown in FIG. 20), the handlebar regulating member 700 may be disengaged from the open portion of the notch 534b. It can be prevented. Therefore, the workability in the assembly process can be improved.

  On the other hand, the arm portion 703 of the handle regulation member 700 is made of a resin material and is formed so as to be elastically deformable. Therefore, the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mount 520 is centered on the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523). When the handle restricting member 700 is displaced and pushed toward the front surface (handle ring 540), the handle restricting member 700 is deformed by elastically deforming the arm portion 702 whose tip portion is restrained by the receiving projection 538. It can be moved (slide). Thereby, the contact surface 701b of the handlebar regulation member 700 can be brought into contact with the back surface (contact surface) of the handle ring 540 (see FIG. 24).

  In addition, when the displacement of the handle base 530 relative to the handle mounting base 520 about the pivoting portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) of the handle base 530 is released, the handle recovery member by the elastic recovery force of the elastically deformed arm portion 702. 700 can be moved away from the handle ring 540 and returned to the initial position (see FIG. 23). Thereby, a gap can be formed between the contact surface portion 701 b of the handlebar regulation member 700 and the back surface (contact surface portion) of the handle ring 540. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the turning operation of the handle ring 540 is hindered due to the resistance due to the contact between the two.

  Here, since the receiving projection 538 is protruded radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530, visibility during assembly can be ensured. As a result, confirmation of the positional relationship between the arm portion 703 and the receiving projection 738 (that is, whether or not the arm portion 703 is properly engaged with the receiving projection 738) is facilitated to improve the workability. be able to.

  Further, the receiving projection 738 is inclined upward from the inner circumferential surface of the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530 as it goes from the front to the back (that is, along the mounting direction of the handle restricting member 700) on the projecting upper surface Since the sloped surface is formed, when the handlebar regulation member 700 is attached to the notch 534b from the open portion thereof, the handle regulation member 700 is formed along the sloped surface formed on the projecting upper surface of the receiving projection 538. The movement of the arm portion 703 allows the arm portion 703 to easily get over the receiving projection 538. That is, it is only necessary to push in the handle regulating member 700 from the open portion of the notch 738, and there is no need to separately carry out the work of lifting the arm 703 and overcoming the receiving projection 738. Can be

  Next, the operation of the handle device 51 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24.

  FIG. 23 is a partial cross-sectional side view of the handle device 51 in a state before the displacement operation, and FIG. 24 is a partial cross-sectional side view of the handle device 51 in a state after the displacement operation. In FIGS. 23 and 24, the front surface of the lower tray unit 15 is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and the state in which the second main body 520b of the handle mount 520 is removed is also illustrated. The illustration of the wiring is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the state before the handle base 530 is displaced with respect to the handle mount 520 about the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) (ie, the handle base 530 is directed downward by the player). In the undisplaced state), the handle base 530 is in the horizontal position, and the mating surface of the handle mount 520 and the handle base 530 is such that the upper mating surface 527 is in contact with the mating surface 532a, while the lower mating surface 528 Are separated from the mating surface 532a.

  In the state shown in FIG. 23, when the handle base 530 is displaced downward with respect to the handle mount 520 with the shaft supporting portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) as the center, the pressed surface portion of the rod portion 702 of the handle restricting member 700. 702a is pressed against the pressing surface portion 528a of the handle mount 520, and the handle regulating member 700 is slid toward the front surface (handle ring 540). When the handle base 530 is further displaced downward about the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523), the lower mating surface portion 528 abuts on the mating surface portion 532a, and as shown in FIG. The contact surface 701 b of the main body 701 is in contact with the back surface of the disc portion 541 of the handle ring 540.

  As a result, return of the handle ring 540 to the initial position is restricted regardless of the amount of rotational operation (rotational position), and the amount of rotational operation is fixed. Therefore, the firing strength of the ball can be fixed at the firing strength of the ball according to the current amount of turning operation of the handle ring 540.

  In this case, there are the following as conventional techniques for fixing the amount of rotational operation of the handle ring 540. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-5759, a hemispherical convex toward the front (the player side) on the top (the front side as viewed from the player) of the front cover base corresponding to the front cover 550 in this embodiment. A technique is disclosed in which the amount of turning operation of the handle ring is fixed by providing a button that is used by the player with the palm of the hand.

  However, in such a prior art, it is necessary to perform the pressing operation of the button while performing the turning operation of the handle ring. In detail, it is necessary to perform in parallel an operation (pivotal operation) of moving the handle ring gripped with the finger in the circumferential direction and an operation of pushing the palm of the hand toward the back while rolling the palm around the button surface. Therefore, in order to press the button while maintaining the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle ring, the player is required to have a high level of technology. Also, since this state (a state in which the button is pushed while maintaining the amount of turning operation of the handle ring) is an unreasonable posture for the player, such a state is continued (that is, the firing strength of the ball is desired). The player's burden is to fix at the firing intensity). As a result, not only when the button is pressed but also when maintaining the pressing, the amount of turning operation (turning position) of the handle ring is easily deviated, and it becomes difficult to maintain the desired amount of turning operation.

  In addition, since it is such an unreasonable attitude | position, a high-level technique is required also for operation which cancels | releases pushing of a button, maintaining the rotation operation amount (rotational position) of a handle ring.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the displacement operation centering on the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) of the handle base 530 is an operation to displace the handle base 530 and the handle ring 540 integrally. From this, the player does not release part of the fingers holding the handle ring 540 regardless of the pivot position of the handle ring 540 (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523). Displacement operation can be performed. Thereby, the operability can be improved. In addition, after performing the displacement operation centering on the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) of the handle base 530, the operation state (the rotation operation amount of the handle ring 540 is fixed to the desired rotation operation amount) It is also easy to maintain the Therefore, during operation of the handle base 530 and maintaining the operation state, occurrence of positional deviation in the rotational position of the handle ring 540 is suppressed, and the emission intensity of the ball is accurately fixed to the desired emission intensity. Can.

  Also, as described above, if the handle base 530 is displaced around the pivot portion (shaft 563 and the bearing 523), the player attaches the palm to the handle base 530 (front cover 550) and The handle base 530 can be displaced downward about the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) only by the action of applying the weight of. That is, the player can fix the firing strength of the ball to a desired firing strength only by performing a simple action of applying the weight of the hand.

  Further, since the operation is to displace the handle base 530 and the handle ring 540 integrally, one of the fingers holding the handle ring 540 no matter where the handle ring 540 is located. It is possible to perform a displacement operation centering on the shaft support portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) of the handle base 530 without separating the parts. Thereby, the operability can be improved. In addition, after performing the displacement operation centering on the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) of the handle base 530, the operation state (the rotation operation amount of the handle ring 540 is fixed to the desired rotation operation amount) It is also easy to maintain the Therefore, during operation of the handle base 530 and maintaining the operation state, occurrence of positional deviation in the rotational position of the handle ring 540 is suppressed, and the emission intensity of the ball is accurately fixed to the desired emission intensity. Can.

  Further, since the contact surface 701b of the main body 701 of the handlebar regulation member 700 and the back surface (contact surface) of the disc 541 of the handle ring 540 are formed as smooth surfaces, the rotation of the handle ring 540 is achieved. The position can be fixed at any pivot position.

  For example, serrations are provided on the contact surface 701b of the main body 701 of the handlebar regulation member 700 and the back surface (contacting surface) of the disc 541 of the handle ring 540, and these serrations are In the structure in which the pivot position of the handle ring 540 is fixed by engaging it, the pivot position of the handle ring 540 can be fixed firmly, while the pitch (interval) of the sawtooth shaped unevenness is adjusted Is the minimum value of Therefore, the fixable rotational position is intermittent, and there is a possibility that it can not be fixed at a desired rotational position.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the contact surface 701b of the main body 701 of the handlebar regulation member 700 and the back surface (contact surface) of the disc 541 of the handle ring 540 are smoothed. Since the fixable rotational position is continuous, the adjustable width can be secured as being fixable at any rotational position.

  Further, even if the contact surface 701b is in contact with the back surface (contact surface) of the disk 541 and the amount of rotational operation of the handle ring 540 is fixed, the contact surface 701b and the contact Since the contact surfaces can be made to slide relative to each other by making the contact surface portions smooth, even after the amount of rotational operation of the handle ring 540 is fixed, such The amount of rotational operation can be finely adjusted.

  Here, since the front cover 550 is disposed on the front side (right side in FIG. 23) of the handle ring 540, the player applies a palm to the outer surface of the front cover 550 when gripping the handle ring 540 with fingers. The front cover 550 can be used as a portion (force point) for applying a force when displacing the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mounting 520 about the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523). it can.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 24, in the present embodiment, the pressing surface portion 528a (a pressing surface portion 702a) is provided from the shaft 563 (fulcrum) of the boss member 560 for pivotally supporting the handle base 530 displaceably with respect to the handle mount 520. The distance A to the protruding tip (the point of action) is at least smaller than the distance B from the axis 563 of the boss member 560 to the back of the handle ring 540. Therefore, the distance from the shaft 563 (fulcrum) of the boss member 560 to the outer surface (force point) of the front cover 550 is larger than the distance A.

  That is, since the distance from the force point to the fulcrum can be made larger than the distance from the fulcrum to the action point, the force is amplified even if the force applied to the outer surface of the front cover 550 that becomes the force point is small, The handle surface regulating member 700 (the surface to be pressed 702a) can be pressed with a greater force by the pressing surface 528a which is the point of action. As a result, the handlebar regulation member 700 can be firmly abutted against the handle ring 540, and the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle ring 540 can be reliably fixed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27, a switching structure for switching the switching device 600 to the rotatable state or the engaged fixed state by the pressing operation of the button member 570 will be described. In the description of this switching structure, FIGS. 28 and 29 will be referred to as appropriate.

  25 to 27 are partial cross-sectional side views of the handle device 51. FIG. The state in which the button member 570 is at the first position in FIG. 25, the state in which the button member 570 is in the second position in FIG. 26, and the state in which the button member 570 is at the third position are illustrated in FIG. Ru.

  FIGS. 28 and 29 are schematic front views of the handle device 51 schematically showing the handle ring 540 and the switching device 600. 28 (a) shows the state where the handle ring 540 is at the initial position θ0 and the switching device 600 is in the rotatable state, and FIG. 28 (b) shows that the handle ring 540 turns to the operation position θ1. In FIG. 28 (c), the handle ring 540 is pivoted to the operation position θ1 and the switching device 600 is in the engagement / fixing state in which the switching device 600 is in the pivotable state. 29 (a) shows a state in which the handle ring 540 is in the range of the operation position θ0 to θ1, and FIG. 29 (a) shows a state in which the switching device 600 is changed to the engaged fixed state. b) shows a state in which the handle ring 540 is in the initial position θ0 and the switching device 600 is changed to the engaged fixed state.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, as described above, the switching device 600 is inserted into the bearing 535 of the handle base 530, and the connecting shaft 575 of the button member 570 is in the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 600. Relatively movable in the axial direction and relatively nonrotatable in the circumferential direction.

  In this embodiment, since the handle shaft support 574 of the button member 570 is rotatably connected to the shaft 573, the switching device 600 (main body 610) is rotated with respect to the bearing 575. When it is selected, only the members on the handle shaft support 574 side (the handle shaft support 574, the connecting shaft 575 and the push-in piece 576) are interlocked with the switching device 600, and the members on the shaft 573 side (The shaft 573, the back base 572 and the operation unit 571) can be prevented from rotating. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the operation unit 571 rotates in the palm of the hand of the player to give the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the connecting shaft 575 of the button member 570 is inserted in the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 600 so as not to be relatively rotatable in the circumferential direction, the switching device 600 rotates with respect to the bearing 535 Even in this case, the rotational position (phase) of the push-in piece 576 of the button member 570 with respect to the clearance space 661 of the switching device 600 can be always matched.

  Thereby, even when the switching device 600 is disposed at any rotational position (phase), the push-in piece 576 of the button member 570 is bitten by the push-in operation of the button member 570 (operation portion 571). It can be reliably moved into the containing space 651. That is, even when the handle ring 540 is turned to any rotation position, the switching device 600 can be engaged and fixed, so that the firing strength of the gaming ball becomes the desired firing strength. In this case, it is possible to change (set) the operation end point while maintaining the rotational position (operation amount) of the handle ring 540. As a result, the change (setting) of the operation end point can be performed quickly and at an accurate position.

  The handle ring support 574 of the button member 570 is inserted through the central hole 544a of the handle ring 540, and the handle ring 540 is rotatably supported by the handle support 574. That is, even when the switching device 600 is switched to the engaged fixed state in which relative rotation with respect to the bearing portion 535 can not be performed, the handle ring protrusion 546 of the handle ring 540 is a restricting protrusion of the switching device 600. It is possible to turn in the turning direction (the direction to be returned to the initial position) opposite to the turning direction in which the portion 630 abuts and is regulated.

  A button biasing spring 590 formed as a coil spring is disposed between the handle ring 540 and the button member 570 in a state of being elastically compressed and deformed, and the biasing force (elastic recovery force) causes the button member to 570 is biased away from the handle ring 540.

  As shown in FIG. 25, when the button member 570 is in the first position (in the initial position where the button member 570 is not pushed in), the push-in piece 576 of the button member 570 is a relief space of the switching device 600. Placed at 661. Therefore, in the switching device 600, the biting balls 670a and 670b are disposed in the relief space 661 by the biasing force of the pushing side biasing spring 680, and thereby, the rotation can be performed relative to the bearing 535. The movable state (see FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (c)) is set.

  As described above, in the state where switching device 600 is set to be rotatable (in a state where button member 570 is at the first position), switching device 600 is rotatable with respect to bearing portion 535. As shown in FIG. 28 (a) and FIG. 28 (b), when the handle ring 540 is rotated in the increasing direction from the initial position θ0 to the operation position θ1, the handle side projection 546 of the handle ring 540 is switched to the switching device 600. Is pushed in the increasing direction, the switching device 600 is interlocked with the handle ring 540 and is rotated in the increasing direction. The operation position θ1 is a rotation angle that does not reach the maximum position θmax of the rotation operation range of the handle ring 540. The same applies to the following.

  On the other hand, when the handle ring 540 is turned in the decreasing direction, the switching device 600 follows the handle ring 540 by the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 539 (see FIG. 7) and rotates in the decreasing direction. Be done. For example, as shown in FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b), when the handle ring 540 is rotated in the decreasing direction from the operation position θ1 to the initial position θ0, the switching device 600 also has a switching device biasing spring. By the biasing force of 539, the restricting protrusion 630 is turned in the decreasing direction, and the restricting protrusion 630 is disposed at the turning position where it abuts on the handle side protrusion 546.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 25, when the switching device 600 is set to be rotatable (in a state where the button member 570 is in the first position), the handle ring 540 is either in the increasing direction or in the decreasing direction. Even when the turning operation is performed, the switching device 600 is interlocked (synchronized) and is rotated, and the turning positions (phases) of the handle ring 540 and the switching device 600 are matched (FIG. 28A). And FIG. 28 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 26, in the state where the button member 570 is in the second position (the button member 570 in the first position is pushed in), the switching device 600 has the biting balls 670a, 670b biting in. It is arranged in the space 651 (that is, the pushing balls 670a and 670b are pushed into the biting space 651 by the pushing pieces 576 of the button member 570) and set in the engaged fixed state.

  When switching device 600 is set in the engaged and fixed state, biting balls 670 a and 670 b face the inner circumferential surface of bearing 535 and biting surface 650 by the biasing force of biting side biasing spring 690. Because the switching device 600 (main body portion 610) is in a state of being interposed between and gradually decreasing in the circumferential direction, the switching device 600 (main body portion 610) is directed in the directions of arrows A and B shown in FIG. The circumferential end of the biting surface 650 acts to further bite the biting balls 670a and 670b while facing the inner circumferential surface of the bearing 535 (see FIG. 15 (b) and FIG. 15 (d)), the rotation of the switching device 600 (main body 610) with respect to the bearing 535 is restricted (blocked).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), in the state in which the handle ring 540 is turned to the operation position θ1, switching is performed by pushing the button member 570 to change from the first position to the second position. When the device 600 is set in the engagement fixed state, as shown in FIG. 28C, the switching position of the switching device 600 corresponds to the operation position θ1 (ie, the button member 570 in the first position is in the second position). Can be fixed at the time of change to

  Thus, when the switching device 600 is set in the engaged fixed state and the rotational position thereof is fixed, as shown in FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b), the handle ring 540 is reduced. Even when the switching device 600 is rotated, the switching device 600 is not interlocked (synchronized) with the rotation of the handle ring 540, and is held at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1. That is, since the center hole 544a of the handle ring 540 is pivotally supported by the handle shaft support 574 (see FIG. 26), as shown in FIG. 29A, the handle ring 540 is independent of the switching device 600. Thus, it is possible to turn in the decreasing direction and the operating direction.

  In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), with the switching device 600 held (fixed) at the rotational position corresponding to the operation position θ1, the handle ring 540 returned to the initial position θ0 is When the turning operation is performed in the increasing direction, the operation position θ1 is set as the end point of the turning operation. That is, as shown in FIG. 28C, when the turning operation in the increasing direction of the steering wheel 540 reaches the operation position θ1, the steering wheel side projection 546 abuts on the regulation projection 630, The turning operation in the increasing direction of is restricted.

  Here, setting of the button member 570 in the second position to the first position is performed as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 27, after pushing in the button member 570 in the second position shown in FIG. 26 to the pushable position (third position), the pushing operation is released (the pushing force is reduced or Release the hand). Thereby, the button member 570 is returned from the third position to the first position shown in FIG. 25 by the biasing force of the button biasing spring 590.

  In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 29B, in the state where the switching device 600 is held (fixed) at the rotational position corresponding to the operation position θ1, the above-described operation (from the second position to the third position Since the switching device 600 is switched from the engaged fixed state to the rotatable state and made rotatable relative to the bearing portion 535 when the operation of causing the passage portion to return to the first position is performed, the switching device is attached Under the biasing force of the biasing spring 539, as shown in FIG. 28A, the initial position (the pivoting position where the restricting protrusion 630 abuts on the handle side protrusion 546) is returned.

  Here, since the switching device 600 is always rotated in synchronization (synchronized) with the handle shaft support 574 and the push-in piece 576 through the connection of the connection hole 620 and the connection shaft 575, the handle ring 540 is rotated. Even in the state in which the rotation operation is performed, switching from the engaged fixed state to the rotatable state by pressing the button member 570 (that is, return of the switching device 600 to the initial position It is possible to cancel the change).

  As a result, even when the handle ring 540 is rotated, it is not necessary to temporarily return the handle ring 540 to the initial position in order to release the change (setting) of the operation end point. Therefore, for example, when it becomes necessary to reset (for example, fine adjustment) the position of the operation end point to another position, while maintaining the turning operation of the handle ring 540 (that is, while continuing the game) , The reset operation can be performed quickly. Alternatively, for example, when it is necessary to hit the right, while maintaining the turning operation of the handle ring 540, it is possible to release the operation end point which restricted the turning operation of the handle ring 540 in the increasing direction. The state in which the turning operation of the handle ring 540 in the increasing direction can be quickly formed. That is, it is possible to quickly switch to the turning operation of the handle ring 540 in the operation direction in which the launch strength of the gaming ball is maximized.

  Also, an operation for switching the switching device 600 from the engaged fixed state to the rotatable state (canceling the operation end point, ie, returning operation for returning the switching device 600 to the initial position), and from the rotatable state to the engaged fixed state Both of the switching operation (the changing operation of changing (setting) the operation end point) are achieved by the pressing operation of the button member 570. That is, this can be achieved by operating the same member in the same direction. This makes it easy to operate the change operation and the return operation. In particular, since the state by the change operation and the state by the return operation are alternately switched, it is effective to improve the operability that the two states can be switched by repeating the same operation. Further, since the same member can be operated in the same direction, the operable direction of the button member 570 can be limited to only one direction, so the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. It is possible to reduce.

  Here, when the button member 570 is in the second position and the third position, as shown in FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, a part (the top side projecting forward) of the operation portion 571 of the button member 570 It projects to the front (right side in FIGS. 26 and 27) beyond the edge of the opening 550 a of the cover 550. Therefore, when the button member 570 (operation portion 571) at the first position (or the second position) is pushed into the second position (or the third position), the button member 570 is opened in the front cover 550. There is no need to push it to a position beyond the edge of 550 a (that is, a position where the entire operation portion 571 of the button member 570 is inserted into the front cover 550). As a result, when the button member 570 is pushed in, it is possible to suppress the edge of the opening 550a of the front cover 550 from obstructing the movement of the player's hand and to improve the operability.

  However, in the state where the button member 570 is in the third position, the entire operation portion 571 of the button member 570 may be configured to be retracted into the inside of the front cover 550. That is, in the third position, the top (the most forwardly projecting portion) of the operation portion 571 of the button member 570 is located axially inward (leftward in FIG. 27) than the edge of the opening 550a of the front cover 550. It may be formed as follows.

  In this case, the button member 570 is pushed from the second position to the third position, and the switching device 600 can be returned to the initial position (that is, the switching device 600 in the engaged fixed state is changed to the rotatable state). To cancel the change (setting) of the operation end point, the button member 570 (operation portion 571) is positioned so as to axially extend over the edge of the opening 550a of the front cover 550 (in the front cover 550). It is necessary to push it to a position where the entire operation portion 571 of the button member 570 is inserted. Therefore, when the button member 570 is pushed to the third position, the edge of the opening 550a of the front cover 550 may be an obstacle to the pushing operation (ie, the edge of the opening 550a may be made to abut the player's hand). it can. Thereby, it can be suppressed that the button member 570 in the second position is carelessly pushed to the third position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the position of the operation end point from being changed to a desired rotational position (a set state is released (or released)) by an inadvertent pressing operation of the button member 570.

  Then, referring to FIGS. 30 and 31, switching device 600 is used to change (set) the operation end point of handle ring 540, and the rotational position of handle ring 540 with respect to the position of the operation end point. The adjustment method to be adjusted (return to the original rotation position) will be described.

  FIG. 30 and FIG. 31 are schematic views schematically showing the state of the turning operation of the handle device 51. In each drawing, the left figure is a front schematic view of the handle device 51, and the right figure is a handle It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the relationship between the rotation position of the ring 540, and the operation end point. In FIG. 30 and FIG. 31, the display of the black triangle (“」 ”) means the rotational position of the handle ring 540, and the display of“ [first position] or [second position] ”is a button The position of the member 570 is meant. The “initial position θ0” is the initial position of the handle ring 540, and the “maximum position θ max” is the maximum position at which the handle ring 540 can be pivoted in a state where the operation end point is not changed (set). The “operation end point” is an end point of the turning operation of the handle ring 540 formed by setting the switching device 600 in the engagement fixed state.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b), in the state where the button member 570 is in the first position, the switching device 600 is in the rotatable state (FIG. 25, FIG. 15 (a) and FIG. 15 (c)), the handle ring 540 can be pivoted in the range from the initial position θ0 to the maximum position θmax.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b), as a result of adjusting the turning position of the handle ring 540 according to the game state, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), the handle ring 540 is operated. When it is determined that the launch intensity of the gaming ball can be adjusted to a desired launch intensity by setting the position θ1, the player maintains the condition shown in FIG. 30 (b) while maintaining the condition shown in FIG. 30 (c). As shown, by pushing the button member 570, the button member 570 is set to the second position. Thereby, the switching device 600 is set in the engagement fixed state (see FIG. 26, FIG. 15 (b) and FIG. 15 (d)), and the operation end point is at the position corresponding to the operation position .theta.1 of the handle ring 540. Changed (set)

  Thus, according to the handle device 51, since the operation end point can be set, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), for example, the pivoting position of the handle ring 540 is returned to the initial position θ0 to take a break. Even if the game is interrupted, the original slide operation position (that is, the pivot position at which the launch intensity of the gaming ball is adjusted to the desired launch intensity and the operation position θ1 before interrupting the gaming machine) It can be stored as an "operation end point".

  Therefore, when adjusting the rotation position of the handle ring 540 to the original rotation position (that is, the operation position θ1 before interrupting the game) (when reproducing the states of FIG. 30 (b) and FIG. 30 (c)) If, as shown in FIG. 31 (b), the player turns the handle ring 540 to the operation end point (ie, the turn operation of the handle ring 540 is restricted by the operation end point, and so on). The rotation position of the handle ring 540 can be quickly and easily adjusted to the original rotation position (operation position θ1) until the rotation operation is not performed).

  For example, it is conceivable to provide a scale line along the movement locus of the handle ring 540 and turn the handle ring 540 with the scale line as a target position, but the handle ring may be compared with the method. It is not necessary to finely adjust while visually determining whether or not the rotational position of 540 matches the target position (scale line), and it is possible to accurately adjust to the desired rotational position. Further, according to the present embodiment, the pivoting operation may be performed to a position where the pivoting operation can not be performed, and the operation speed of the handle ring 540 can be increased because the target position is not passed. It is possible to quickly adjust to the desired rotational position (to quickly return to the original rotational position).

  In order to return the position of the operation end point to the maximum position θmax, in the state shown in FIG. 31 (a) or FIG. 31 (b), a pushing operation of pushing the button member 570 to a pushable position (third position) After performing the pressing operation, the button member 570 is returned to the first position by releasing the pressing operation, and as shown in FIG. 30A, the position of the operation end point can be returned to the maximum position θmax.

  Here, the player who changed (set) the operation end point ends the game, and as shown in FIG. 31A, the second player starts the game while the operation end point remains changed. In such a case, such a second player may suffer disadvantages. That is, the fact that the operation end point is changed means that the handle ring 540 can not be turned to the maximum position θmax as shown in FIG. 31 (b), and the operation end point is changed. If the second player is not aware of the presence of the game player, the game is played in a state where the game machine balls can not be fired at the maximum position θmax (maximum firing intensity), which is disadvantageous. Therefore, even in such a case, it is desirable that the second player can easily recognize that the position of the operation end point has been changed when starting the game.

  On the other hand, according to the handle device 51 of the present embodiment, as described above, it is played whether the position of the operation end point is changed (set) using the confirmation window 550b provided on the front cover 550. It is formed so that the person can easily confirm. Here, a confirmation structure using the confirmation window 550b will be described with reference to FIG.

  32 (a) and 32 (b) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the handle device 51. In FIG. 32 (a), the button member 570 is in the first position in FIG. 32 (b). The state in which the button member 570 is in the second position is illustrated respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b), according to the handle device 51, the position of the operation end point is not changed (that is, the position of the operation end point coincides with the maximum position) The state shown in FIG. 32 (a) in which the button member 570 is in the first position, and the state shown in FIG. 32 (b) in which the position of the operation end point is changed (that is, the button member 570 is in the second position). And the pressing position of the button member 570 is different. Therefore, the player can identify whether or not the position of the operation end point has been changed based on the difference between the push-in positions of the button members 570. By suppressing the player from playing the game without noticing that the position of the operation end point has been changed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

  However, in the handle device 51 according to the present embodiment, the front cover 550 and the button member 570 protruding from the opening 550a of the front cover 550 are integrally formed to form one hemispherical body (FIG. 5). And FIG. 6), even if the button member 570 is pushed into the second position, the player can not clearly recognize the difference in the pushing amount of the button member 570 because one hemisphere is formed as a whole. There is a fear.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, depending on whether the position of the operation end point is changed (that is, whether the button member 570 is at the first position or the second position), the confirmation windows 550b and 554b are used. Since the form of the object to be viewed through is made different, the judgment criteria can be binarized, and the two states can be easily distinguished clearly. This allows the player to easily and reliably identify whether or not the position of the operation end point has been changed.

Specifically, as described above, in the button member 570, the outer peripheral surface of the inner fitting wall portion 577 is formed in black, while the outer peripheral surface of the operation portion 571 is formed in white. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32A, in the state where the button member 570 is in the first position, the form in which the player is allowed to visually recognize the player through the confirmation windows 550b and 554b of the front cover 550 is In the state where the button member 570 is in the second position while the outer peripheral surface (black) is used, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), the operation for allowing the player to visually recognize via the confirmation window 550b of the front cover 550 The outer peripheral surface (white) of the portion 571 can be used.
Thereby, the player can determine whether the button member 570 is disposed at the first position or the second position based on the difference in color visually recognized through the confirmation windows 550b and 554b (ie, the handle). Whether or not the position of the operation end point of the ring 540 has been changed can be easily identified.

  In this case, the inner fitting wall 577 of the button member 570 is inserted to the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical guide portion 554 of the front cover 550, and as shown in FIG. 32A, the button member 570 is at the first position. In this state, the outer peripheral surface of the inner fitting wall portion 577 faces the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical guide portion 554, so that the confirmation window 554b can be shielded by the inner fitting wall portion 577. That is, it is possible to make it difficult for light to be led out from inside the handle device 51 through the confirmation window 554b. Further, also in the path from the confirmation window 554b to the confirmation window 550b, such a path is disposed in the closed wall formed by the outer wall surface of the front cover 550 and the handle ring 540. It can be difficult for light to be led out through the Therefore, in the state where the button member 570 is at the first position, it is possible to further darken the form (black on the outer peripheral surface of the inner fitting wall 577) to be visually recognized by the player via the confirmation windows 550b and 554b.

  On the other hand, the operation portion 571 of the button member 570 is formed in a hemispherical shape, and as shown in FIG. 32B, when the button member 570 is in the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the operation portion 571 is a cylindrical guide portion Since it faces the inner peripheral surface of 554, a space opened outward (right side in FIG. 32B) can be formed below the confirmation window 554b (the outer peripheral surface side of the operation portion 571). That is, light can be introduced from the outside into the space between the confirmation window 554b and the confirmation window 550b from the space below the confirmation window 554b. Further, the outer peripheral surface itself of the operation unit 571 can also be in a state of being irradiated with light. Therefore, in the state where the button member 570 is in the second position, it is possible to further brighten the form (white on the outer peripheral surface of the operation unit 571) for allowing the player to visually recognize via the confirmation windows 550b and 554b.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), the button member 570 is in the second position, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), as shown in FIG. 32 (b). It is possible to further increase the difference in contrast between the form that the player visually recognizes in a certain state. This makes it easy to distinguish between the two states more clearly, and therefore allows the player to easily and reliably identify whether or not the position of the operation end point has been changed.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 57. In the first embodiment, the case where the change of the operation end point and the release thereof are performed by the pressing operation of the button member 570 has been described, but the change of the operation end point and the release thereof in the second embodiment This is done by displacing the handle base 530 (handle ring 540). The same parts as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 33 (a) is a top view of the handle device 2051 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 33 (b) is a front view of the handle device 2051. FIG. 34 is a side view of the handle device 2051 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXII in FIG. In FIG. 33 (a) and FIG. 34, the front surface of the lower tray unit 15 is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the handle device 2051 includes a handle mount 2520, a handle base 530, a handle ring 2540, a front cover 2550, an operation / display piece 2570, and a switching device 2600 (from FIG. 40) and is projected from the front of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in a horizontal attitude.

  As with the first embodiment, the handle mount 2520 and the handle base 530 have the back of the handle mount 2520 (the left side in FIG. 33A) fixed to the front of the lower tray unit 15, and one is an axis in the other. The handle base 530 is vertically displaceable integrally with the handle ring 2540 with respect to the handle mount 2520, with the supported portion being connected and centered on the pivotally supported portion (from FIG. 53) See Figure 55).

  In the handle device 2051 of the present embodiment, by displacing the handle base 530 in the vertical direction with respect to the handle mount 2520, the rotation of the handle ring 540 is restricted by the pressing of the handle restriction member 700 (regulation of return to the initial position). In addition to the fact that switching is possible (i.e., changing (setting) and releasing of the operation end point) of the state of the switching device 2600 (pivotable state or engaged fixed state) is also made executable.

  An operation and display piece 2570 is disposed on the handle mount 2520. The operation / use display piece 2570 is a member for displaying whether or not the position of the operation end point is changed (set), is formed as a rod-like body bent in an L shape, and is a side of the handle mount 2520 It extends from the top to the top.

  A shaft 2802 of a linear motion conversion member 2800 which is rotated according to the state (a rotatable state or an engageable state) of the switching device 2600 is projected to the side of the handle mounting base 2520, and the projection is The base end of the operation / use display piece 2570 is fixed to the shaft 2802 (the connecting square portion 2802a). Therefore, when the state of the switching device 2600 is switched and the shaft 2802 is rotated, the extended tip of the operation / use display piece 2570 is along the top surface of the handle mount 2520 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 33 (a) left-right direction) And is held at the first position or the second position depending on the state of the switching device 2600.

  On the upper surface of the handle mount 2520, a first scale portion S1 and a second scale portion S2 having a triangular shape in top view are displayed. The first scale portion S1 is a display indicating that the switching device 2600 is in the rotatable state (that is, the change of the operation end point is released), and the switch member 2590 (see FIG. 42) is in the first position. The extended tip of the operation / use display piece 2570 in the placed state is matched. The second scale portion S2 is a display indicating that the switching device 2600 is in the engagement fixed state (that is, the position of the operation end point is changed (set)), and the switch member 2590 is disposed at the second position. It coincides with the extended end of the operation / use display piece 2570 in the second state.

  Therefore, the player determines whether or not the position of the operation end point is changed based on the relationship between the extended tip of the operation / use display piece 2570 and the display (when the extended tip is aligned with the first scale portion S1 In this case, the operation end point is released, and the position of the operation end point can be easily recognized when the extended tip coincides with the second scale portion S2.

  In this case, since the first scale portion S1 and the second scale portion S2 are disposed on the upper surface side of the handle mount 2520 in the assembled state of the handle device 2051, the player facing the pachinko machine 10 to play the game For example, when starting a game, the positional relationship between the operation / use display piece 2570 and the first scale portion S1 and the second scale portion S2 can be easily viewed by the player.

  Here, the operation / use display piece 2570 also serves as an operation unit operated by the player in order to switch the switching device 2600 to the rotatable state or the engaged / fixed state. That is, in this embodiment, in addition to pushing the handle base 530 downward with respect to the handle mount 2520, the operation / displaying piece 2570 may be rotated about the shaft 2802 (the connecting square portion 2802a). Switching of the state of the switching device 2600 (a rotatable state or an engaged fixed state) can be performed.

  In this case, the operation / use display piece 2570 extends from the side surface of the left side (the lower side of FIG. 33A) to the upper surface (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. Therefore, even during the game (that is, even in the state in which the handle ring 2540 is turned by the right hand), the player can easily operate the operation / display piece 2570 with the reverse hand (ie, the left hand) It is possible to turn it. The switching structure of the switching device 2600 will be described later.

  The front cover 2550 is formed in a hemispherical shape that is convex forward (in the right direction in FIGS. 33A and 34), and is attached to the front surface of the handle ring 540.

  Next, the handle base 530 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a front perspective view of the handle mounting base 2520 and the handle base 530, corresponding to the front perspective view of the handle device 2051 in a state in which the handle ring 2540 and the front cover 2550 (both refer to FIGS. 33 and 34) are removed. Do.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the handle base 530 is formed in the same manner as the first embodiment. In the bearing portion 535, the switching device 2600 is rotatably inserted on the inner peripheral side (see FIG. 53). Similar to the switching device 600 in the first embodiment, the switching device 2600 is a member for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 2540, and allows relative rotation of the switching device 2600 with respect to the bearing 535. It is possible to switch between two states: a rotatable state and an engaged fixed state in which relative rotation is not possible.

  The switching device 2600 differs from the switching device 600 in the first embodiment in the formation positions of the biting surface 250 and the flank surface 260 (the biting space 251 and the relief space 261) (on the front side in the first embodiment). The other configuration is the same except that it is formed open (see FIG. 7) but is formed open on the back side in the second embodiment.

  Therefore, when the state of the switching device 2600 is in the rotatable state, the restricting protrusion 630 is pushed in the increasing direction by the handle side protrusion 546, so that the switching device 2600 also increases in the bearing 535. It is pivoted. On the other hand, when the state of the switching device 2600 is switched to the engaged fixed state, relative rotation with respect to the bearing portion 535 of the switching device 2600 is disabled (fixed to the bearing portion 535). The movement of the 546 in the increasing direction is restricted by the restriction protrusion 630. Thus, the turning operation of the handle ring 2540 in the increasing direction is restricted. That is, the position (rotational position) at which the state of the switching device 2600 is switched from the rotatable state to the engaged and fixed state is taken as the operation end position of the handle ring 2540.

  Next, the handle ring 2540 will be described with reference to FIG. 36 is a rear perspective view of handle ring 2540. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the handle ring 2540 has the handle ring of the first embodiment except that the inner diameter of the central hole 2544a is different (it is smaller than the inner diameter of the central hole 544a in the first embodiment). It is formed identical to 540.

  Thus, a flat surface is secured on the back surface of the main driving gear 544 by reducing the inner diameter of the central hole 2544a. In the second embodiment, by sliding on the flat surface of the back surface of the main driving gear 544, axial movement is restricted by the flat surface of the back surface of the main driving gear 544 while permitting rotation of the switching device 600. By doing this, the switching device 600 is restricted from coming out of the inside of the bearing 535 to the front side (see FIG. 53).

  The handle shaft support 2551a (see FIG. 37) of the front cover 2550 is inserted into the central hole 2544a, whereby the handle ring 2540 is rotatably held by the handle base 530 via the front cover 2550. (See FIG. 53).

  Next, the front cover 2550 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a rear perspective view of the front cover 550. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the front cover 2550 is formed in the shape of a hemispherical container in which the inside is recessed to the front side (that is, the back side is opened), and the inner wall surface corresponding to the top has a cylindrical shaft. The support base 2551 is erected toward the back side. A handle shaft support body 2551 a for supporting the handle ring 2540 is erected on the back end side of the erected end of the pivotal support base 2551.

  The outer diameter of the handle shaft support 2551a is set to a size slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the central hole 2544a of the handle ring 2540, thereby pivotally supporting the handle ring 2540. The outer diameter of the handle shaft support 2551 a is smaller than the outer diameter of the support base 2551, and a stepped surface is formed at the connection portion of the two. By this step surface, the handle ring 2540 (the main driving gear 544 and the disc portion 541) is sandwiched between the switching device 2600 and the movement in the axial direction is restricted while permitting the rotation of the handle ring 2540 (see FIG. 53). ).

  Next, the switching device 2600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40. Fig.38 (a) is a front view of the switching apparatus 2600, FIG.38 (b) is a side view of the switching apparatus 2600 in the arrow XXXVIIIb direction view of FIG.38 (a), and FIG.38 (c) is It is a rear view of the switching apparatus 2600 in the arrow XXXVIIIc direction view of FIG.38 (b). 39 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the switching device 2600 taken along line XXXIXa-XXXIXa of FIG. 38 (a), and FIG. 39 (b) is a side view of the switching device 2600 in the direction of arrow XXXIXb of FIG. FIG. In FIGS. 38 and 39, the biting balls 670a and 670b, the pushing side biasing spring 680 and the biting side biasing spring 690 are not shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the switching device 2600 is the same as the first embodiment except for the formation positions of the biting surface 650 and the flank surface 660 formed by recessing the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 610. It is formed identical to the switching device 600.

  Specifically, in the first embodiment, the flank surface 660 is continuously provided on the front surface of the main body portion 610, and the biting surface 650 is disposed on the back side of the flank surface 660 (the back surface side of the main body portion 610). Although the clearance space 661 and the biting space 651 are formed as the space opened on the front side of the main body 610 (see FIGS. 13 and 14), in the second embodiment, the clearance surface 660 is the space of the main body 610. A bite surface 650 is disposed on the back side (the lower side surface in FIG. 39A) and on the back side of the flank surface 660 (the front side of the main body 610). The insertion space 651 is formed as a space opened on the back side (the lower side in FIG. 39A) of the main body 610. Therefore, the pushing piece 2583 for pushing in the biting balls 670a and 670b is disposed on the back side of the main body portion 610 (see FIG. 53).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the pivotable state and the restricted and fixed state of the switching device 2600 and the switching structure of these two states will be described.

  FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b) are cross-sectional views of the switching device 2600, and correspond to the cross section taken along line XXXIXa-XXXVIXa of FIG. 38 (a). Fig. 40 (c) is a back view of the switching device 2600 in the direction of arrow XLc in Fig. 40 (a), and Fig. 40 (d) is a back of the switching device 2600 in the direction of arrow XLd in Fig. 40 (b). FIG.

  In FIG. 40, a state in which the switching device 2600 is attached (inserted) to the bearing 535 of the handle base 530 is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (c), the entrapment spheres 670a and 670b are disposed in the relief space 661 in FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (d). The state where 670b is arranged in the biting space 651 is illustrated respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the switching device 2600 works in the same manner as the switching device 600 in the first embodiment. That is, as shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (c), the entrained spheres 670a and 670b are disposed in the relief space 661 (ie, the entrained spheres 670a and 670b by the push-in piece 2583 of the push-in member 2580). In the state in which the inner space is not pushed into the biting space 651 (see FIG. 53), as in the case of the first embodiment, the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 and the facing of the biting surface 650 and the biting Since biting with the embedded spheres 670a and 670b is not formed, the switching device 2600 (main body portion 610) is set in a rotatable state, and the bearing is also directed in any direction of arrows A and B shown in FIG. It is rotatable relative to the portion 535.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (d), the entrained spheres 670a and 670b are disposed in the entrapment space 651 (ie, the entrained sphere 670a, In the state where the 670b is pushed into the biting space 651 (see FIG. 54), the inner peripheral surface of the bearing 535 is applied by the biasing force of the biting side biasing spring 690 as in the first embodiment. The biting balls 670a and 670b are bitten into the clearance gradually decreasing in the circumferential direction between the facing of the biting surface 650 and the arrow A shown in FIG. 40 (d) by the switching device 2600 (body part 610). When it is intended to turn in the direction (or the B direction), the circumferential end portion of the biting surface 650 (FIG. 15 (d) below the turning direction backward side (the turning direction delay side) of the main body 610 side( (The upper side) acts to further bite the biting ball 670b (or biting ball 670a) into engagement with the inner circumferential surface of the bearing 535, thereby switching the switching device 2600 (the bearing 535). The relative rotation of the main body 610) in the arrow A direction (or the B direction) is blocked.

  Next, the pushing member 2580 will be described with reference to FIG. 41 (a) is a front view of the pushing member 2580, FIG. 41 (b) is a side view of the pushing member 2580 in the arrow XLIb direction view of FIG. 41 (a), and FIG. 41 (c) is It is sectional drawing of the pushing member 2580 in the XIIc-XLIc line | wire of Fig.41 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 41, the push-in member 2580 includes a disc-like base body 2581 and a connecting shaft 2582 and a push-in piece 2583 disposed on the front of the base body 2581. It is inserted in 535 and disposed between the back side of the switching device 2600 and the front side of the switch member 2590 (see FIG. 53). The connecting shaft 2582 and the pushing piece 2583 are integrally formed on the base body 2581.

  The outer diameter dimension of the base body 2581 is set to a size slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the bearing portion 535 of the handle base 530, and is pushed to the switch member 2590 from the rear side to the front side (switching device 600). It is axially slidable in the bearing 535 in a direction (see FIGS. 53 to 55).

  The connecting shaft 2582 is a portion formed as a shaft having a trapezoidal cross section which is inserted into the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 2600 (see FIG. 53 to FIG. 55), and extends on the axis of the base body 2581 (see FIG. That is, they are formed concentrically with the base body 2581). The connection shaft 2582 is formed as a cross-sectional trapezoidal hole corresponding to the connection hole 620 of the switching device 2600. Accordingly, the connecting shaft 2582 is coupled to the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 2600 so as to be relatively movable in the axial direction and to be relatively rotatable in the circumferential direction.

  In addition to the fact that the connecting shaft 2582 and the connecting hole 620 can be connected so as not to be able to rotate relative to each other by forming the connecting shaft 2582 as a shaft having a trapezoidal cross section, positioning of both rotating direction positions (phases) It can be done (the two can regulate the phase that can be combined at only one place). That is, in the assembly process of the handle device 2051, after the rotational direction position of the push-in piece 2583 is made to coincide with the relief space 661 of the switching device 2600, the connecting shaft 2582 and the connecting hole 620 need to be connected. (See FIGS. 53 to 55) In the present embodiment, since the rotational direction position (phase) of the connecting shaft 2582 and the connecting hole 620 is positioned at one position, the rotational direction position is incorrect (the pushing piece 2583). It is possible to avoid coupling in such a state that the rotational direction position of the two does not coincide with the relief space 661 of the switching device 2600. As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the assembly operation and to suppress the assembly failure.

  The push-in piece 2583 is a part for pushing the biting balls 670a and 670b of the switching device 2600 into the biting space 651 (see FIGS. 53 to 55), and on the axis of the base body 2581 on the side of the connecting shaft 2582. It is formed in the shape of a plate having a cross-sectional shape corresponding to the biting space 651 of the switching device 2600 (that is, a shape which can be inserted into the biting space 651). Thereby, when the base body 2581 is pushed from the back side toward the switching device 2600 by the switch member 2590, the extended tip end face of the pushing piece 2583 pushes the bit balls 670a and 670b into the biting space 651.

  In addition, as described above, in the pushing member 2580, the connecting shaft 2582 is coupled to the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 2600 so that relative rotation is impossible. Therefore, since the pushing member 2580 and the switching device 2600 are integrally rotated through the connection of the connecting shaft 2582 and the connecting hole 620, the phase of the pushing piece 2583 and the relief space 661 are always matched. Can maintain That is, even when the switching device 2600 is turned to any rotational position (phase) with respect to the handle base 530 (bearing portion 535), when the switching device 2600 is pushed by the switch member 2590 The pieces 2583 allow the pinching balls 670 a, 670 b of the switching device 2600 to be pushed into the pinching space 651.

  Next, the switch member 2590 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 47. 42 (a) is a front view of the switch member 2590, FIG. 42 (b) is a side view of the switch member 2590 in the direction of the arrow XLIIb of FIG. 42 (a), and FIG. 42 (c) is It is sectional drawing of the switch member 2590 in the XLIIc-XLIIc line | wire of Fig.42 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 42, the switch member 2590 includes a cylindrical base body 2591, a cylindrical transmission rod 2592 inserted on the inner peripheral side of the base body 2591, and the transmission rod 2592 and the base body 2591. And a transmission rod biasing spring 2593 which is interposed in an elastically compressed state and applies an elastic recovery force in the extension direction to the transmission rod 2592, and the transmission rod 2592 has a first position and a second position. It is formed so as to be holdable at two positions (see FIG. 47).

  FIG. 43 (a) is a front view of the base body 2591. FIG. 43 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the base body 2591 taken along line XLIIIb-XLIIIb of FIG. 43 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 43, the base member 2591 is a portion to be fitted and fixed to the bearing portion 535 of the handle base 530, and an insertion hole 2591a is formed through at the center. A guide groove 2591b, which is a groove for holding the transmission rod 2592 at two positions, the first position or the second position, is recessed on the inner peripheral surface of the insertion hole 2591a. The holding structure of the transmission rod 2592 using the guide groove 2591b will be described later.

  Fig.44 (a) is a side view of the transmission rod 2592, FIG.44 (b) is sectional drawing of the transmission rod 2592 in the XLIVb-XLIVb line | wire of Fig.44 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 44, the transmission rod 2592 is a member inserted through the insertion hole 2591a (see FIG. 43) of the base body 2591 and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a circular cross section. The guide projections 2592a are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical body so as to protrude from the plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment). The guide protrusions 2592a are portions for moving along the guide grooves 2591b of the base body 2591. The guide protrusions 2592a are formed in the same shape and arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (120 degrees interval in this embodiment). .

  A flange-like flange portion 2591b is formed to project radially outward from the outer peripheral surface on one side (the lower side in FIG. 44A) of the transfer rod 2592 in the axial direction. The flange portion 2591 b functions as a seating surface for receiving a biasing force of a transmission rod biasing spring 2593 (see FIG. 42) interposed between the base body 2591 and the transmission rod 2592. That is, the transmission rod 2592 is always urged in the direction in which the flange portion 2592b is separated from the base body 2591 (downward in FIG. 42B) by the elastic recovery force in the extension direction of the transmission rod urging spring 2593. ing.

  Both ends in the axial direction (the upper and lower sides in FIG. 44A) of the transmission rod 2592 are formed as hemispherical spherical surfaces. In particular, the end (lower side in FIG. 44A) of the transmission rod 2592 on which the flange portion 2591b is formed is formed as a hemispherical spherical surface, thereby stably moving (sliding) the transmission rod 2592 be able to. That is, in the present embodiment, while the transmission rod 2592 is moved (slided) in a linear direction along the insertion hole 2591 a of the base body 2591, the linear motion conversion member 2800 pressing the transmission rod 2592 is a bearing portion It is a structure displaced about (shaft 2802 and bearings 2529), and the relative position relationship between the two is indeterminate, the pressing surface 2804 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is formed as a plane, and the end of the transmission rod 2592 The portion is formed as a spherical surface that bulges toward the pressing surface portion 2804 to move the contact position of the two along with the displacement centering on the shaft support portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) of the linear motion conversion member 2800, A force component for moving (sliding) the transmission rod 2592 linearly along the insertion hole 2591a of the base body 2591 can be continuously generated. . Thus, clogging of the transmission rod 2592 in the insertion hole 2591a can be suppressed, and the transfer rod 2592 can be stably moved.

  Further, when the end portion (upper side in FIG. 44A) of the transmission rod 2592 opposite to the side on which the flange portion 2592b is formed is formed as a hemispherical spherical surface, when the handle ring 2540 is turned. Thus, it is possible to improve the operation feeling of the above and the durability of the switching device 2600. That is, while the base body 2581 of the push-in member 2580 is a member which is rotated along with the turning operation of the handle ring 2540, the end of the transmission rod 2592 is always in contact with the back surface of the base body 2581. There is. Therefore, by making the end of the transmission rod 2592 hemispherical, the contact area between the transmission rod 2592 and the back surface of the base body 2581 can be reduced while securing the rigidity of the transmission rod 2592. The rotation resistance generated between the base body 2581 and the rear surface can be reduced, and as a result, the feeling of operation at the time of rotating the handle ring 540 can be improved. Further, since the reaction force acting on the transmission rod 2592 can be reduced when the base body 2581 is rotated, the transmission rod 2592 is rotated by the reaction force, and the guide projection 2592a or the guide groove 2591b (FIG. 44 and FIG. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of breakage (see FIG. 45).

  FIG. 45 is a plan development view illustrating the inner peripheral surface of the insertion hole 2591a of the base body 2591 in a plan view. In FIG. 45, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate the understanding, the reference numerals to the respective portions of the guide groove 2591b are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the guide groove 2591b of the base body 2591 is formed to have periodicity along the circumferential direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 45) of the insertion hole 2591a. Specifically, the guide groove 2591 b has a shape in which a range XLVI corresponding to a range of a central angle of 120 degrees is repeated in the circumferential direction (a shape in which three shapes of the range XLVI are arranged in the circumferential direction). Thus, the three guiding protrusions 2592a of the transmission rod 2592 are guided by the guiding grooves 2591b in the respective different ranges XLVI.

  Next, referring to FIG. 46, the guide projection 2592a of the transfer rod 2592 is guided by the guide groove 2591b of the base body 2591 to hold the switch member 2590 (transfer rod 2592) in the first position or the second position. Will be described. In this description, FIGS. 47 and 53 to 55 will be referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 46 is a partially enlarged development view of the guide groove 2591b, which is a partially enlarged view of a range XLVI in FIG. 47 (a) through 47 (c) are side views of the switch member 2590. FIG. 47 (a) corresponds to a state in which the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is disposed at the first position and the pushing member 2580 is not pushed (see FIG. 53), FIG. 47 (c). Corresponds to a state in which the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is disposed at the second position and the pushing member 2580 is pushed. Further, FIG. 47 (b) shows a state in which the switch member 2590 (transfer rod 2592) is disposed at a third position through which it transits from the first position to the second position (or from the second position to the first position). Corresponds to

  As shown in FIG. 46, in the state where the guide projection 2592a is positioned at the position P1 of the guide groove 2591b, the switch member 2590 is arranged such that the transmission rod 2592 is at the first position (see FIG. 47A). In this state, the guide protrusion 2592a is pressed against the first wall Wa of the guide groove 2591b by the biasing force of the transmission rod biasing spring 2593 and held at the position P1, whereby the transmission rod 2592 is held at the first position. Ru.

  In this state, the transmission rod 2592 is not protruded from the front of the base body 2591 and the push-in member 2580 is not pushed to the switching device 2600 side (see FIG. 53). 670a and 670b are disposed in the relief space 661 and set to be rotatable.

  From the state where the guide projection 2592a is located at the position P1 of the guide groove 2591b (that is, the state where the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the first position (see FIGS. 47A and 53)), the handle ring 540 (handle base 530). Is displaced downward and the transmission rod 2592 is pushed by the linear motion conversion member 2800 from the back side toward the push-in member 2580 (ie, in the direction of arrow G in FIG. 47A). Is guided along the shape of (path L1), and abuts against the rising inclined wall portion Wb. When the handle ring 540 is further displaced downward, and the transmission rod 2592 is further pushed by the linear motion conversion member 2800 from the rear side toward the push member 2580, the guide projection 2592a is along the upward inclined wall portion Wb of the guide groove 2591b. It is guided (path L2), and abuts on the guide regulation wall portion Wc at the position Pa. This state corresponds to the state where the transfer rod 2592 is disposed at the third position (see FIGS. 47 (b) and 55).

  After the guide projection 2592a abuts against the guide restriction wall Wc at the position Pa of the guide groove 2591b (see FIGS. 47 (b) and 55), the player loosens the operating force, whereby the handle ring 540 (handle base 530). Is released and the linear motion conversion member 2800 is retracted (see FIG. 55), the transmission rod 2592 is pulled back by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593 (FIG. 47 (b), arrow H). direction). As a result, the guide projection 2592a is guided along the shape of the guide groove 2591b (path L3) and abuts on the downward sloping wall Wd and is guided along the downward sloping wall Wd to reach the position P2 (path L4).

  In the state where the guide projection 2592a is positioned at the position P2 of the guide groove 2591b, the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the second position (see FIGS. 47 (c) and 55). In this state, the guide protrusion 2592a is pressed against the second wall portion We by the biasing force of the transmission rod biasing spring 2593 and held at the position P2, whereby the transmission rod 2592 is held at the second position.

  Further, in this state, the push rod 2592 is pushed toward the switching device 2600 by the transmission rod 2592 protruding from the front of the base body 2591 (see FIG. 55). The intruding spheres 670a and 670b are pushed into the biting space 651 and set in the engaged fixed state.

  From the state where the guide projection 2592a is located at the position P2 of the guide groove 2591b (ie, the state where the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the second position (see FIGS. 47 (c) and 55)), the handle ring 540 (handle base 530). Is displaced downward, and the transmission rod 2592 is pushed by the linear motion conversion member 2800 from the back side toward the push-in member 2580 (that is, in the direction of arrow G in FIG. 47C). It is guided along the shape (path L5) and abuts against the rising inclined wall Wf The handle ring 540 is further displaced downward, and the transmission rod 2592 is further pushed by the linear motion conversion member 2800 from the back side toward the pushing member 2580 Then, the guide projection 2592a is guided along the rising and sloping wall portion Wf (path L6), and at the position Pb Abuts the Seikabe unit Wg. That is, the transmission rod 2592 is disposed in the third position (see FIG. 47 (b) and FIG. 54).

  After the guide projection 2592a abuts against the guide regulation wall Wg at the position Pb of the guide groove 2591b (see FIGS. 47 (b) and 54), the player loosens the operating force, thereby the handle ring 540 (handle base 530). Is released and the linear motion conversion member 2800 is retracted (see FIG. 55), the transmission rod 2592 is pulled back by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593 (FIG. 47 (b), arrow H). direction). As a result, the guide projection 2592a is guided along the shape of the guide groove 2591b (path L7) and abuts on the downward sloping wall Wh and is guided along the downward sloping wall Wh to reach the position P1 (path L8). That is, the transmission rod 2592 is disposed (returned) to the first position (see FIGS. 47 (a) and 53).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 52, the handle mount 2520 and the linear motion conversion member 2800 will be described. FIG. 48 is a rear perspective view of handle base 530, handle mount 2520 and linear motion conversion member 2800 in the disassembled state, and FIG. 49 is an assembled view of handle base 530, handle mount 2520 and linear movement conversion member 2800. It is a rear perspective view.

  48 and 49 show a state where the variable resistor and the firing stop switch operation unit 440 are removed, and in FIG. 48, the positional relationship between the shaft 563 and the bearing 523 and the shaft 2802 and the bearing 2529. Each is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, a linear motion conversion member 2800 is disposed on the handle mount 2520 so as to face the back side of the handle base 530. The linear motion conversion member 2800 is configured such that the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is located on the back side with displacement of the handle base 530 (displacement downward about the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523)) relative to the handle mount 2520. 53 to 55, and is disposed on the handle mount 2520 so as to allow displacement about the pivot portion (shaft 2802 and bearing 2529). Ru. Now, with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51, the handle mount 2520 will be described.

  FIG. 50 is a perspective view of the handle mount 2520 in an exploded state. 51 (a) is a perspective view of the handle mount 2520 in an assembled state, and FIG. 51 (b) is an inner side view of the first main body 2520a.

  As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the handle mount 2520 (the first main body 2520a and the second main body 2520b) is different from the handle mount 520 (the first main body 520a and the second main body 520b) in the first embodiment, The other configuration is the same except that a bearing 2529 is additionally provided (added).

  The bearing 2529 is a bearing (recess) for pivotally supporting the shaft 2802 of the linear motion conversion member 2800, and is provided on the inner wall surface of the first main body 2520a and the second main body 2520b, respectively. A pair is disposed to face each other. The shaft 2802 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is pivotally supported by the bearing 2529, so that the linear motion conversion member 2800 is displaced (rocked) with respect to the handle mounting base 2520 centering on the pivotally supported portion (fulcrum) , And rotation) (see FIGS. 53 to 55).

  A locking claw 2529a protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing 2529 on one side (the first main body 2520a side) of the pair of bearings 2529. The end portion of a linear motion conversion member biasing spring 2890 for applying a biasing force to the linear motion conversion member 2800 is locked to the locking claw portion 2529a (see FIG. 48). Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), the bearing portion 2529 of the other (the second main body 2520b side) of the bearing portions 2529 of the pair of bearing portions 2529 has a handle support hole 2520 (second It is formed penetrating the wall surface of the main body 2520b). Thus, the end of the shaft portion 2802 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is protruded from the wall surface of the handle mount 2520 to the outside (see FIG. 49).

  Referring back to FIGS. 48 and 49, description will be made. The linear motion conversion member 2800 is used to push the switch member 2590 toward the push-in member 2580 in accordance with the displacement centering on the shaft support portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) of the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mount 2520. It is a member (see FIGS. 53 to 55), and is disposed in a posture in which the shafts 563 and 2802 are parallel to each other below the boss member 560 while facing the back side of the handle base 530.

  The boss member 560 is formed in a hollow shape, the projecting portion 562 of which has an opening at the lower side, and the linear motion conversion member 2800 is disposed below the boss member 560 so that it is in the projecting portion 562 of the boss member 560. The space to be formed is used as a space for displacing the pressing surface 2804 (see FIG. 53). Thereby, the linear motion conversion member 2800 can be enlarged even in a limited space in the handle mount 2520. Here, with reference to FIG. 52, the detailed configuration of the linear motion conversion member 2800 will be described.

  52 (a) is a side view of the linear motion conversion member 2800 in the arrow LIIa direction view of FIG. 48, and FIG. 52 (b) is a linear movement conversion member 2800 in the arrow LIIb direction view of FIG. 52 (a). FIG. 52 (c) is a front view, and is a side view of the linear motion conversion member 2800 in the arrow LIIc direction view of FIG. 52 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 52, the linear motion conversion member 2800 has a cylindrical main body 2801, a shaft 2802 concentrically extending from both ends of the main body 2801, and a projection from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 2802. Interlocking surface portion 2803, a pressing surface portion 2804 and a locking claw portion 2805, which are integrally formed.

  The shaft 2802 is a portion pivotally supported by the bearing 2529 of the handle mount 2520, and has a smaller diameter than the main body 2801. Therefore, a step surface is formed at the connecting portion between the main body 2801 and the shaft 2802, and the step surface abuts on the end face of the bearing 2529 of the handle mount 2520 (see FIG. 48). Are positioned left and right (in the axial direction of the main body 2801) with respect to the handle mount 2520.

  The shaft 2802 of one of the pair of shafts 2802 (the side of the second main body 2520b and the left side of FIG. 52 (b)) is the shaft of the other (the side of the first main body 2520a and the right side of FIG. 52 (b)). The axial length dimension is increased relative to 2802. In the assembled state of the handle device 2051, the end of one shaft 2802 is projected outward from the wall surface of the second main body 2520b (see FIG. 49). A connecting square portion 2802a having a rectangular cross section is formed at an end of the one projecting shaft 2802. The base of the operation / displaying piece 2570 is fixed to the connecting square portion 2802a so as not to be relatively rotatable. (See Figure 34).

  The interlocking surface portion 2803 and the pressing surface portion 2804 are flat portions extending radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 2801, and the plate surface is parallel to the extending direction of the shaft 2802. As shown in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (c), they are arranged in different postures from each other.

  The phases of these two are set as follows. That is, when the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is in the first position in the assembled state of the handle device 2051, the end of the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is the front surface of the pressing surface 2804 (front surface, FIG. (B) The front surface of the drawing is abutted, and the extended end (the lower end of FIG. 52B) of the interlocking surface 2803 is abutted on the back surface of the variable resistor (not shown) When the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is in the second position, the end of the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 abuts against the front surface of the pressing surface 2804, and The extended end of the interlocking surface 2803 is projected from the lower mating surface 528 of the handle mounting portion 2520 toward the handle base 530 (see FIG. 55).

  Therefore, as described later, when the handle base 530 is pushed downward with respect to the handle mounting base 2520 centering on the shaft support portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523), the extended end of the interlocking surface portion 2803 is a variable resistance It is pushed back (back side, for example, left direction in FIG. 53) by the back surface of the container (not shown). As described above, in the present embodiment, the back surface of the variable resistor is used as a portion for pushing back the extended tip of the interlocking surface portion 2803. Thus, there is no need to secure a flat surface for pushing back the extended end of the interlocking surface portion 2803 on the back side of the handle base 530, so that the handle base 530 (handle device 2051) can be miniaturized.

  Further, the rear surface of the variable resistor is projected on the rear surface side of the handle base 530, and the extended tip of the interlocking surface 2803 can be pushed back at a position closer to the shaft 2802. It can be made larger. In this case, in a structure in which a flat surface for pushing back the extending end of the interlocking surface portion 2803 is further provided on the back side of the handle base 530, the flat surface is projected to the same position as the back surface of the variable resistor If it is attempted to provide at the position), only the portion where the flat surface is provided becomes thick, so that the thickness of the handle base 530 becomes partially uneven, which leads to the deterioration of the yield at the time of injection molding. On the other hand, with the structure using the back surface of the variable resistor, the thickness of the handle base 530 can be made uniform throughout, so that the yield at the time of injection molding can be improved.

  The locking claw portion 2805 is a portion for locking the end of the linear motion conversion member biasing spring 2890 (see FIG. 53), and is formed in a bent hook shape. In addition, the linear motion conversion member biasing spring 2890 is formed as a torsion spring, and applies a biasing force in the clockwise (clockwise) direction to the linear motion conversion member 2801 in a side view in FIG. 52 (a). Thus, the linear motion conversion member 2801 is maintained in a state in which the front surface of the pressing surface 2804 is in contact with the end of the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590.

  Then, referring to FIGS. 53 to 55, downward displacement (depression operation) centering on the pivoting portion of the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mount 2520 enables the switching device 2600 to be pivotable or engaged. The switching structure for switching to the state will be described. In the description of this switching structure, FIG. 56 is referred to as appropriate.

  53 to 55 are partial cross-sectional side views of the handle device 2051, and FIGS. 53 and 55 illustrate a state before the handle base 530 is operated to be pushed downward with respect to the handle mount 2520. 54, the state in which the handle base 530 is operated to be pressed downward with respect to the handle mount 2520 is illustrated.

  FIGS. 53, 54 and 55 correspond to the state where the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the first position, the third position and the second position, respectively. 53 to 55, a state in which the second main body 2520b of the handle mount 2520 is removed is illustrated, and the wiring of each component is not illustrated.

56 (a) and 57 (a) are partially enlarged side views of the handle device 2051, and FIGS. 56 (b) and 57 (b) are partially enlarged top views of the handle device 2051. 56 (a) and 56 (b) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 53 in a state where the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the first position, and FIG. And FIG. 57 (b) shows the state where the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the second position, and corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 55, as shown in FIG. In the state where the rod 2592) is in the first position, since the tip end of the transmission rod 2592 is not protruded from the front surface (front surface, right side surface in FIG. 53) of the base body 2591 (see FIG. 47A) The push-in piece 2583 of the push-in member 2580 is a relief space 66 of the switching device 2600 because the push-in piece 2580 of the push-in member 2580 is not pushed by the transmission rod 2592 and disposed at a position retracted to the back side (left side in FIG. Placed in 1. Therefore, in the switching device 2600, the biting balls 670a and 670b are disposed in the relief space 661 by the biasing force of the pushing side biasing spring 680, and thus, it is possible to rotate relative to the bearing 535 The state is set (see FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (c)).

  In this manner, in the state where switching device 2600 is set to be rotatable (in the state where switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is in the first position as shown in FIG. 53), switching device 2600 is mounted on bearing 535 Since the operation end point is not changed (set), the handle ring 2540 increases from the initial position θ0 to the operation position θ1 in the same manner as in the first embodiment. When the rotation operation is performed, the handle side protrusion 546 of the handle ring 2540 pushes the restriction protrusion 630 of the switching device 2600 in the increasing direction, thereby interlocking the switching device 2600 with the handle ring 2540 and rotating the switching device 2600 in the increasing direction. (See FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b)).

  On the other hand, when the handle ring 540 is turned in the decreasing direction, as in the first embodiment, the switching device 2600 is operated by the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 539 (see FIG. 35). Following the and in the decreasing direction. That is, when the handle ring 2540 is rotated in the decreasing direction from the operation position θ1 to the initial position θ0, the switching device 2600 is also rotated in the decreasing direction by the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 539, and the regulating projection Positioned at a pivot position where the handle 630 abuts on the handle-side protrusion 546 (see FIGS. 28A and 28B).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53, in the state where the switching device 2600 is set to be rotatable (the switch member 2590 (transfer rod 2592) is in the first position), the handle ring 2540 is in the increasing direction or the decreasing direction. In either of the directions, the switching device 2600 is interlocked (synchronized) and rotated, and the rotational positions (phases) of the handle rings 2540 and the switching device 2600 are matched ( 28 (a) and 28 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 53, when the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is in the first position, the transmission rod 2592 is projected to the back side (the left side in FIG. 53), Since the pressing surface 2804 is also retracted backward, the linear motion conversion member 2800 is turned counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 53 about the shaft 2802. Thus, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), the operation / use display piece 2570 is also counterclockwise in FIG. 56 (a) with its base end (that is, the connecting square portion 2802a on the shaft 2802 of the linear motion conversion member 2800) as a center. As a result, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the extended display tip of the operation / combination display piece 2570 is the first scale portion S 1 and the second scale portion The first scale portion S1 of S2 is matched (pointing to the first scale portion S1).

  Therefore, the switch member 2590 is disposed at the first position based on the relationship between the operation / use display piece 2570 and the both scale parts S1 and S2 (ie, the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 2540 is changed) Can be easily identified.

  From the state shown in FIG. 53, when the handle base 530 is pushed downward with respect to the handle support 520 (center of the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) with respect to the handle mount 520, extension of the interlocking surface portion 2803 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 The front end is slid along the rear surface of the variable resistor (not shown) of the handle base 530 to be retracted toward the rear side (left side in FIG. 53), and the linear motion conversion member 2800 moves the shaft 2802 It is turned clockwise in FIG. 53 as a center.

  Thereby, the pressing surface 2804 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is advanced toward the front side (the right side in FIG. 53), and the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is pushed toward the pushing member 2580 by the pressing surface 2804. As shown in FIG. 54, the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the third position.

  From the state shown in FIG. 54, the player depresses the handle base 530 downward to loosen the operating force to release the downward displacement of the handle base 530 (ie, the handle base 530 is displaced upward and is horizontal). As shown in FIG. 55, the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is pulled back by the biasing force of the transmission rod biasing spring 2593 (see FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c)). , Second position (see FIG. 55).

  As shown in FIG. 55, when the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is in the second position (from the first position to the second position after passing the third position), the tip of the transmission rod 2592 is A position where the push-in member 2580 is advanced (pushed in) to the front side (right side in FIG. 55) by protruding from the front (front side, right side in FIG. 55) of the base body 2591 (see FIG. Therefore, the switching device 2600 has the biting balls 670a and 670b placed in the biting space 651 (ie, the pushing pieces 2583 of the pushing members 2580 hold the biting balls 670a and 670b in the biting space 651). (Pushed in), thereby setting the engaged fixed state (refer to FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (d)) which can not be rotated relative to the bearing 535.

  In the state where the switching device 2600 is set in the engaged fixed state, as described above, the biting balls 670a and 670b gradually decrease in the circumferential direction between the opposing surfaces of the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 and the biting surface 650. The rotation of the switching device 2600 (main body portion 610) with respect to the bearing portion 535 is restricted (blocked) by being caught in the gap.

  Therefore, when the handle ring 2540 is turned to the operation position θ1 (see FIG. 28B), the handle base 530 is pushed downward with respect to the handle mount 2520, and the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 Switching position from the first position to the second position, the switching device 2600 is set in the engagement fixed state, and the switching position of the switching device 2600 corresponds to the operation position θ1 (ie, the handle base 530 is the handle mount As a result of the pressing operation on 2520, the transmission rod 2592 can be fixed at the pivot position at the time when the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the second position (see FIG. 28C).

  As described above, when the switching device 2600 is set in the engagement fixed state and the rotation position is fixed, the switching device 2600 rotates the steering wheel 2540 even if the steering wheel 2540 is rotated in the decreasing direction. It is not interlocked (synchronized) with the movement, and is held at the rotational position corresponding to the operation position θ1 (see FIGS. 29A and 21B). That is, the handle ring 2540 can be turned in the decreasing direction and the operating direction independently of the switching device 2600 (see FIG. 29A).

  In this case, for example, when the switching device 2600 is held (fixed) at the rotational position corresponding to the operation position θ1 (see FIG. 29B), the handle ring 2540 returned to the initial position θ0 is increased. In the case of turning to the turning position, the turning position θ1 is the end point of the turning operation. That is, when the turning operation of the handle ring 2540 in the increasing direction reaches the operation position θ1, the handle side protrusion 546 is abutted against the restricting protrusion 630, and the turning operation in the further increasing direction is restricted. (See FIG. 28 (c)).

  As shown in FIG. 55, when the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is in the second position, the transmission rod 2592 is pushed to the front side (right side in FIG. 55). Since the pressing surface 2804 is also advanced to the front side, the linear motion conversion member 2800 is turned clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 55 about the shaft 2802. Thus, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), the operation / use display piece 2570 is also centered on its base end (ie, the connecting square portion 2802a on the shaft 2802 of the linear motion conversion member 2800) in FIG. As a result, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the extended display tip of the operation / combination display piece 2570 is the first scale portion S1 and the second scale portion S2. (Corresponding to the second scale portion S2).

  Therefore, the switch member 2590 is disposed at the second position based on the relationship between the operation / use display piece 2570 and the both scale portions S1 and S2 (ie, the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 2540 is changed) Can be easily identified.

  Here, from the state shown in FIG. 55 (the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the second position), the state shown in FIG. 53 (the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the first position) (Return), the handle base 530 is pushed downward with respect to the handle mounting base 2520 centering on the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523), as shown in FIG. Can be performed by releasing the downward pushing operation of the handle base 530 (that is, displacing the handle base 530 upward to return to the horizontal state). . That is, as shown in FIG. 53, the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is pulled back by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593 by this operation (see FIGS. 47A and 47B). It is arranged (returned) from the second position to the first position (see FIG. 46).

  In this case, for example, in a state where the switching device 2600 is held (fixed) at the rotational position corresponding to the operation position θ1 (see FIG. 29B), the above-described operation (transfer rod 2592 is not performed from the second position When an operation of passing 3 positions and returning to the first position is performed, the switching device 2600 is switched from the engaged fixed state to the rotatable state and made rotatable with respect to the bearing portion 535. In response to the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 2539, the switching device is returned to the initial position (rotational position where the restriction protrusion 630 is in contact with the handle side protrusion 546) (see FIG. 28A).

  The switching device 2600 is always interlocked (synchronized) with the push-in piece 2583 of the push-in member 2580 via the connection between the connection hole 620 and the connection shaft 2582 of the push-in member 2580 and thus is rotated in the first embodiment. Similarly to the case where the handle ring 2540 is turned, the downward movement of the handle base 530 to the handle mount 2520 causes switching from the fixed engagement state to the rotatable state (ie, , And return of the switching device 2600 to the initial position, and cancellation of the change of the operation end point) is enabled. As a result, even when the handle ring 2540 is turned, there is no need to temporarily return the handle ring 2540 to the initial position in order to release the change (setting) of the operation end point. Therefore, for example, when it becomes necessary to reset the position of the operation end point to another position, the reset operation of the handle ring 2540 is maintained while maintaining the turning operation of the handle ring 2540 (that is, while the game is continued). It can be done quickly.

  In addition, an operation to switch the switching device 2600 from the engagement fixed state to the rotatable state (cancel the change of the operation end point, that is, return operation to return the switching device 2600 to the initial position), and the engagement fixed from the rotatable state Both the operation of switching to the state (the change operation of changing (setting) the operation end point) is achieved by the downward pressing operation of the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mount 2520. That is, this can be achieved by operating the same member in the same direction. Thereby, as in the case of the first embodiment, the operation of the change operation and the return operation can be facilitated. In particular, since the state by the change operation and the state by the return operation are alternately switched, it is effective to improve the operability that the two states can be switched by repeating the same operation. In addition, since the same member can be operated in the same direction, the operable direction of the handle base 530 relative to the handle mount 2520 can be limited to only one direction, so the structure can be simplified accordingly. Product cost can be reduced.

  As described above, the operation / use display piece 2570 also serves as an operation unit operated by the player in order to switch the switching device 2600 to the rotatable state or the engaged / fixed state. That is, instead of pushing the handle base 530 downward with respect to the handle mount 2520, the switching device is also switched by rotating the operation / displaying piece 2570 around the shaft 2802 (the connecting square portion 2802a). Switching of the state 2600 (a rotatable state or an engaged fixed state) can be performed.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, in the state where the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is in the first position, the operation / display piece 2570 is in the position where the extended tip points to the first scale portion S1. It is arranged. When operation and display piece 2570 is turned toward second scale portion S2 about axis 2802 (connected square portion 2802a) from the state shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, linear motion conversion member 2800 is an axis. It is turned clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 53 centering on 2802, and the pressing surface 2804 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is advanced toward the front side (right side in FIG. 53). As a result, the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is pushed toward the push-in member 2580 by the pressing surface portion 2804, and the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the third position (FIG. 47 (a) and FIG. b) see). In this state, the operation / use display piece 2570 is rotated to a position where the extended tip thereof exceeds the second scale portion S2.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 and 57, when the player loosens the operating force for turning the operation / displaying piece 2570 from the state where the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is arranged in the third state. The transmission rod 2592 of the member 2590 is pulled back by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593 (see FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c)), and is disposed at the second position (see FIG. 46). Along with the arrangement of the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) at the second position, the extended tip of the operation / use display piece 2570 indicates the second scale portion S2.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 57, in the state where the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is in the second position, the operation / display piece 2570 is in the position where the extended tip points to the second scale portion S2. It is arranged. From the state shown in FIGS. 55 and 57, operation / display piece 2570 is directed to the opposite side to first scale portion S1 (that is, in the right direction in FIGS. 55 and 57) with shaft 2802 (connecting square portion 2802a) as a center. When the rotation operation is performed, the linear motion conversion member 2800 is rotated about the shaft 2802 in FIG. 55 clockwise (clockwise), and the pressing surface portion 2804 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is directed to the front side (right side in FIG. 53). Are advanced. As a result, the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is pushed toward the push-in member 2580 by the pressing surface portion 2804, and the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the third position (FIG. 47 (b) and FIG. c) see

  That is, in this state, as in the case where the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2529) described above is disposed from the first position to the second position, the extended tip of the operation / operation display piece 2570 has the second scale portion S2 The rotational operation is performed to a position beyond the position (that is, a position closer to the handle ring 2540 than the second scale portion S2).

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, when the player loosens the operation force for turning the operation / displaying piece 2570 from the state where the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is disposed in the third state. The transmission rod 2592 of the member 2590 is pulled back by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593 (see FIGS. 47A and 47B), and is disposed at the first position (see FIG. 46). Along with the arrangement of the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) at the first position, the extended tip of the operation / use display piece 2570 indicates the first scale portion S1.

  In this manner, the identification member (the operation / use display piece 2570) for indicating to the player whether the position of the operation end point is changed (set) or canceled is changed (set the operation end point (set) And the operation member operated by the player in order to perform the cancellation, and accordingly, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced.

  In this case, the change operation for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point (ie, the switch member 2590 (transfer rod 2592) disposed at the first position shown in FIGS. 53 and 56 is shown in FIGS. The operation of arranging at the second position) means that the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point is canceled (that is, the transmission rod 2592 is arranged at the first position) for the operation / use display piece 2570. Point to the second scale portion S2 which means that the position of the operation end point is changed (set) from the position pointing to the first scale portion S1 to be displayed (that is, the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the second position) Since this is achieved by the operation of arranging to the position, it is possible to make the player intuitively recognize that the operation is the change operation while operating it. As a result, careless operation can be suppressed.

  Similarly, the release operation (i.e., the switch member 2590 (transfer rod 2592) disposed at the second position shown in FIGS. 55 and 57) for releasing the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point is shown in FIGS. The operation of arranging at the first position shown in) means that the position of the operation end point is changed (set) (that is, the transmission rod 2592 is arranged at the second position). The first scale portion S1 means that the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point is canceled (that is, the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the first position) from the position pointing to the second scale portion S2 This is achieved by the operation of disposing to the position pointing to, so that the player can be operated while intuitively recognizing that the operation is the release operation. As a result, careless operation can be suppressed.

  In this case, the release operation for releasing the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point directly directs the operation / combination display piece 2570 from the position pointing to the second scale portion S2 to the position pointing to the first scale portion S1. Instead, as described above, it is necessary to temporarily move the first scale S1 to a position where it points after pointing to the opposite side of the first scale S1 (that is, in the right direction in FIGS. 55 and 57). is there. That is, since it is necessary to separately perform one operation (operation) in the opposite direction, the position of the operation end point changed (set) by the player (that is, the firing intensity of the gaming ball can be fired at a desired firing intensity) It is possible to prevent in advance that the turning operation position of the handle ring 540 is released by the player's careless operation.

  The switching device 2600 is used to change (set) the operation end point of the handle ring 2540 and adjust the pivoting position of the handle ring 2540 based on the position of the operation end point (return to the original pivot position) As for the adjustment method, the operation for switching the states of the switching devices 600 and 2600 is different (that is, the pressing operation of the button member 570 in the first embodiment, and the pressing operation of the handle base 530 in the second embodiment). Since the contents are the same as the contents described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31 in the first embodiment except for the fact that the description is omitted.

  As described above, according to the handle device 2051 in the second embodiment, the switchable state or the engaged / fixed state of the switching device 2600 is switched (that is, the position of the operation end point is changed (set) and released). Therefore, the operation for changing the position of the operation end point (setting) and the operation for releasing the position can be performed by rotating the handle ring 2540. It is possible to easily carry out while maintaining the operation amount of (i.e., suppressing the careless change of the launch intensity of the gaming ball due to the shift of the operation amount of the turning operation).

  Specifically, after the player adjusts the firing intensity of the gaming ball to a desired firing intensity by turning the handle ring 2540, the handle base 530 is mounted on the handle mount 2520 while maintaining that state. Operation to change the position of the operation end point (setting) and to release it, the operation to change the handle ring 2540 or another hand opposite to the hand operating the handle ring 2540 There is no need to perform an operation to operate the operation means (operation element). Thereby, the position of the operation end point can be changed (set) and released quickly, and the position of the operation end point is adjusted to the desired rotation operation position (that is, the launch intensity of the game ball is adjusted to the desired launch intensity) It can be accurately changed (set) to the rotation operation position of the handle ring 2540).

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the handle base 530 is operated to be pressed downward with respect to the handle mount 2520, such pressing operation can be performed using the weight of the fingers and arms gripping the handle ring 2540. The operability can be improved. In this case, the handle ring 2540 is disposed at a relatively low position of the pachinko machine 10, and the operation position is relatively low for the player, so the structure for pressing downward as in this embodiment is the player Is easy to exert force. Therefore, the operability can be improved also from this point.

  In addition, since a biasing force for returning to the horizontal position (displacement upward) is applied to the handle base 530 by the base biasing member SP, after performing a downward operation of the handle base 530 By releasing the downward operation force or releasing the hand, it is possible to return to the horizontal position by utilizing the biasing force of the base biasing member SP. As a result, the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58 to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the firing strength of the gaming ball is adjusted by turning the handle ring 540 has been described. However, the adjustment of the firing strength of the gaming ball in the third embodiment slides the operation element 3800 It is done by operating. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 58 (a) is a top view of the handle device 3051 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 58 (b) is a side view of the handle device 3051 as viewed in the direction of arrow LVIIIb in FIG. 58 (a). FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view of the handle device 3051 taken along line LIX-LIX in FIG. 58 (a).

  In FIGS. 58 (a) and 58 (b), the front surface of the lower tray unit 15 (that is, the attachment surface of the handle device 3051) is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line, The state in which the slide operation is performed to the approximate center of the is conveniently illustrated. Further, in FIG. 59, only the handle mount 3500 is viewed in cross section, and the cross sections of the other components are omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the handle device 3051 includes a handle mount 3500, a rotary shaft portion 3700 rotatably supported by the handle mount 3500, and an operation connected to the rotary shaft portion 3700. A main body 3810 of the operating element 3800 is horizontally projected to the front of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

  The handle mounting base 3500 includes a lower base 3510, an intermediate base 3520, and an upper base 3530, and the intermediate base 3520 is overlapped by being interposed between the lower base 3510 and the upper base 3530. The upper and lower ends (upper and lower sides in FIG. 58 (b)) are closed and an opening is formed in the side surface (right side in FIG. 58 (b)).

  A storage portion 3540 is disposed on the lower surface of the handle mount 3500 (lower base 3510). The housing portion 3540 houses a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the rotary shaft portion 3700 based on a change in electrical resistance. The gaming ball is fired with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor. Further, a closing member 3550 is disposed between the lower base 3510 and the middle base 3520, and the opening of the side surface of the handle mounting base 3500 is closed by the closing member 3550.

  The rotary shaft portion 3700 is rotatably disposed in the inside of the handle mount 3500 in a vertical posture in which the axial center direction is aligned with the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 59). A connection piece 3780 is provided so as to protrude from the lower end surface of the rotation shaft portion 3700, and the connection piece 3780 is connected to a variable resistor stored in the storage portion 3540. Therefore, when the rotary shaft 3700 is rotated, the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the rotary shaft 3700.

  The operator 3800 is slidably attached to the handle mount 3500 via the rotation shaft 3700. That is, as shown in FIG. 58A, the operator 3800 rotates in the virtual plane perpendicular to the axial center of the rotary shaft 3700 as the rotary shaft 3700 is rotated about its axis. In the section from the initial position θ0 to the maximum position θmax, sliding displacement is possible in the directions of arrows I and D. That is, the direction of arrow I corresponds to the increasing direction in which the firing intensity of the gaming ball is increased, and the direction of arrow D corresponds to the decreasing direction in which the firing intensity of the gaming ball is decreased.

  When the player 3800 is slide-displaced (slide operation) by the player in the direction of arrow I or in the direction of arrow D, the rotary shaft portion 3700 is rotated about the axis, and the storage portion 3540 is adjusted according to the amount of rotation The resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. Thereby, the launch strength of the gaming ball is increased or decreased. When the player's slide operation is released, the operating element 3800 is slidingly displaced in the direction of arrow D by the biasing force of the slide direction biasing spring 3581 and returned to the initial position θ0.

  As described above, since the rotary shaft 3700 is disposed along the vertical direction (gravity direction), the slide displacement of the operator 3800 (main body 3810) is a horizontal surface perpendicular to the gravity direction (in the gravity direction). It takes place along a vertical plane).

  The manipulator 3800 is displaceable in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 59) with respect to the handle mounting base 3500 centering on a portion (connection shaft 3990) pivotally supported by the rotation shaft portion 3700. That is, the operating element 3800 is formed to be able to push down the held portion 3830 downward (in the direction of the arrow G in FIG. 58B) with the connecting shaft 3990 as the rotation center (see FIG. 64). In the present embodiment, the depressing operation of the operation element 3800 (the held portion 3830) is performed downward in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the pressing operation of the operation element 3800 (held portion 3830) causes the weight of the player's hand to act on the held portion 3830 of the operating element 3800, or the wrist holding the held portion 3830 is returned downward. Only can be done easily.

  The switching device 3600 is disposed above the rotating shaft 3700. The switching device 3600 is a member for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point of the operating element 3800 as in the switching devices 600 and 2600 in the above embodiments, and is inserted into the bearing portion 3535 and the bearing portion 3535 It is possible to switch between two states: a rotatable state in which relative rotation is possible and an engaged fixed state in which relative rotation is not possible.

  The switching device 3600 is switched to the rotatable state or the engaged fixed state by pressing the operating element 3800 (held part 3830), thereby changing (setting) the position of the operation end point or releasing the position. Is done. The structure for changing (setting) or canceling the position of the operation end point by depressing the operation element 3800 will be described later.

  In the operation element 3800, when the held portion 3830 is pushed downward (in the direction of the arrow G), the springing direction biasing spring 3880 is elastically elongated and deformed, and the operation force in the depression direction by the player is relaxed. The elastic recovery force of the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880 displaces the operating element 3800 (held part 3830) upward (opposite direction of the arrow G) to the initial position (body part 3810 shown in FIG. 58B). Is returned to the horizontal position).

  A firing stop switch 3891 and a right-handed switch 3892 are disposed on the operating element 3800. The player can stop the firing of the gaming ball during pressing by pressing the firing stop switch 3891 regardless of the slide position (operation amount) of the operating element 3800, and the right-handed switch 3892 By pressing, the gaming ball can be fired at the maximum firing intensity during the pressing.

  Next, the handle mount 3500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. 60 (a) is a side view of the lower base 3510, and FIG. 60 (b) is a top view of the lower base 3510 in the direction of the arrow LXb in FIG. 60 (a), and FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the lower base 3510 taken along line LXc-LXc of FIG. 60 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 60, the lower base 3510 has a body 3511 formed in a cylindrical shape, a bottom wall 3512 for closing the lower opening of the body 3511, and an outer surface of the body 3511 from the outer peripheral surface. A fastening flange 3513 and a fastening seat 3514 which project to the other side, a bearing 3515 erected upward from the upper surface of the bottom wall 3512, and a support shaft erected on the side of the bearing 3515 A guide wall portion 3517 is provided so as to stand upward from the upper surface of the bottom wall 3512 with a predetermined interval between the portion 3516 and the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 3511.

  An opening 3511 a is formed on the front (front) side of the trunk portion 3511 by cutting a part of the trunk portion 3511. The opening 3511a is a cutaway portion for securing a displacement space in the sliding direction (arrows I and D directions) and the push-down direction (arrow G direction) of the operating element 3800 (see FIGS. 58 and 59). In a top view shown in (b), it is formed over a range of a central angle of about 170 degrees.

  In addition, since the lower base 3510 is formed as an opening in which the opening 3511a is continuous with (consecutively) an opening on the upper side (upper side in FIG. 60C) of the trunk portion 3511, the entire opening area can be secured. As a result, it is possible to improve the workability when mounting and assembling the rotary shaft portion 3700, the operation element 3800, the rotary shaft portion connection gear 3571, the slide direction biasing spring 3581 and the like in the lower base 3510. .

  The fastening flange 3513 is a plate-like body projecting outward from the outer peripheral surface of the body portion 3511 at the upper end (the upper side in FIG. 60A) of the body portion 3511. While being provided, an insertion hole 3513a is formed in each of the pair of fastening flanges 3513. Similar fastening flanges 3523, 3533 are also provided on the middle base 3520 and the upper base 3530, and these fastening flanges 3513, 3523, 3533 are superimposed on each other and inserted through the insertion holes 3513a, 3523a, 3533a. By fastening and fixing with the fastening bolt B, the bases 3510, 3520 and 3530 are connected and fixed, and the handle mount 3500 is formed (see FIG. 58).

  The fastening seat portion 3514 is a portion projecting outward from the outer peripheral surface of the trunk portion 3511 at the lower side (the lower side in FIG. 60A) of the trunk portion 3511, and the back side of the trunk portion 3511 (opening 3511a The phase is arranged 180 degrees out of phase). The outer surface (rear surface, the surface on the left side of FIGS. 60A and 60B) of the fastening seat 3514 is a flat surface parallel to the axial center of the body 3511 (hereinafter referred to as “seating surface 3514a”) The seating surface 3514a is a mounting surface (seating surface) when the handle device 3051 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the lower tray unit 15 (see FIG. 58).

  In the central portion of the bottom wall 3512, an insertion hole 3512a circular in a front view is bored. The connection piece 3780 of the rotary shaft portion 3700 is connected to the variable resistor in the storage portion 3540 via the insertion hole 3512a (see FIG. 59). The bearing portion 3515 is formed in a cylindrical shape concentric with the insertion hole 3512 a of the bottom wall 3512, and the lower end side of the rotary shaft portion 3700 is rotatably supported by the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 3515 (see FIG. 6).

  The support shaft portion 3516 is a portion for rotatably supporting the rotation shaft portion connection gear 3571 formed as a spur gear (see FIG. 59), and is formed in a shaft shape having a circular cross section. Specifically, the support shaft portion 3516 includes a small diameter portion located on the tip end side and a large diameter portion formed to be larger in diameter than the small diameter portion, and the rotation shaft portion connection gear 3571 can rotate on the small diameter portion. Supported by The rotary shaft connecting gear 3571 has a step surface between the small diameter portion and the large diameter portion of the support shaft portion 3516, and a snap ring (not shown) such as an E ring fitted on the tip of the small diameter portion of the support shaft portion 3516. As a result, the axial movement is restricted (held unremovably).

  In addition, a slide direction biasing spring 3581 formed as a torsion spring is held on the lower surface side of the rotation shaft connection gear 3571 in a state in which the slide direction biasing spring 3581 is elastically twisted and deformed (see FIG. 59). . A biasing force (elastic recovery force) is applied from the slide direction biasing spring 3581 to the rotating shaft portion connecting gear 3571, and the biasing force is applied via the connecting gear portion 3770 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 to the rotating shaft portion. It acts in a direction to return 3700 (ie, the operator 3800) to the initial position θ0.

  Therefore, when sliding the operating element 3800 in the increasing direction (direction of arrow I in FIG. 58), the biasing force of the sliding direction biasing spring 3581 imparts a sense of resistance to the sliding operation while the sliding operation When released, the operating element 3800 is slidingly displaced in the decreasing direction (direction of arrow D in FIG. 58) by the biasing force of the sliding direction biasing spring 3581, and is returned to the initial position θ0.

  The guide wall portion 3517 is a member for guiding the closing member 3550 (see FIG. 63) in the circumferential direction together with the guide wall portion 3527 (see FIG. 61) of the intermediate base 3520, and formed in a cylindrical shape with a circular top view. It is erected from the upper surface of the bottom wall 3512 at a position concentric with the body 3511. Therefore, a gap of a fixed size (an annular space in top view) is formed between the outer peripheral surface of the guide wall portion 3517 and the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 3511, and the lower end of the sealing member 3550 is inserted into this gap. (See FIG. 59). The lower end of the sealing member 3550 is guided in the gap between the guide wall portion 3517 and the body portion 3511 when the operating element 3800 is slid, and the sealing member 3550 is moved in the circumferential direction.

  61 (a) is a side view of the intermediate base 3520, FIG. 61 (b) is a top view of the intermediate base 3520 in the arrow LXIb direction view of FIG. 61 (a), and FIG. 61 (c) is It is sectional drawing of the intermediate | middle base 3520 in the LXIc-LXIc line | wire of FIG.61 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 61, the intermediate base 3520 includes a disc portion 3521 formed in a disc shape, an outer wall portion 3522 disposed along the outer edge of the lower surface of the disc portion 3521, and the disc portion 3521. The disc portion 3521 is separated by a predetermined distance between a fastening flange 3523 projecting outward from the outer peripheral surface of the disc, an insertion hole 3524 bored in the center of the disc portion 3521 and an inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 3522 And a guide wall portion 3527 erected downward from the lower surface of the lens.

  The outer diameter of the disc portion 3521 is the same as the outer diameter of the body portion 3511 of the lower base 3510 and the body portion 3531 of the upper base 3530, and the disc portion 3521 of the middle base 3520 in the assembled state of the handle mounting base 3500. Is held between the axial direction end faces of the body 3511 of the lower base 3510 and the body 3531 of the upper base 3530 (see FIGS. 58 and 59).

  The outer wall portion 3522 is a portion for shielding the internal space of the lower base 3510 from the outside (see FIGS. 58B and 59), and the cylindrical body concentric with the disc portion 3521 has a central angle of approximately 170 degrees. And is internally fitted in the opening 3511a in the trunk portion 3511 of the lower base 3510 (inserted in the opening 3511a). By the inner fitting structure of the outer wall portion 3522 with respect to the opening 3511a, the rigidity of the handle mounting base 3500 as a whole can be enhanced.

  Further, by forming the portion corresponding to the outer wall portion 3522 not to the lower base 3510 but to the intermediate base 3520, as described above, the rigidity as the entire handle mounting base 3500 is secured. Since the opening area of the side base 3510 as a whole can be secured, the rotation shaft 3700 and the operation element 3800 or the rotation shaft connection gear 3571 and the slide direction biasing spring 3581 can be accommodated in the lower base 3510 accordingly. The workability at the time of mounting and assembling can be improved.

  The fastening flange 3523 is a plate-like body that protrudes outward from the outer peripheral surface of the disc portion 3521 and is set to the same plate thickness as the disc portion 3521. Through holes 3523a are respectively provided in the pair of fastening flanges 3523. As described above, the fastening flange 3523 is superimposed on the fastening flanges 3513 and 3533 of the lower base 3510 and the upper base 3530 and fastened and fixed by the fastening bolt B (see FIG. 58).

  The insertion hole 3524 rotatably supports the rotation shaft 3700 by its inner peripheral surface (see FIG. 59). A cylindrical bearing portion 3521a is disposed on the lower surface of the disc portion 3521 at a position concentric with the insertion hole 3524. The rotary shaft portion 3700 is rotatably supported by the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 3521a. Be done. That is, since the insertion hole 3524 is extended in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 61C) by the bearing portion 3521a, and the bearing area can be secured by that amount, the bearing strength and bearing accuracy of the rotary shaft portion 3700 can be improved and durable. It is possible to improve the quality.

  The guide wall portion 3527 is a member for guiding the closing member 3550 (see FIG. 63) along with the guide wall portion 3517 (see FIG. 60) of the lower base 3510 in the circumferential direction, and has a cylindrical shape with a circular top view. It is erected from the lower surface of the disc portion 3521 at a position concentric with the outer wall 352. Therefore, a gap of a fixed size (an annular space in a bottom view) is formed between the outer peripheral surface of the guide wall portion 3527 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 3522, and the upper end of the sealing member 3550 is inserted into this gap. (See FIG. 59). The upper end of the sealing member 3550 is guided in the gap between the guiding wall portion 3527 and the outer wall portion 3522 when the operating element 3800 is slid, and the sealing member 3550 is moved in the circumferential direction.

  62 (a) is a side view of the upper base 3530, FIG. 62 (b) is a bottom view of the upper base 3530 in the direction of arrow LXIIb in FIG. 62 (a), and FIG. 62 (c) is FIG. 63 is a cross-sectional view of the upper base 3530 taken along line LXIIc-LXIIc of FIG. 62 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 62, the upper base 3530 is formed to have a cylindrical body 3531, an upper surface wall 3532 for closing the upper opening of the body 3531, and an outer peripheral surface of the body 3531 extending outward. The fastening flange 3533 and the fastening seat 3534 to be extended, the bearing 3535 erected downward from the lower surface of the upper surface wall 3532, and the support shaft 3536 erected downward on the side of the bearing 3535 And are formed.

  The fastening flange 3533 is a plate-like body projecting outward from the outer peripheral surface of the trunk portion 3531 at the lower side (the lower side in FIG. 62A) of the trunk portion 3531. The through holes 3533 a are formed in the pair of fastening flanges 3533. As described above, the fastening flange 3533 is superimposed on the fastening flanges 3513 and 3533 of the lower base 3510 and the upper base 3530, and fastened and fixed by the fastening bolt B (see FIG. 58).

  The fastening seat portion 3534 is a portion that protrudes outward from the outer peripheral surface of the trunk portion 3531 at the upper end (the upper end in FIG. 62A) of the trunk portion 3531 and is disposed on the back side of the trunk portion 3531 . The outer side surface (the surface on the left side of FIGS. 62A and 62B) of the fastening seat portion 3534 is formed as a flat surface (hereinafter referred to as a “seating surface 3534a”) parallel to the axial center of the trunk portion 3531 The seating surface 3534a is a mounting surface (seating surface) when the handle device 3051 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the lower tray unit 15 (see FIG. 5).

  The bearing portion 3535 is formed in a cylindrical shape concentric with the outer wall portion 3531, and the switching device 3600 is rotatably inserted on the inner peripheral side thereof (see FIG. 59). The support shaft portion 3536 is a portion for rotatably supporting the switch connecting gear 3572 which is formed as a spur gear (see FIG. 59), and is formed in a shaft shape having a circular cross section.

  Specifically, the support shaft portion 3536 includes a small diameter portion located on the tip end side and a large diameter portion formed to be larger in diameter than the small diameter portion, and the switching device connecting gear 3572 is rotatable in the small diameter portion. Supported. The switching device connecting gear 3572 includes a step surface between the small diameter portion and the large diameter portion of the support shaft portion 3536 and a snap ring (not shown) such as an E ring fitted to the tip of the small diameter portion of the support shaft portion 3536 By being disposed in between, axial movement is restricted (impossible to hold it out).

  A switching device biasing spring 3582 formed as a torsion spring is held on the upper surface side of the switching device connecting gear 3572 in a state in which the switching device biasing spring 3582 is elastically twisted and deformed (see FIG. 59). A biasing force (elastic recovery force) is applied to the switching device connecting gear 3572 from the switching device biasing spring 3582, and the biasing force is at the initial position of the switching device 3600 (the engagement protrusion 3630 is the rotation shaft 3700). Is returned to the position where it is engaged with the step surface 3711c (see FIG. 77 (a)).

  Fig. 63 (a) is a front view of the sealing member 3550, and Fig. 63 (b) is a bottom view of the sealing member 3550 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIIIb in Fig. 63 (a). 63 is a cross-sectional view of the sealing member 3550 taken along line LXIIIc-LXIIIc of FIG. 63 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 63, the sealing member 3550 shields the opening 3511 a formed on the front (front) side of the lower base 3510 to prevent the inside of the handle mount 3500 from being viewed from the outside. (See FIG. 58 (b)) and is formed in a cylindrical shape.

  The sealing member 3550 has an outside diameter dimension slightly smaller than the inside diameter dimension of the body 3511 of the lower base 3510 and the outer wall 352 of the middle base 3520, and the inside diameter dimension of the sealing wall 3517 of the lower base 3510. And the outside diameter dimension of the guide wall 3527 of the intermediate base 3520. Therefore, the lower end and the upper end (the lower side and the upper side in FIG. 63A) of the sealing member 3550 can be inserted into the above-mentioned gap formed on the outer peripheral side of the guide wall portions 3517 and 3527, thereby It can be moved along the above-mentioned gap (that is, in the circumferential direction).

  In the sealing member 3550, a notch 3551 is formed by cutting in a part in the circumferential direction. The notch 3551 is a notch for inserting the main body 3810 of the operating element 3800 and securing a displacement space in the push-down direction (see FIGS. 58 and 59), and the lower end of the closing member 3550 (see FIG. It is formed as a notch of a front view rectangular shape extended from 63 (a) lower side).

  The width dimension (the dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 63A) of the notch 3551 is set to be slightly larger than the width dimension (the dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 58A) of the main body portion 3810 of the operating element 3800. Therefore, while enabling the depressing operation of the operation element 3800 (the arrow G direction in FIG. 58B), the operation element 3800 is slid in the increase direction or the decrease direction (the arrow I direction or the arrow D direction in FIG. 58A). At the same time, the closing member 3550 is moved in the circumferential direction in conjunction with the sliding operation.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68, the rotary shaft portion 3700 and the operating element 3800 will be described. FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b) are partial cross-sectional side views of the rotary shaft portion 3700 and the operating element 3800, and FIG. 64 (a) shows the operating element 3800 in the initial position in the depression direction. FIG. 64 (b) corresponds to the state in which the operating element 3800 is pressed downward.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the operating element 3800 and the rotation shaft 3700 are connected via the connection shaft 3990. Thus, the operator 3800 can be displaced (operated) in two directions. That is, first, by rotating the operation element 3800 about the connecting shaft 3990 as a rotation center, the held portion 3830 is displaced downward (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 58B) (a pressing operation is It is possible to do). Second, by rotating the operation element 3800 integrally with the rotary shaft portion 3700 about the axis of the rotary shaft portion 3700, the held portion 3830 is slid (in the directions of arrows I and D, It is possible to displace (perform a slide operation) to FIG. 58 (a)).

  65 (a) is a side view of the rotary shaft 3700, and FIG. 65 (b) is a rear view of the rotary shaft 3700 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVb of FIG. 65 (a). Is a partial cross-sectional rear view of push-up member 3410. FIG. 66 (a) is a top view of the rotary shaft 3700 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIa in FIG. 65 (a), and FIG. 66 (b) is a rotary shaft 3700 at line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66 (a). FIG. In FIG. 65 (b) and FIG. 65 (c), the state in which the push-up member 3410 is removed is illustrated in order to facilitate understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the rotary shaft 3700 has a rod-like shaft body 3710, an insertion hole 3720 drilled in the shaft body 3710, and an opening formed on the back side of the shaft body 3710. Opening 3730, a hook portion 3740 disposed on the outer peripheral surface of the shaft main portion 3710, an operator restricting portion 3750, a guide shaft 3760 and a connecting gear portion 3770, and a connection protruding from the lower end surface of the shaft main portion 3710 And a piece 3780.

  The shaft main body portion 3710 is coaxially connected to a cylindrical portion 3711 formed in a cylindrical shape and the lower end (the lower side in FIG. 66B) of the cylindrical portion 3711 and is formed as a solid rod body having a circular cross section. And a real portion 3712, which are integrally formed of a resin material.

  The height position of the reference surface 3711 a and the axial direction (vertical direction of FIG. 66 (b)) of the reference surface 3711 a relative to the reference surface 3711 a A raised surface 3711 b raised upward is formed, whereby a pair of step surfaces 3711 c connecting the reference surface 3711 a and the raised surface 3711 b is formed on the upper end side of the cylindrical member 3711.

  As will be described later, the rotary shaft portion 3700 is formed so that the step surface 3711 c can be engaged with the restriction projection 3630 of the switching device 3600. In the state where the switching device 3600 is set to be rotatable, the step surface 3711c is engaged with the restricting projection 3630 to rotate the rotation shaft 3700 (sliding operation in a direction in which the operation element 3800 is increased). While the switching device 3600 is interlockedly rotated, when the switching device 3600 is set in the engaged fixed state, the step surface 3711 c is engaged with the restriction projection 3630 to rotate the rotation shaft 3700 (operation The slide operation of the child 3800 in the increasing direction is restricted (see FIG. 77 (c)). As a result, an operating end point is formed.

  The reference surface 3711 a and the raised surface 3711 b are flat surfaces perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft body 3710, and the pair of step surfaces 3711 c are parallel to each other and parallel to the axial direction of the shaft body 3710. Flat surface. In addition, the pair of step surfaces 3711 c are arranged with a phase difference of 180 degrees. However, in the present embodiment, one stepped surface 3711 c of the pair of stepped surfaces 3711 c is engaged with the restriction protrusion 3630 of the switching device 3600.

  A guide groove 3715 is recessed on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 3711. The guide groove 3715 is a groove for holding the transmission rod 3420 (see FIG. 73) at the first position or the second position. The detailed configuration of the guide groove 3715 will be described later.

  The insertion hole 3720 is a hole having a circular cross section through which the connection shaft 3990 is inserted, and a pair of holes are formed in a straight line in the cylindrical portion 3711 of the shaft body portion 3710. In addition, the connecting shaft 3990 is formed in a shaft shape having a circular cross section from a wrought material. The opening 3730 is an opening for securing the arrangement space of the push-up member 3410, and is formed as a rectangular opening in a rear view in the cylindrical portion 3711 of the shaft main body 3710, as shown in FIG. Protrusions 3731 for rotatably supporting the push-up member 3410 are respectively provided in a projecting manner on a pair of opposing inner side surfaces of the opening 3730.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the push-up member 3410 is formed in a rectangular shape in a rear view, and as shown in FIG. 66 (b), a plate-shaped member having an L-shaped cross section with the lower end side bent. Recesses 3411 are respectively provided on the upper end sides of the pair of opposing outer side surfaces. The protrusion 3731 of the opening 3730 is fitted in the recess 3411, and the push-up member 3410 is rotatably supported in the opening 3730 with the protrusion 3731 and the recess 3411 as a rotation center (see FIG. 64). The push-up member 3410 is disposed in a posture in which the bent portion on the lower end side is directed to the axial center side of the cylindrical portion 3711 of the shaft main portion 3710.

  The hook portion 3740 is a portion for engaging and holding one end of the flip-up direction biasing spring 3880 formed as a coil spring (see FIG. 64), and the portion having an L-shaped cross section bent upward is A pair is disposed at a predetermined interval. The operator restricting portion 3750 is a rod-like portion for restricting the displacement of the operator 3800 whose center of rotation is the connecting shaft 3990, and is disposed on the back side of the shaft main portion 3710 and below the opening 3730. .

  That is, the flip-up direction biasing spring 3880 is mounted between the hook portion 3740 of the rotary shaft portion 3700 and the hook portion 3840 of the operating element 3800 in an elastically expanded state, and the player operates the operating element. After the button 3800 is pushed downward (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 58 (b)) (see FIG. 64 (b)), when the depressing operation is released, the operating element 3800 moves in the springing direction biasing spring 3880. Is biased upward (in the direction opposite to the arrow G, see FIG. 58 (b)) by the biasing force (elastic recovery force). In this case, when the operator restricting portion 3750 receives the lower surface of the main body 3810 of the operator 3800, the displacement of the operator 3800 in the flip-up direction is restricted. Thereby, the operating element 3800 is held at the initial position in the depressing operation (see FIG. 64A).

  As described above, since the operator restricting portion 3750 is a portion that receives the operator 3800 (the lower surface of the main portion 3810) flipped up by the biasing force of the flipping direction biasing spring 3880, a large load is applied. However, in the present embodiment, the operator restricting portion 3750 is disposed not on the thin cylindrical portion 3711 but on the solid solid portion 3712. Thereby, the rigidity can be secured, and the flipped up operator 3800 (the lower surface of the main body portion 3810) can be firmly received. As a result, the durability can be improved.

  The guide shaft 3760 is a portion for guiding the displacement direction of the operation element 3800 when the operation element 3800 is displaced in the depression direction or the opposite direction, and for smoothly performing the displacement of the held portion 3830. It is disposed on the front side of a solid portion 3712 opposite to the portion 3750 with respect to the solid portion 3712. When the operator 3800 is depressed, the guide shaft 3760 moves in the guide groove 3870 of the operator 3800 (see FIG. 64B) to displace the operator 3800 along the guide groove 3870. It can be guided. As a result, rattling of the operation element 3800 can be suppressed, and the operation at the time of pressing the operation element 3800 can be stabilized. Moreover, in connection with this, the burden of the connecting shaft 3990 can be reduced and damage to the connecting shaft 3990 can be suppressed.

  The connection gear portion 3770 is a portion formed as a spur gear, and is meshed with the rotation shaft portion connection gear 3571 (see FIG. 59). As described above, the biasing force from the slide direction biasing spring 3581 is transmitted from the rotating shaft portion connecting gear 3571 to the connecting gear portion 3770, whereby the rotating shaft portion 3700 is rotated, and the operating element 3800 is at the initial position θ0. (See FIG. 58A).

  The connection piece 3780 is a shaft-like body fixed to the lower end surface of the shaft body 3710, and is connected to a variable resistor (not shown) through the insertion hole 3512a of the lower base 3510 as described above. Be done. Thereby, the operation amount of the slide operation of the operation element 3800 is converted into the rotation amount of the rotary shaft portion 3700 and transmitted to the variable resistor.

  FIG. 67 (a) is a side view of the operating element 3800, and FIG. 67 (b) is a top view of the operating element 3800 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67 (a). 68 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the manipulator 3800 taken along line LXVIIIa-LXVIIIa in FIG. 67 (b), and FIG. 68 (b) is a manipulator 3800 taken along line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. 67 (b). FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the operator 3800 has a main body 3810 including a base 3811 and a leg 3812, an insertion hole 3820 drilled in the leg 3812 of the main body 3810, and a main body 3810. A held member 3830 erected from the base 3811, a hook 3840 and a support wall 3850 disposed on the outer surface of the base 3811 of the main body 3810, and a cam member bridged between the legs 3812 of the main body 3810 3860 and a guide groove 3870 disposed on the inner surface of the leg 3812 of the main body 3810.

  The main body 3810 has a long box-like base 3811 and a pair of legs 3812 extending along the longitudinal direction from the base side (the left side of FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b) of the base 3811). Equipped with A holding portion 3830 is erected substantially vertically on the tip end side of the base 3811 (the right side in FIGS. 67A and 67B). The pair of legs 3812 are disposed substantially in parallel with each other with a predetermined distance therebetween, and the rotation shaft 3700 is disposed between the pair of legs 3812 (see FIG. 64).

  Further, in the pair of leg portions 3812, insertion holes 3820 are respectively bored along the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 67 (b)). The rotary shaft portion 3700 is disposed between the pair of leg portions 3812 facing each other, and the connecting shaft 3990 inserted from one of the insertion holes 3820 of the pair of leg portions 3812 passes through the insertion hole 3720 of the rotary shaft portion 3700. At the same time, the operator 3800 is connected to the rotation shaft 3700 via the connection shaft 3990 by inserting the insertion hole 3820 into the other insertion hole 3820 of the pair of legs 3812, and the lower part of the held portion 3830 (arrow G The pressing operation to the direction, see FIG. 58 (b), is enabled (see FIG. 64).

  In the side view shown in FIG. 67 (a), the extending tip end side (left side in FIG. 67 (a)) of the pair of leg portions 3812 is curved in an arc shape and is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the arc curved portion. The elastic film members 3893 are respectively attached to the The elastic film member 3893 is a member formed in a film shape from an elastic material such as a rubber material. When the held portion 3830 of the operation element 3800 is pushed down and the leg 3812 is pushed up, the elastic film member 3893 is brought into close contact with the lower surface of the disc portion 3521 of the intermediate base 3520 (see FIG. 76).

  As a result, it is possible to restrict the displacement of the operating element 3800 in the slide operation direction by using the adhesion (frictional force) of the elastic film member 3893. Therefore, as described later, when the position of the operation end point is changed (set), it is possible to suppress an inadvertent change in the operation amount of the slide operation of the operation element 3800. That is, it is possible to suppress an inadvertent change in the firing intensity of the gaming ball due to the position shift of the slide operation position. Thereby, the position of the operation end point can be accurately changed (set) to a desired position (that is, the slide operation position of the operation element 3800 when the launch intensity of the game ball is adjusted to the desired launch intensity). .

  The held portion 3830 is a portion held by the player's hand or palm when sliding or pushing the operating element 3800, and is formed as a rod-like body having a substantially rectangular cross section with corner portions chamfered in an arc shape. Be done. As described above, by forming the held portion 3830 as a rod-like body, the held portion 3830 can be easily held (held), and as a result, when the operation element 3800 is operated to slide and push down. The operability can be improved.

  Further, since the held portion 3830 is erected from the main portion 3810 along the vertical direction, the held portion 3830 can be held (held) by the player in a natural posture. In particular, since the held portion 3830 is erected upward from the main body portion 3810, when gripping the held portion 3830, the outer edge portion of the palm corresponds to the upper surface of the main body portion 3810 (FIG. 67A). Can be placed on the surface). Thus, the player's fatigue can be reduced, and when the operator 3800 is pushed downward, for example, the hand on the upper surface of the main body 3810 even if the held portion 3830 is not gripped. The result is that the depressing operation can be easily performed.

  The above-described launch stop switch 3891 and right-handed switch 3892 are respectively disposed on the standing end of the held portion 3830 and the back side of the held portion 3830 (the side facing the connecting shaft 3990 (see FIG. 64)). Thereby, the player can easily operate the firing stop switch 3891 with the thumb or forefinger and the right strike switch 3892 with the forefinger or middle finger while holding the held portion 820 naturally.

  The hook portion 3840 is a portion for engaging and holding the other end of the flip-up direction biasing spring 3880 whose one end is engaged and held by the hook portion 3740 (see FIG. 65) of the rotation shaft portion 3700 (see FIG. 64). And L-shaped in cross section bent downward.

  The support wall 3850 is a wall portion for supporting the flip-up direction biasing spring 3880 from the lower side, and is formed to curve upward in a convex arc shape in a side view shown in FIG. 67 (a). In this manner, the support wall 3850 is curved in an arc shape, whereby the distance of the springing direction biasing spring 3880 (a distance measured along the springing direction biasing spring 3880 between both hooks 3740 and 3840) Can be made longer (see FIG. 64 (a)). Therefore, it is possible to use a springing direction biasing spring 3880 having a longer overall length in a limited space, and as a result, the biasing force can be increased and the durability of the springing direction biasing spring 3880 is improved. Can be

  The cam member 3860 is a member for pushing up the push-up member 3410 disposed displaceably on the rotary shaft portion 3700 upward (see FIG. 64), and is a rod-like member bridged between the pair of leg portions 3812 673 and the center of the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 67B) of the bridging portion 3861 from the center to the base 3811 side (that is, the side on which the rotary shaft 3700 is disposed, right side in FIG. 67B) And an upwardly extending push-up cam 3862, which are integrally formed. The cam member 3860 is formed separately from the main body portion 3810, and both ends of the bridging portion 3861 are fastened and fixed to the leg portions 3812 of the main body portion 3810 by fastening bolts (not shown).

  The lifting cam 3862 is formed in a triangular shape in cross section, and as shown in FIG. 68, is disposed in a posture in which the top of the triangular shape is directed upward. In a state in which the rotary shaft 3700 is connected to the main body 3810 (between the pair of legs 3812 facing each other) via the connecting shaft 3990, the triangular cam portion of the push-up cam 3862 is the rotary shaft of the push-up member 3410 (protrusion 3731 and the concave portion 3411, which are disposed at the lower position in the vertical direction in FIGS. 65 (b) and 65 (c), and the slope of one side of the triangle (right side in FIG. 68 (a)) It is arrange | positioned by the position which supports the lower end of 3410 (refer FIG. 64 (a)).

  The cam member 3860 is an inclined surface on one side (right side in FIG. 68A) of the triangle shape of the push-up cam 3862 when the operating element 3800 is pressed downward (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 58B). Using the top (FIG. 68 (a) upper side), the push-up member 3410 disposed on the rotary shaft 3700 is pushed upward (see FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b)).

  As described above, by forming the push-up cam 3862 in a triangular shape in cross section, and by using the slope and the top to push the push-up member 3410 upward, in a normal state in which the operating element 3800 is not depressed. (See FIG. 64 (a)), the push-up member 3410 can be disposed further downward, and the overall height dimension (axial dimension, dimension in FIG. 64 (a) vertical direction) can be reduced while the operating element is being operated. When pressing down the 3800 (see FIG. 64 (b)), the amount by which the lifting member 3410 is pushed up can be secured, so the stroke amount necessary for the pressing operation of the operating element 3800 can be reduced to improve operability. And increase the lifting stroke of the transmission rod 3420 (see FIG. 73) to reliably switch the state of the switching device 3600. Kill (see FIG. 76 from FIG. 74).

  The guide groove 3870 is a recessed groove for guiding the guide shaft 3760 (see FIG. 65) of the rotating shaft portion 3700, and is formed as a groove having a rectangular cross section on the opposite surface of the pair of leg portions 3812. It is curved and extended in an arc shape centering on Therefore, when the operating element 3800 is pressed downward (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 58B) (see FIGS. 64A and 64B), the guide shaft 3760 of the rotary shaft portion 3700 is used. However, by being guided along the guide groove 3870, rattling of the operating element 3800 can be suppressed, and the depression operation of the operating element 3800 can be smoothly performed. Moreover, in connection with this, the burden of the connecting shaft 3990 can be reduced and damage to the connecting shaft 3990 can be suppressed.

  The main body portion 3810 and the held portion 3830 have a two-split structure in which the center in the width direction (vertical direction in FIG. 67B) is a split surface (a mating surface). That is, the main body portion 3810 and the held portion 3830 are formed in a plane symmetry of the first component forming one side of the main body portion 3810 and the held portion 3830 with respect to the first component with the division plane as a symmetrical plane. 3810 and a second part forming one side of the held portion 3830, and by joining the first part and the second part at the division surfaces of each other, the inside of the firing stop switch 3891 etc. It is formed in a hollow shape having a space for wiring the electrical connection lines.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 69 to 73, the switching member 3600, the pushing member 3430 and the transmission rod 3420 will be described. FIG. 69 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the handle device 3051.

  As shown in FIG. 69, in the handle mount 3500, the switching device 3600, the push-in member 3430 and the transmission rod 3420 are coaxially arranged in series in order from the top. The switching device 3600 is inserted into the bearing portion 3535 of the upper base 3530, and the push-in member 3430 and the transmission rod 3420 are inserted into the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 (shaft main body 3710).

  First, the switching device 3600 and the pushing member 3420 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72.

  FIG. 70 (a) is a top view of the switching device 3600, FIG. 70 (b) is a side view of the switching device 3600 in the arrow LXXb direction view of FIG. 70 (a), and FIG. 70 (c) is FIG. 70 is a bottom view of the switching device 3600 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXc in FIG. 70 (b). 71 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the switching device 3600 taken along line LXXIa-LXXIa of FIG. 70 (a), and FIG. 71 (b) is a side view of the switching device 3600 in the arrow LXXIb direction of FIG. 70 (b). FIG.

  72 (a) is a front view of the pushing member 3430, and FIG. 72 (b) is a side view of the pushing member 3430 in the arrow LXXIIb direction view of FIG. 72 (a), FIG. 72 (c) FIG. 73 is a cross-sectional view of the pressing member 3430 in the line LXXIIc-LXXIIc of FIG.

  In FIGS. 70 and 71, the biting balls 670a and 670b, the pushing side biasing spring 680 and the biting side biasing spring 690 are not shown.

  Here, the switching device 3600 is connected instead of the point that the shape of the restricting protrusion 3630 is different from the shape of the restricting protrusion 630 in the first and second embodiments, and the spring receiving portion 640 in the first and second embodiments. It is technically substantially the same as the switching devices 600 and 2600 in the first and second embodiments, except that the gear portion 3640 is provided. Also, the push-in member 3430 is technically substantially the same as the push-in member 2580 in the second embodiment. Therefore, substantially the same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the switching device 3600 is projected radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610, the connection hole 620 formed through the main body 610, and the connection hole 620. The projection 3630 includes a restriction projection 3630 and a connection gear 3640, and a biting surface 650 and a flank 660 formed by recessing the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610.

  The outer diameter of the main body portion 610 is set to a size slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the bearing portion 3535 (see FIG. 69) of the upper base 3530. Thus, the main body portion 610 is rotatably held in the bearing portion 3535 by being inserted into the bearing portion 3535 of the upper side base 3530 (see FIG. 74).

  The restricting protrusion 3630 is a portion that is in contact with the step surface 3711c (see FIGS. 77 and 78) in the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotary shaft 3700 (shaft main body 3710), and is formed as a rod having a circular cross section. It is disposed radially outward of the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 610 and protrudes downward from the lower surface (the lower surface in FIG. 71B) of the main body portion 610.

  The connection gear portion 3640 is a plate-like body formed so as to project radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 610, and the outer peripheral surface of the plate-like body is connected to the switching device connection gear 3572 (see FIG. 69). Spur gears capable of meshing are engraved. The lower surface of the coupling gear portion 3640 (the surface on the front side of the drawing of FIG. 70C) is flush with the lower surface of the main body portion 610 (the surface of the front side of the drawing of FIG. It is formed as a flat surface which is axially aligned and perpendicular to the axis.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the push-in member 3430 includes a base body 2581 and a connecting shaft 2582 and a push-in piece 2583 disposed on the upper surface of the base body 2581. The outside diameter size of the base body 2581 is set to a size slightly smaller than the inside diameter size of the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotating shaft 3700 (shaft main body 3710), and the switching device 3600 is pivoted in the bearing 3535. In such a case, the inside of the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 can be turned, and the inside of the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 is switched when pushed upward by the transmission rod 3420 from the lower surface side. It is slidable towards the device 3600 (see FIGS. 74 to 76).

  The switching device 3600 is brought into an engaged fixed state by the biting balls 670 a and 670 b being pushed into the biting space 651 by the pushing piece 2583 of the pushing member 3430, with respect to the bearing portion 3535 of the upper base 3530. When the push-in pieces 2583 of the push-in member 3430 are retracted while the bite balls 670 a and 670 b are disposed in the relief space 661, they are switched to the pivotable state. It can be rotated relative to the bearing 3535. The switching structure of the switching device 3600 is the same as in the first and second embodiments (see FIGS. 15 and 40), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the transmission rod 3420 will be described. FIG. 73 (a) is a side view of the transmission rod 3420, and FIG. 73 (b) is a top view of the transmission rod 3420 viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIIIb of FIG. 73 (a).

As shown in FIG. 73, the transmission rod 3420 is a member disposed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 3711 of the shaft body portion 3710 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 (see FIG. 69), and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a circular cross section. Be done. Guide projections 3421 are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical body so as to project from a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment). Each guide protrusion 421 is a portion for moving along a guide groove 3715 (see FIG. 66 (b)) formed on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 3711 in the rotation shaft portion 3700, and each has the same shape. And at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (120 degrees in this embodiment).

The lower end (the lower portion in FIG. 73 (a)) of the transmission rod 3420 is formed in a conical shape coaxial with the cylindrical portion. Thus, the transfer rod 3420 can be made closer to the push-up member 3410 on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotary shaft portion 3700 (see FIG. 69), so a limited space on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 3711 Can be used effectively, and the overall size can be reduced.

  The transmission rod 3420 is held at the first position or the second position by the guide projection 3421 being guided along a guide groove 3715 formed on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 3711. Specifically, each time the push-up member 3410 pushes up, the first position is converted to the second position or the second position to the first position (see FIGS. 74 to 76). The structure in which the guide projection 3421 is guided by the guide groove 3715 and the transmission rod 3420 is held at the first position or the second position is the same as the structure in the second embodiment (see FIGS. 41 to 47). ), The description is omitted. That is, the transmission rod 3420 and the guide groove 3715 are formed technically substantially the same as the transmission rod 2592 and the guide groove 2591b in the second embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74 to FIG. 76, a switching structure for switching the switching device 3600 to the rotatable state or the engaged fixed state by the depression operation of the operating element 3800 will be described. In the description of this switching structure, FIGS. 77 and 78 will be referred to as appropriate.

  74 and 75 are partial cross-sectional side views of the handle device 3051, and FIG. 74 shows the state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position and FIG. 75 shows the state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the second position. Be done. FIG. 76 is a partial cross-sectional side view of the handle device 3051 and illustrates a state in which the operating element 3800 is operated to be depressed downward and the transmission rod 3420 is disposed at an intermediate position.

  77 and 78 are partially enlarged perspective views of the rotary shaft 3700 and the switching device 3600. 77 (a) shows the state where the rotary shaft 3700 (manipulator 3800) is at the initial position θ0 and the switching device 3600 is in the rotatable state, and FIG. 77 (b) shows the rotary shaft. In FIG. 77 (c), the rotary shaft 3700 (manipulator 3800) shows a state in which 3700 (manipulator 3800) is rotated (slide operation) to the operation position θ1 and the switching device 3600 is in a rotatable state. Is rotated to the operation position θ1 (slide operation) and the switching device 3600 is changed to the engaged fixed state, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the rotation shaft portion 3700 (operation element 3800) is the operation position In FIG. 78 (b), the rotating shaft 3700 (the operating element 3800) is at the initial position θ0, in the range of θ0 to θ1 and the switching device 3600 is changed to the engaged fixed state, And cut The state example apparatus 3600 is changed to the engagement fixing state, are shown respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the switching device 3600 is inserted into the bearing portion 3535 of the upper base 3530 as described above, and the connecting shaft 2582 of the pushing member 3430 is in the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 3600. Relatively movable in the axial direction and relatively nonrotatable in the circumferential direction.

  In this embodiment, the connection shaft 2582 of the push-in member 3430 is inserted into the communication hole 620 of the switching device 3600 regardless of whether the transfer rod 3420 is disposed at the first position or the second position. (That is, the communication hole 620 and the connecting shaft 2582 are coupled so as not to be rotatable relative to each other). Therefore, even if the switching device 3600 is pivoted with respect to the bearing portion 3535, the rotational position (phase) of the push-in piece 2583 of the push-in member 3430 with respect to the clearance space 661 of the switching device 3600 can always be matched.

  Thus, regardless of the rotational position (phase) of the switching device 3600, the upward movement of the transmission rod 3420 associated with the depression operation of the operation member 3800 (ie, pushing by the transmission rod 3420) By pushing the member 3430 upward, the push piece 2583 of the push member 3430 can be reliably moved into the biting space 651 of the switching device 3600.

  That is, even in a state where the slide 3800 is operated to slide at any slide position, the switching device 3600 can be brought into the engaged and fixed state by pressing the slide 3800. Therefore, when the launch intensity of the gaming ball becomes a desired launch intensity by the slide operation of the operation element 3800, the change (setting) of the operation end point is maintained while maintaining the operation position (operation amount) of the slide operation. Can do. As a result, the change (setting) of the operation end point can be performed quickly and at an accurate position.

  As shown in FIG. 74, when the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position, the push-in piece 2583 of the push-in member 3430 is disposed in the relief space 661 of the switching device 3600. Therefore, in the switching device 3600, the biting balls 670a and 670b are disposed in the relief space 661 by the biasing force of the pushing side biasing spring 680, and thereby, the rotation can be performed relative to the bearing 3535. The movable state (see FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (c) or FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (c)) is set.

  As described above, in the state where the switching device 3600 is set to be rotatable (the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position), the switching device 3600 is rotatable with respect to the bearing portion 3535. As shown in FIG. 77 (a) and FIG. 77 (b), when the operating element 3800 (rotation shaft 3700) is rotated in the increasing direction from the initial position θ0 to the operation position θ1, the step surface of the rotation shaft 3700 The rotation of the switching device 3600 is interlocked with the rotation shaft portion 3700 by the rotation of the switching device 3600 by the rotation of the switching device 3600 while the 3711 c is pushed while pushing the restriction protrusion 3630 of the switching device 3600 in the increasing direction (the arrow direction in FIG. Let The operation position θ1 is an operation position not reaching the maximum position θmax of the slide operation range of the operation element 3800. The same applies to the following.

  On the other hand, when the operating element 3800 (rotation shaft portion 3700) is rotated in the decreasing direction, the switching device 3600 follows the rotation shaft portion 3700 by the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 3582 (see FIG. 69). And is rotated in the decreasing direction. For example, as shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b), the operating element 3800 (rotation shaft 3700) decreases from the operation position θ1 to the initial position θ0 (opposite to the arrow in FIG. 78 (b)). When the sliding operation (rotation) is performed, the switching device 3600 is also rotated in the decreasing direction by the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 3582, and the regulating projection 3630 abuts on the step surface 3711c of the rotating shaft 3700. Is placed at the pivot position.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 74, in the state where the switching device 3600 is set in the rotatable state (the state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position), the operating element 3800 moves in either the increasing or decreasing direction. Even when the slide operation is performed, the switching device 3600 is interlocked (synchronized) and rotated, and the rotational positions (phases) of the operation elements 3800 (rotation shaft portion 3700) and the switching device 3600 are matched ( 77 (a) and 77 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 75, in the state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the second position, the switching device 3600 is disposed in the biting space 651 of the biting balls 670a and 670b (ie, by the pushing pieces 2583 of the transmission rod 3420). The biting balls 670a and 670b are pushed into the biting space 651) and set in the engaged fixed state (see FIG. 15 (b) and FIG. 15 (d) or FIG. 40 (b) and FIG. 40 (d)). Ru.

  In a state where the switching device 3600 is set in the engaged and fixed state, the biting balls 670 a and 670 b face the inner circumferential surface of the bearing portion 3535 and the biting surface 650 by the biasing force of the biting side biasing spring 690. Because the switching device 3600 (main body 610) is in a rotational state (for example, FIG. 15 (d)), the switching device 3600 (main body portion 610) is in a rotating state. Even when trying to rotate in the direction B), the circumferential end of the biting surface 650 acts to further bite the biting balls 670a and 670b while facing the inner circumferential surface of the bearing portion 3535. The rotation of the switching device 3600 (main body portion 610) with respect to the bearing portion 3535 is restricted (blocked) (see FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (d) or FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (d)).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), when the operator 3800 (rotational shaft 3700) is turned to the operation position θ1, the position of the transmission rod 3420 is set to the first position by the depression operation of the operator 3800. By changing the position from the position to the second position, the switching device 3600 is set in the engagement fixed state, and as shown in FIG. 77C, the switching position of the switching device 3600 corresponds to the operation position θ1 (ie, The transmission rod 3420 in the first position can be fixed at the pivot position at the time when it is changed to the second position.

  Thus, when the switching device 3600 is set in the engagement fixed state and the rotation position is fixed, as shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b), the operating element 3800 (rotation shaft portion Even if the sliding operation (rotation) of 3700) is performed in the decreasing direction, the switching device 3600 is not interlocked (synchronized) with the rotation of the rotation shaft portion 3700, and is held at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1. That is, the position of the operation end point is changed (set) to the operation position θ1.

  Therefore, in this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), in the state where the switching device 3600 is held (fixed) at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1, the operating element returned to the initial position θ0 When the slide operation (rotation) of 3800 (rotation shaft portion 3700) is performed in the increasing direction, the operation position θ1 is taken as the operation end point of the rotation of the rotation shaft portion 3700. That is, as shown in FIG. 77 (c), when the slide operation in the increasing direction reaches the operation position θ1, the stepped surface 3711c of the rotation shaft 3700 is abutted against the control projection 3630, as shown in FIG. The slide operation in the further increasing direction (rotation of the rotary shaft 3700 in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 77C) is restricted.

  Here, the change (setting) to the second position of the transmission rod 3420 in the first position is performed as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 74, when the operating element 3800 is pushed downward (in the direction of the arrow G in FIG. 58B) from the state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position, as shown in FIG. The push-up member 3410 pushes the transmission rod 3420 upward. The transfer rod 3420 has its guide projection 3421 guided along the shape of the guide groove 3715, and abuts on a predetermined wall portion (guide restriction wall portion Wc, see FIG. 46) of the guide groove 3715. As a result, the downward pushing operation of the operation element 3800 can not be performed. Therefore, when the player loosens the operation force and the downward pushing operation of the operation element 3800 is released, the transmission rod 3420 is biased on the pushing side. The biasing force (elastic recovery force) of the spring 680 pushes back downward. As a result, the guide protrusion 3421 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 3715, and reaches the predetermined position (position P2, see FIG. 46) of the guide groove 3715. That is, as shown in FIG. 75, the transmission member 3420 is disposed at the second position.

  Similarly, changing (setting) the transmission rod 3420 in the second position to the first position is performed as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 75, when the operating element 3800 is pushed downward (in the direction of the arrow G in FIG. 58B) from the state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the second position, as shown in FIG. The push-up member 3410 pushes the transmission rod 3420 upward. The guide rod 3420 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 3715 and abuts on a predetermined wall (guide restriction wall Wg, see FIG. 46) of the guide groove 3715. As a result, the downward pushing operation of the operation element 3800 can not be performed. Therefore, when the player loosens the operation force and the downward pushing operation of the operation element 3800 is released, the transmission rod 3420 is biased on the pushing side. The biasing force (elastic recovery force) of the spring 680 pushes back downward. As a result, the guide protrusion 3421 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 3715, and reaches the predetermined position (position P1, see FIG. 46) of the guide groove 3715. That is, as shown in FIG. 74, the transmission member 3420 is disposed at the first position.

  In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), in a state in which the switching device 3600 is held (fixed) at the rotational position corresponding to the operation position θ1, the transmission rod 3420 described above is When the operation of arranging in the position is performed, the switching device 3600 is switched from the engaged fixed state to the rotatable state, and can be rotated with respect to the bearing portion 3535. Therefore, the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 3582 As a result, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the initial position (rotational position where the restriction projection 3630 is in contact with the step surface 3711c of the rotary shaft 3700) is returned.

  Alternatively, for example, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the switching device 3600 is held (fixed) at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1, and the operation element 3800 (rotation shaft 3700) is operated. In a state where the sliding operation (rotation) to the position θ1 is performed, when the above-described operation of arranging the transmission rod 3420 from the second position to the first position is performed, the switching device 3600 can rotate from the engaged fixed state 77B and can be turned with respect to the bearing portion 3535, so as to receive the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 3582, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the operating position θ1 (the regulation protrusion 3630 With the slide operation of the operation element 3800, the rotational position returned to be in contact with the step surface 3711c of the rotating shaft portion 3700 during the rotational movement is returned.

  Therefore, from this state, when the operating element 3800 (rotation shaft portion 3700) is slid (turned) in the increasing direction or decreasing direction, the switching device 3600 is also interlocked (synchronized) in response to the turning. Be done.

  As described above, according to the handle device 3051, the operation end point can be canceled even during the slide operation of the operation element 3800 (during playing the game ball), for example, to cancel the operation end point There is no need to temporarily return the operating element 3800 to the initial position. Therefore, when the position of the operation end point once set needs to be reset (for example, fine adjustment) to another position, the slide operation of the operation element 3800 is maintained (that is, the game is continued). , The reset operation can be performed quickly. Alternatively, for example, when it is necessary to hit the right, while maintaining the slide operation of the operation element 3800, it is possible to release the operation end point which restricted the slide operation in the increase direction of the operation element 3800. It is possible to quickly form a state in which the slide operation in the increasing direction of the child 3800 is possible. That is, it is possible to quickly switch to the slide operation operation of the operation element 3800 in the operation direction in which the launch strength of the gaming ball is maximized.

  In addition, an operation for switching the switching device 3600 from the engaged fixed state to the rotatable state (canceling the operation end point, that is, returning operation for returning the switching device 3600 to the initial position) and from the rotatable state to the engaged fixed state Both of the switching operation (the changing operation of changing (setting) the operation end point) are achieved by the depression operation of the operation element 3800. That is, this can be achieved by operating the same member in the same direction. This makes it easy to operate the change operation and the return operation. In particular, since the state by the change operation and the state by the return operation are alternately switched, it is effective to improve the operability that the two states can be switched by repeating the same operation. In addition, since the same member is operated in the same direction, the operation direction of the operating element 3800 required for the change operation and the return operation can be limited to one direction only, and accordingly, The structure can be simplified to reduce the product cost.

  Then, referring to FIGS. 79 and 80, using switching device 3600, the position of the operation end point is changed (set), and the position of the slide operation of operating element 3800 is adjusted based on the position of the operation end point. The adjustment method (return to the original slide operation position) will be described.

  79 and 80 are schematic views schematically illustrating the sliding operation of the handle device 3051. In each drawing, the left view is a front schematic view of the handle device 3051, and the right view is a control It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the relationship between the position of slide operation of 3800, and the operation end point. In FIGS. 79 and 80, the display of “[first position] or [second position]” means the position of the transmission rod 3420. Further, “initial position θ0” is the initial position in the direction of the slide operation of the operation element 3800, and “maximum position θmax” is the maximum position at which the operation end of the operation element 3800 can be operated in the state where the operation end point is not changed (set). It is. The “operation end point” is an end point of the slide operation of the operation element 3800 formed by the switching device 3600 being set in the engagement fixed state.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), since the switching device 3600 is in a rotatable state when the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position (FIG. 74, FIG. 15 (a) and FIG. 15 (c)), the manipulator 3800 can slide in a range from the initial position θ0 to the maximum position θmax.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 79A and 79B, as a result of adjusting the slide operation position of the operation element 3800 according to the game state, as shown in FIG. 79B, the operation element 3800 is When it is determined that the launch intensity of the gaming ball can be adjusted to a desired launch intensity by setting the operation position θ1, the player maintains the state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 6B, the transmission rod 3420 is set to the second position by depressing the operation element 3800 downward. Thereby, the switching device 3600 is set in the engagement fixed state (see FIGS. 75, 15 (b) and 15 (d)), and the operation end point is located at the position corresponding to the operation position θ1 of the operation element 3800. Changed (set)

  Thus, according to the handle device 3051, since the operation end point can be set, as shown in FIG. 80A, for example, the position of the slide operation of the operation element 3800 is returned to the initial position θ0 to take a break. Even if the game is interrupted, the original pivot position (ie, the pivot position at which the launch intensity of the gaming ball is adjusted to the desired launch intensity and the operation position .theta.1 before interrupting the gaming machine) It can be stored as an "operation end point".

  Therefore, when adjusting the position of the slide operation of the operation element 3800 to the position of the original slide operation (that is, the operation position θ1 before interrupting the game), the state of FIG. 79 (b) and FIG. 79 (c) is reproduced When the player slides the operation element 3800 to the operation end point (ie, the slide operation of the operation element 3800 is restricted by the operation end point, as shown in FIG. 80B), If the slide operation is performed until the slide operation can not be performed), the position of the slide operation of the operator 3800 can be quickly and easily adjusted to the original slide operation position (operation position θ1).

  For example, it is conceivable to provide a scale line on the handle mount 3500 along the movement trajectory of the operation element 3800 and slide the operation element 3800 with the scale line as the target position, as compared with such a method. It is not necessary to make a fine adjustment while visually determining whether the position of the slide operation of the operation element 3800 matches the target position (scale line), and it is possible to accurately adjust to the desired position of the slide operation. it can. Further, according to the present embodiment, the slide operation may be performed to the position where the slide operation can not be performed, and the target position can not be passed, so the operation speed of the operation element 3800 can be increased. The position of the slide operation can be adjusted quickly (return to the original slide operation position quickly).

  When the position of the operation end point is returned to the maximum position θmax, as described above, in the state shown in FIG. 80 (a) or FIG. 80 (b), the operating element 3800 is pushed downward to a position where it can be pushed downward. After the depression operation is performed, the transmission rod 3420 is returned to the first position by releasing the depression operation, and the position of the operation end point can be returned to the maximum position θmax as shown in FIG. 79 (a). it can.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  The pachinko machine 10 may be configured by combining or replacing part or all of the configuration of one of the above-described embodiments with part or all of the configuration of another embodiment.

  In the above embodiments, when the connecting holes 620 of the switching devices 600 to 3600 and the connecting shafts 575 and 2582 inserted into the connecting holes 620 have a trapezoidal cross-sectional shape, positioning in the rotational direction is possible. However, the cross-sectional shape of the connecting hole 620 and the connecting shafts 575 and 2582 may be another shape. As another shape, for example, a polygon having an unequal shape, a shape in which a key and a key groove are formed, and the like are exemplified.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is a coin, a medal, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

  In a gaming machine provided with an operating element operated by a player and in which the launch intensity of the gaming ball is adjusted in accordance with the operating amount of the operating element, the operating element is operable in the section from the initial position to the operation end point And the position of the operation end point is changeable.

  According to the gaming machine A1, it is possible to accurately and quickly adjust the operation amount of the operation element to a desired operation amount.

  Here, as a method of adjusting the operation amount of the operation element to a desired operation amount, for example, a method of providing a scale along the movement locus of the operation element, or reference to an arbitrary position along the movement locus of the operation element It is conceivable to make the piece fixable. According to these methods, the operation amount of the operation element is set by operating the operation element with the scale line or the reference piece as the target position (ie, matching the operation position of the operation element with the scale line or the reference element). It can be made easy to adjust to the desired operation amount.

  However, in the method described above, the accuracy of the adjustment of the operator depends on the skill of the player. That is, it is necessary to finely adjust the operating position of the operating element with respect to the target position while visually determining whether the operating position of the operating element matches the target position (scale line or reference piece) or not. Adjustment is difficult. Further, for example, if the operating speed of the operating element is increased, the target position may be passed. Therefore, the operating speed of the operating element needs to be reduced in the vicinity of the target position, which makes quick adjustment difficult.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the operator can be operated in the section from the initial position to the operation end point, and since the position of the operation end point can be changed, the desired operation amount (target position By changing (setting) the position of the operation end point to the position corresponding to), if the player operates the operating element until the operation end point (ie, the operation is restricted by the operation end point, further operation) The user can easily adjust the amount of operation of the operator to a desired amount of operation by operating the operator to a position where the operator can not perform the operation.

  Thus, for example, it is not necessary to finely adjust while visually determining whether the operation position of the operation element matches the target position, and it is possible to accurately adjust to a desired operation amount. In addition, since the target position is not passed, the operation speed of the operation element can be increased, and the desired operation amount can be quickly adjusted.

  More specifically, when the launch intensity of the gaming ball reaches a desired launch intensity as a result of adjusting the operation amount of the operator, the position corresponding to the state (the operator having the desired launch intensity is obtained Change (set) the position of the operation end point to the position corresponding to the operation amount of. Thereby, for example, even after the game is interrupted for a break and the operator is returned to the initial position, the player operates the operation only by operating the operator to the operation end point as described above. The operation amount of the child can be returned (adjusted) to the original operation amount (that is, the operation amount before interrupting the game), and such return operation can be performed accurately and quickly.

  A gaming machine A2 comprising operation end point changing means for changing the position of the operation end point at a position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation element in a state where the operation element is operated.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, in the state where the operation element is operated, the operation end point change to change (set) the position of the operation end point to a position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation element Since the means is provided, when the launch intensity of the gaming ball reaches a desired launch intensity, the position of the operation end point can be changed (set) while maintaining the operation amount of the operation element. Thereby, the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point can be performed quickly and can be performed at the correct position.

  In the gaming machine A2, the operating element is formed to be displaceable in a second direction different from the operating direction for adjusting the emission intensity of the gaming ball, and the operating end point changing means is configured to A game machine A3 characterized by changing the position of the operation end point to a position corresponding to the operation amount of the operating element by being operated in the direction of 2.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A2, the operation element is displaced in a second direction different from the operation direction for adjusting the launch intensity of the gaming ball, whereby the operation end point changing means Since the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point is performed, the change operation can be easily performed. That is, after the player operates the operating element to adjust the firing strength of the gaming ball to a desired firing strength, the player may then operate the operating element in the second direction from that state, and the operation end point changing means For example, there is no need to perform an operation of switching the operating element or an operation of operating another operating means with the opposite hand to the operation of operating the operating element. As a result, it is possible to easily perform an operation (changing operation) for changing the position of the operation end point by the operation end point changing means.

  The gaming machine A3 includes an attaching member disposed on the gaming machine main body, and a base member disposed displaceably with respect to the attaching member, and the operating element is capable of pivotally operating on the base member. While being arranged, the firing strength of the gaming ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the turning operation of the operation element, and the base member is displaced relative to the mounting member, thereby being displaced in the second direction. A game machine A4 characterized in that it is made possible.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the operating element is rotatably disposed on the base member which is displaceable with respect to the mounting member, and the operating element in the second direction. The displacement (that is, the operation for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point to a position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation element) is performed by displacing the base member with respect to the mounting member. The operation for changing (setting) the position (displacement in the second direction), while maintaining the operation amount of the turning operation of the operating element (that is, the operation amount of the turning operation is shifted, It can be easily performed while suppressing an accidental change in the emission intensity.

  That is, after the player adjusts the firing intensity of the gaming ball to a desired firing intensity by turning the operating element, the player may then perform an operation to displace the operating element in the second direction from that state. In order to change (set) the operation end point, there is no need to perform an operation to switch the operating element or an operation to operate another operating means with the opposite hand to the operation of the operating element. As a result, the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point can be performed quickly and can be performed at the correct position.

  In the gaming machine A4, the base member is pivotally supported by the mounting member, and is displaceable between a first position and a second position above the first position with respect to the pivotally supported portion. And the biasing force applied from the biasing means is biased to return to the second position, and the displacement of the operation element in the second direction is determined by the base member being attached to the attachment member. A game machine A5 characterized in that the direction from the second position toward the first position is against the urging force of the urging means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, the displacement from the second position to the first position is performed centering on the portion where the base member is pivotally supported by the mounting member. The operation in the second direction (operation direction different from the operation direction for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball) can be easily performed, for example, by an operation of bending the wrist. As a result, the operation (displacement in the second direction) for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point is maintained while maintaining the operation amount of the rotation operation of the operation element (that is, the operation amount of the rotation operation is It is possible to shift more easily while suppressing the accidental change of the launch intensity of the game ball. As a result, the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point can be performed quickly and can be performed at the correct position.

  In particular, since the biasing means is applied to the base member from the biasing means to return the displaced position to the second position, the operating element is displaced in the second direction (ie, the base member is used as the mounting member). After displacing (depressing) in the direction toward the first position about the pivotally supported portion, by releasing the downward pressing force, the second position is utilized using the biasing force of the biasing means. It can be returned to. As a result, the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

  On the other hand, the operation of displacing the operating element in the second direction (displacement of the base member against the biasing force of the biasing means (pushing down)) is performed using the weight of the finger or arm gripping the operating element Since it can be done, the operability can be improved. In addition, since the operation element is disposed at a relatively low position of the gaming machine main body, and the operation position is relatively low for the player, it is easier for the player to exert a force by an operation of displacing downward. Therefore, the operability can be improved also from this point.

  The gaming machine A3 includes an attaching member disposed on the gaming machine main body, and the operating element is disposed so as to be slideable with respect to the attaching element, and the game is carried out according to the operation amount of the sliding operation of the operating element A game machine A6 characterized in that the firing strength of the ball is adjusted.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the operating element is disposed on the mounting member so as to be able to slide. Therefore, when adjusting the operability of the operating element, that is, the firing intensity of the gaming ball The operability of the device can be improved. The operator is not limited to a shape that can be held by the player with his / her finger, and may have another shape. As another shape, for example, a dish-like shape in which the player can place the palm of the hand or the back of the hand is exemplified.

  In this case, as described above, the operating element is displaced in a second direction different from the operation direction of the slide operation for adjusting the firing intensity of the gaming ball, thereby changing the position of the operation end point (setting) Such setting operation can be easily performed. That is, after the player operates the operating element in the operating direction of the slide operation to adjust the firing intensity of the gaming ball to a desired emitting intensity, the player then displaces the operating element in the second direction from that state. In order to change (set) the position of the operation end point, it is necessary to perform the operation of switching the operating element or the operation of operating the other operation means with the opposite hand to the operation of the operating element. Absent. Therefore, the operation (displacement in the second direction) for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point is performed while maintaining the operation amount of the slide operation of the operation element (that is, the operation amount of the slide operation shifts), It can be easily performed while suppressing an accidental change in the emission intensity. As a result, the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point can be performed quickly and can be performed at the correct position.

  In the gaming machine A6, the operation element is pivotally supported by the mounting member, and is displaceable between a first position and a second position above the first position with respect to the pivotally supported portion. And the biasing force applied from the biasing means is biased to return to the second position, and the displacement of the operating element in the second direction is determined by the operating element being attached to the attachment member. A game machine A7 characterized by being directed from the second position to the first position against the biasing force of the biasing means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, the displacement from the second position to the first position is performed centering on the portion where the operating element is pivotally supported by the mounting member. The operation in the second direction (operation direction different from the operation direction for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball) can be easily performed, for example, by an operation of bending the wrist. As a result, the operation (displacement in the second direction) for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point is maintained while maintaining the operation amount of the slide operation of the operating element (that is, the operation amount of the slide operation deviates) ,) Can be performed more easily, while suppressing an accidental change in the launch intensity of the game ball. As a result, the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point can be performed quickly and can be performed at the correct position.

  In particular, since the urging means for applying the urging force to return the displacement position to the second position is applied to the operating element, the operating element is displaced in the second direction (that is, the operating element is attached to the mounting member After displacing (depressing) in the direction toward the first position about the pivotally supported portion, by releasing the downward pressing force, the second position is utilized using the biasing force of the biasing means. It can be returned to. As a result, the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

  On the other hand, the operation of displacing the operating element in the second direction (displacement of the operating element against the biasing force of the biasing means (pushing down)) is performed using the weight of the finger or arm gripping the operating element Since it can be done, the operability can be improved. In addition, since the operation element is disposed at a relatively low position of the gaming machine main body, and the operation position is relatively low for the player, it is easier for the player to exert a force by an operation of displacing downward. Therefore, the operability can be improved also from this point.

  One of the gaming machines A2 to A7 includes a button member pressed and operated by the player, and the operation end point changing means is a position corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating element by the button member being pushed and operated. A game machine A8, characterized in that the position of the operation end point is changed.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A7, the change operation of changing the position of the operation end point to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operating element by pressing the button member. Is performed by the operation end point changing means, the change operation can be performed separately from the operation of the operator. That is, the change operation can be performed while maintaining the operation amount of the operation element (that is, suppressing the careless change of the launch intensity of the game ball due to the operation amount change of the operation element). . The button member may be disposed on any of the operation element, the base member on which the operation element is disposed, or the attachment member on which the base member is disposed. In the case of being disposed on the operating element, the operation of the operating element and the operation of the button member can be more easily performed with only one hand. In the case of being disposed on the base member or the attachment member, it is possible to suppress the influence on the operation amount of the operating element due to the operation of the button member.

  The gaming machine A8 includes a hemispherical front cover, the operating element is formed so as to be able to rotate, the front cover is disposed on the front side of the operating element, and a button member is provided on the top of the front cover A game machine A9 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, the hemispherical front cover is disposed on the front side of the operator, and the button member is disposed on the top of the front cover. The button member can be easily pushed in with the palm using the action of returning the wrist while maintaining the state of gripping with the finger. Therefore, when the operation amount of the turning operation of the operating element is adjusted to the operation amount at which the firing strength of the gaming ball becomes the desired firing strength, the operating amount of the turning operation of the operating element is maintained (that is, The operation amount of the rotation operation is shifted, and the button member can be pressed and operated while suppressing the careless change of the launch strength of the gaming ball. As a result, the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point can be performed quickly and can be performed at the correct position.

  In the gaming machine A9, the front cover is provided with an opening formed at the top to expose the button member, and the button member is pushed in by the player to be positioned at a position corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating element. In the state in which the position of the operation end point is changed, at least a part of the button member is projected from the edge of the opening of the front cover.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, when pressing the button member to change the position of the operation end point to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operating element, the button member There is no need to push it to a position beyond the edge of the opening of the front cover (the position where the entire button member is inserted into the front cover). That is, when the button member is pushed, it is possible to suppress the edge portion of the opening of the front cover from being obstructed, and to improve the operability.

  In the gaming machine A9 or A10, the front cover includes an opening formed at the top to expose the button member, and the button member is positioned at a position corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating element. And the button member is pushed to the third push-in position so that at least the operation end point can be returned to the maximum position by pushing the button member to the third push-in position. And the button member is sunk into the front cover more than the edge of the opening of the front cover in the third push-in position. According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 8 or 9, the button member is pushed from the second pushing position to the third pushing position to make the position of the operation end point returnable to the maximum position. It is necessary to push such a button member to a position where it is inserted beyond the edge of the opening of the front cover (the position where the entire button member is inserted into the front cover). Therefore, when the button member is pushed to the third push-in position, the edge of the opening of the front cover can be obstructed, so the button member in the second push-in position inadvertently reaches the third push-in position It is possible to suppress the pressing operation. As a result, the end point position which has been changed (set) to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operating element is inadvertently returned to the initial position by the pressing operation of the button member carelessly (or can be restored) ) Can be suppressed.

  A gaming machine characterized by comprising operation end point return means for returning the position of the operation end point changed to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operating element by the operation end point changing means to the maximum position in the game machines A2 to A11. Machine A12.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A11, an operation for returning the position of the operation end point changed to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation by the operation end point changing means to the maximum position Since the end point return means is provided, the operation end point return means can be used to return the position of the operation end point to the maximum position. That is, the operation element can be operated to an operation position where the game ball can be fired with a predetermined maximum firing intensity.

  In the game machine A12, the operation end point return means is capable of returning the position of the operation end point to the maximum position in a state where the operation element is operated.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A12, the operation end point return means can return the position of the operation end point to the maximum position while the operation element is operated. In order to return the position of the end point to the maximum position, there is no need to temporarily return the operating element operated to a predetermined operation amount to the initial position. Therefore, for example, when it becomes necessary to reset the position of the operation end point to another position, the resetting operation can be performed quickly. Alternatively, for example, when it is necessary to hit the right, the position of the operation end point is released (that is, returned to the maximum position), and the operation of the operation element in the operation direction to maximize the firing intensity of the gaming ball Can be done quickly.

  In the gaming machine A13, the operation element is formed displaceable in a third direction different from the operation direction for adjusting the emission intensity of the game ball, and the operation end point return means is the operation element is the second operation A game machine A14 characterized in that the position of the operation end point is returned to the maximum position by being operated in the direction of 3.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A13, the operation element is displaced in a second direction different from the operation direction for adjusting the launch intensity of the gaming ball, whereby the operation end point return means Since the return to the maximum position of the position of the operation end point is performed, such return operation can be easily performed while continuing the game (that is, while launching the gaming balls at a desired firing intensity). That is, the player may operate the operating element in the third direction from that state in a state where the operating strength of the gaming ball is adjusted to a desired emitting strength by operating the operating element, and the operation end point return means In order to perform the return to the maximum position, for example, there is no need to perform an operation of switching the operating element or an operation of operating another operating means with a hand opposite to a hand operating the operating element. As a result, it is possible to easily perform an operation (return operation) for returning the position of the operation end point to the maximum position by the operation end point return means while continuing the game.

  In the gaming machine A14, the operation element is formed to be displaceable in a second direction different from the operation direction for adjusting the emission intensity of the game ball, and the operation end point changing means is configured such that the operation element is the second operation The position of the operation end point is changed to a position corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation element by being operated in the direction of 2, and the second direction and the third direction are the same direction. A game machine A15 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A14, the second direction and the third direction are made the same direction, and the position of the operation end point is changed to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operator. Since the change operation and the return operation for returning the position of the operation end point changed by the change operation to the maximum position can be performed by the same operation, the change operation and the return operation can be easily performed. That is, since the state by the change operation and the state by the return operation are alternately switched, it is effective to improve the operability that the two states can be switched by repeating the same operation. In addition, by making the second direction and the third direction the same direction, it is possible to reduce the operable direction of the operating element, so the structure is simplified and the product cost is reduced accordingly. Can be

  The gaming machine A12 or A13 includes a button member pressed and operated by the player, and the operation end point return means returns the position of the operation end point to the maximum position when the button member is pushed and operated. A game machine A16 to feature.

  According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A12 or A13, the operation of returning the position of the operation end point to the maximum position is performed by the operation end point return means by pressing the button member. Such return operation can be performed separately from the operation of the operator. That is, such return operation can be performed while maintaining the operation amount of the operating element (that is, suppressing the inadvertent change of the firing intensity of the gaming ball due to the operation amount of the operating element shifting). .

  In the gaming machine A16, the change of the position of the operation end point by the operation end point changing means and the return to the maximum position of the position of the operation end point by the operation end point return means are alternately performed by pressing the button member. A game machine A17 characterized by being executable.

  According to the gaming machine A17, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A16, the change of the position of the operation end point by the operation end point changing means and the return of the position of the operation end point to the maximum position by the operation end point return means Since the execution can be alternately performed by the pressing operation, the operation of the change operation and the return operation can be easily performed. That is, since the state by the change operation and the state by the return operation are alternately switched, it is effective to improve operability that the two states can be switched by repeatedly operating the button member 1. Become. Also, since one button member can be used in this way, the number of parts can be reduced and the structure can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  A game machine A18 according to any one of the game machines A1 to A17, wherein the game machine A18 is formed such that the player can distinguish whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position.

  According to the gaming machine A18, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A17, the player can identify whether or not the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position. It is possible to suppress the situation where the player plays a game without knowing that the adjustment range of is restricted, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

  That is, in the configuration in which the position of the operation end point can be changed when the operator is operable in the section from the initial position to the operation end point, the player is aware that the position of the operation end point is changed. If you are playing without knowing, you will play in the condition that the adjustment range of the launch intensity of the gaming ball is restricted, that is, you can not launch the game sphere with the maximum launch intensity set in advance. As a result, the player may suffer disadvantages.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A18, since the player can distinguish whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position (ie, It is possible to suppress the player from playing the game without noticing that the adjustment range of the launch intensity of the game ball is restricted), making it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

  The gaming machine A18 includes a button member pressed and operated by the player, and the position of the operation end point can be changed from the maximum position by pressing the button member, and the position of the operation end point is maximized. In the state changed from the position, compared with the state in which the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position, the push-in position of the button member is different.

  According to the gaming machine A19, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A18, the position of the operation end point can be changed from the maximum position by pressing the button member, and the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position Since the push-in position of the button member is different compared to the state where the position of the operation end is at the maximum position, it is played whether the position of the operation end is changed from the maximum position based on the difference of the push-in positions of the button member. Can be identified by As a result, the player can be prevented from playing a game without noticing that the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, and it is difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine A19, the operation member (button member) operated to change the position of the operation end point from the maximum position is for identifying whether the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position. Since it is also used as an identification member, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and to reduce the product cost.

  The gaming machine A19 includes a wall portion disposed on the outer peripheral surface side of the button member, and an opening formed in the wall portion so that at least a part of the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visible. In a state in which the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, the form of an object to be viewed through the opening is different from that in the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position. A20.

  According to the gaming machine A20, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A19, in the state where the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, compared with the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position Since the form of the target to be played is different, it is possible to easily and reliably identify to the player whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position based on the difference in the form of the visually recognized target.

  That is, in the configuration in which the determination of whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position based on the difference between the push-in positions of the button members, the judgment criterion is the difference in the degree of push-in. Difficult to distinguish.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A20, since the form of the object visually recognized through the opening is different, the determination criterion can be binarized, and the two states can be easily distinguished clearly. This allows the player to easily and reliably identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, and as a result, it is possible to play without knowing that the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position. It is possible to suppress the player from playing the game and make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

  It should be noted that, for example, in the two states where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position and the state where the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, one of the states is different. In the state, only the outer peripheral surface of the button member is viewed through the opening, and in the other state, only the members other than the outer peripheral surface of the button member are viewed through the opening (that is, the button member It is binarized as to whether or not the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized, and a configuration to distinguish based on these two values is exemplified.

  Second, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, but the color of the outer peripheral surface of the visually recognized button member is different in one state and the other state (that is, And B) binarized by the color (for example, white and black) of the button member visually recognized through the opening, and the configuration to be distinguished based on the two values is exemplified.

  Third, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is viewed, but the area (proportion occupied in the opening) of the outer peripheral surface of the viewed button member is the one state and the other The configuration that differs depending on the state (that is, the configuration in which the area of the button member (the area occupied by the outer peripheral surface of the button member in the opening) viewed through the opening is binarized and distinguished based on these two values) is illustrated Be done.

  Fourth, in the one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, but the outer peripheral surface of the visually recognized button member is drawn in the opening in the one state and the other state A different configuration (i.e., a configuration in which the outer peripheral surface of the button member is binarized by the shape drawn in the opening and distinguished based on these binary values) is exemplified.

  Fifth, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, and the area of the outer peripheral surface of the visually recognized button member and the shape drawn by the outer peripheral surface of the button member are the same. The position of the outer peripheral surface in the visible opening is different in one state and the other state (that is, it is binarized by the position of the outer peripheral surface of the button member in the opening and distinguished based on these binary values Configuration) is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A18, the operation end point is located at the first position when it is at the maximum position, and when the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, it is located at the second position. A game machine A21 comprising a member.

  According to the gaming machine A21, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A18, the interlocking member is disposed at the first position when the operation end position is at the maximum position, and the operation end position is changed from the maximum position In the second state, the player can easily and reliably identify whether the operation end position has been changed from the maximum position based on the difference in the arrangement of the interlocking members. . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage by preventing the player from playing the game without noticing that the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position.

  In the gaming machine A21, the interlocking member is formed so as to be operable by the player, and the interlocking member arranged at the second position is operated to be arranged at the first position, whereby the position of the operation end point Is returned to the maximum position. A game machine A22.

  In the gaming machine A21 or A22, the interlocking member is formed so as to be operable by the player, and the interlocking member disposed at the first position is operated to be disposed at the second position, so that the operator A game machine A23 characterized in that the position of the operation end point is changed to a position corresponding to the amount of operation of the game machine A23.

  According to the gaming machine A22, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A21, the interlocking member is formed so as to be operable, and the interlocking member disposed at the second position is operated to be disposed at the first position. The position of the end point can be returned to the maximum position. That is, the operation element can be operated to an operation position where the game ball can be fired with a predetermined maximum firing intensity. Further, according to the gaming machine A23, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A21 or A22, the interlocking member is formed to be operable, and the interlocking member disposed at the first position is operated to be disposed at the second position. Thus, the position of the operation end point can be changed to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation element.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine A22 or the gaming machine A23, the identification member (interlocking member) for identifying whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position returns the position of the operation end point to the maximum position Since it is also used as an operation member operated to change the position of the operation end point, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Also, as described above, according to the gaming machine A22, the return operation for returning the position of the operation end point to the maximum value is interlocking disposed at the second position indicating the state where the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position. This is achieved by performing an operation of disposing the member to the first position indicating the state where the position of the operation end is at the maximum position, so that the player is made to operate while intuitively recognizing that it is the return operation. As a result, careless operation can be suppressed.

  Similarly, according to the gaming machine A23, the change operation for changing the position of the operation end point to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation element is arranged to the first position indicating the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position. This is achieved by performing the operation of arranging the interlocking member at the second position indicating the state where the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, so the player can intuitively recognize that it is a change operation. It is possible to operate while making it possible, and as a result, it is possible to suppress careless erroneous operation.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operation element is displaced in the second direction, whereby the position of the operation end point is changed by the operation end point changing means, and the slide operation of the operation element can be regulated. A game machine A24 characterized in that it is formed.

  According to the gaming machine A24, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operation element is displaced in the second direction, whereby the change by the operation end point changing means is performed and the slide operation of the operation element is restricted. Since it can be formed, when changing (setting) the position of the operation end point by the operation end point changing means, the restriction of the change (displacement) of the position of the slide operation of the operating element may also be performed. it can. Therefore, it is possible to accurately change (set) the position of the operation end point to the intended position while suppressing the change (displacement) of the position of the slide operation of the operation element from the intended predetermined position.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element is formed in a rod shape that can be gripped by a player.

  According to the gaming machine A25, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element is formed in a rod shape that can be gripped by the player, so that such operating element can be held easily. It is possible to improve the operability when operating the operator in a predetermined direction (for example, the direction of the slide operation or the second direction).

  In the gaming machine A25, the operation element is a main body portion supported by the mounting member so that one side is slidably displaceable, and a holding portion which is erected upward from the other side of the main body portion and held by the player And a game machine A26 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine A26, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A25, since the held portion held by the player is erected upward from the other side of the main body in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A25, the held portion Can be held (held) by the player in a natural posture, and the slide operation and the operation in the second direction can be easily operated. In particular, since the held portion is erected from the other side of the main body portion, when gripping the held portion, the outer edge portion of the palm of the hand can be placed on the main body portion to reduce fatigue. While performing the operation in the second direction (pressing-down operation), the weight of the hand can be applied to the main body, and the operation can be facilitated.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element includes a placement surface formed in a shape in which a player can place a part of a hand.

  According to the gaming machine A27, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element is provided with a placement surface formed in such a shape that the player can place a part of the hand. Even the player who can not grip the player can slide the controller using the mounting surface of the controller. That is, it is difficult for a player who can not grip the operation part to play a game in a conventional gaming machine that adjusts the firing intensity of the gaming ball by rotating the rotation handle, and slides the operating element as in the present invention. An operation portion can not be gripped by adopting a structure that is configured to be operable and adjusts the launch intensity of the gaming ball according to the amount of slide operation of the operation element, and by forming the mounting surface on the operation element It is for the first time possible for the player to play a game.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element is slide operated in a direction in which the operating element is inclined downward from the initial position to the operation end point.

  According to the gaming machine A28, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element is slide operated in the direction to be inclined downward from the initial position to the operation end point, so the operation amount of such slide operation is increased It is possible to easily perform an operation in a direction to cause (i.e., an operation to increase the launch strength of the game ball) using the weight of the hand. In addition, when sliding the operating element to the operation end point and maintaining the firing intensity of the gaming ball constant, the weight of the hand is used to counter the biasing force that tries to return the operating element to the initial position. Since it is possible, the player's fatigue can be reduced. The above configuration is particularly effective when the player performs a slide operation using the placement surface of the operation element as in the gaming machine A27 (that is, when the player can not grip the held portion). .

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element is slide operated in a direction in which the operating element is inclined upward from the initial position toward the operation end point.

  According to the gaming machine A29, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element is slide operated in the direction of being inclined upward from the initial position to the operating end point. By hanging, it is possible to eliminate the act of trying to keep the firing intensity of the game ball constant.

  That is, in the structure in which the operating element is formed so as to be slideable and the firing intensity of the gaming ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the sliding operation of the operating element, the operation is performed if the direction of the sliding operation is inclined horizontally or downward By hanging a shopping bag, for example, on the child, even if the player releases his hand from the operating element, it is possible to maintain the operating element at the operation end point by using the weight of the shopping bag, and fair game is possible. It is disturbed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A29, since the direction of the slide operation of the operating element is inclined upward, the player holds the operating element by hand when, for example, a shopping bag is hung on the operating element. Unless it is, the weight of the shopping bag can return the operating element to the initial position. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the operation element is maintained at the operation end point in a state in which the player has released the hand, and secure fair game.

  A gaming machine B1 according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A29, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine B2 according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A29, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  A gaming machine B3 according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A29, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
51, 2051, 3051 Handle device (operation device)
520, 2520 Handle mounting base (mounting member)
530 Handle base (base member)
540, 2051 Handle ring (operator)
550 front cover 550a opening 550b, 554b opening 570 button member 577 inner fitting wall (wall)
600, 2600, 3600 Switching device (part of operation end point changing means)
3800 manipulator 3880 springing direction biasing spring (biasing means)
3810 Main body 3830 Holding part SP Base biasing spring (biasing means)
θ0 initial position

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one in which a handle rotation portion is rotatably attached to a handle base, and the firing strength of a ball is adjusted according to the amount of rotation operation of the handle rotation portion. In addition, when the desired firing strength is obtained by the turning operation of the handle turning portion, the turning strength of the handle turning portion is fixed to reduce the player's fatigue while maintaining the firing strength. Have a structure that

JP 2012-005759 A

  A biasing force by a biasing spring is applied to the operating element (handle rotating portion), and when the player releases the hand, the operating position of the operating element is returned to the initial position. Therefore, for example, when the game is interrupted, it is difficult to adjust the operation position of the operating element to the original operation position before interrupting the game.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which can easily adjust the operating position of the operating element to the original operating position.

Gaming machine of claim 1, wherein in order to achieve the object, provided with the the operator operated by a player, which radiation strength of game balls is adjusted in accordance with the operation amount of the operating element, the game The button member pressed and operated by the person, the wall portion disposed on the outer peripheral surface side of the button member, and the opening formed in the wall portion so that at least a part of the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visible When provided with, together with the operator is operable in a section from the initial position to the operation end point, the button member that is pushed, the position of the operation end point is changeable, the operation When the position of the end point is changed from the maximum position, the color of the outer peripheral surface of the button member visually recognized through the opening is different as compared with the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position .

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, it is possible to easily adjust the operation amount of the operating element to the original operation amount.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a top view of a handle device, (b) is a front view of a handle device. It is a side view of the handle device in the arrow VI direction view of Drawing 5 (a). It is a front perspective view of handle attachment stand and handle base. It is a rear perspective view of a handle ring. (A) is a rear perspective view of a front cover, (b) is a front view of a guide groove. (A) is a top view of the front cover in the arrow Xa direction view of Fig.9 (a), (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of the front cover in the Xa-Xa line of Fig.10 (a). It is a rear perspective view of a tongue member. It is a disassembled perspective view of the button member which illustrates the connection structure of a handle shaft supporting body and a shaft. (A) is a front view of a switching apparatus, (b) is a side view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XIIIb direction view of Fig.13 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the switching apparatus in the XIVb-XIVb line | wire of FIG. 13 (a), (b) is a side view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XIVb direction view of FIG. 13 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a switching apparatus, (c) is a front view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XVc direction view of Fig.15 (a), (d) is FIG. ) Of the switching device in the direction of the arrow XVd). It is a rear perspective view of a handle base. It is a perspective view in the disassembled state of a handle attachment stand. (A) is a perspective view in the assembled state of a handle mount, (b) is an inner side view of a 1st main body. FIG. 5 is a rear perspective view of a handle mount and a handle base. It is a front perspective view of a handle base in the state where a handle control member was attached. It is a front perspective view of a handle base in the state where a handle control member was removed. (A) And (b) is a perspective view of a steering wheel control member. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle device in the state before displacement operation. It is a partial cross-section side view of a handle device in the state after being displaced. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle device. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle device. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle device. It is a front schematic diagram of the handle device which illustrated the handle ring and the switching device typically. It is a front schematic diagram of the handle device which illustrated the handle ring and the switching device typically. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates the state of rotation operation of a handle device typically. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates the state of rotation operation of a handle device typically. (A) And (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of a handle apparatus. (A) is a top view of the handle device in a 2nd embodiment, (b) is a front view of a handle device. It is a side view of the handle device in the arrow XXXII direction view of FIG. 33 (a). It is a front perspective view of handle attachment stand and handle base. It is a rear perspective view of a handle ring. It is a rear perspective view of a front cover. (A) is a front view of the switching device, (b) is a side view of the switching device in the direction of the arrow XXXVIb in FIG. 38 (a), and (c) is an arrow XXXVIc in FIG. 38 (a). It is a rear view of the switching device in direction view. (A) is sectional drawing of the switching apparatus in the XXXVIIa-XXXVIIa line | wire of FIG. 38 (a), (b) is a side view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XXXVIIb direction view of FIG. 38 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of a switching apparatus, (c) is a rear view of the switching apparatus in the arrow XXXVIIIc direction view of FIG. 40 (a), (d) is FIG. ) Of the switching device in the direction of the arrow XXXVIIId. (A) is a front view of the push-in member, (b) is a side view of the push-in member in the arrow XLIb direction view of FIG. 41 (a), (c) is an XLIc- of FIG. 41 (a) It is sectional drawing of the pushing member in a XLIc line. (A) is a front view of a switch member, (b) is a side view of the switch member in the direction of the arrow XLIIb of FIG. 42 (a), and (c) is an XLII c- of FIG. 42 (a). It is sectional drawing of the switch member in a XLIIc line | wire. (A) is a front view of a base body, (b) is sectional drawing of the base body in the XLIIIb-XLIIIb line | wire of FIG. 43 (a). (A) is a side view of a transfer rod, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the transfer rod taken along line XLIVb-XLIVb of FIG. It is the plane development view which developed and illustrated the inner skin of the penetration hole of a base object on a plane. FIG. 46 is a partially enlarged development view of a guide groove in which a region XLVI in FIG. 45 is partially enlarged and illustrated. (A) to (c) are side views of a switch member. It is a rear perspective view in the disassembled state of a handle base, a handle attachment stand, and a linear-motion conversion member. FIG. 31 is a rear perspective view of the handle base 530, the handle mount 2520, and the linear motion conversion member 2800 in an assembled state. It is a rear perspective view in the assembled state of a handle base, a handle attachment stand, and a linear motion conversion member. It is a perspective view in the disassembled state of a handle attachment stand. (A) is a perspective view in the assembled state of a handle attachment stand, (b) is an inner side view of a 1st main body. (A) is a side view of the linear motion conversion member in the arrow LIIa direction view of FIG. 48, (b) is a front view of the linear movement conversion member in the arrow LIIb direction view of FIG. 52 (a), 52 (c) is a side view of the linear motion conversion member in the arrow LIIc direction view of FIG. 52 (b). It is a partial cross section side view of a handle device. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle device. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle device. (A) is a partial enlarged side view of a handle device, (b) is a partial enlarged top view of a handle device. (A) is a partial enlarged side view of a handle device, (b) is a partial enlarged top view of a handle device. (A) is a top view of the handle device in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a side view of the handle device in the arrow LVIIIb direction view of Fig.58 (a). It is sectional drawing of the handle apparatus in the LVIX-LVIX line | wire of FIG. 58 (a). (A) is a side view of the lower base, (b) is a top view of the lower base as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXb in FIG. 60 (a), and (c) is in FIG. 60 (b) It is sectional drawing of the lower side base in a LXc-LXc line. (A) is a side view of the intermediate base, (b) is a top view of the intermediate base in the arrow LXIb direction view of FIG. 61 (a), and (c) is LXIc- of FIG. 61 (b). It is sectional drawing of the intermediate | middle base in a LXIc line. (A) is a side view of the upper base, (b) is a bottom view of the upper base in the direction of arrow LXIIb in FIG. 62 (a), and (c) is LXII c- in FIG. 62 (b). It is sectional drawing of the upper side base in a LXIIc line. (A) is a front view of the sealing member, (b) is a bottom view of the sealing member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIIIb in FIG. 63 (a), and (c) is in FIG. 63 (a) It is sectional drawing of the sealing member in a LXIIIc-LXIIIc line | wire. (A) And (b) is a partial cross section side view of a rotating shaft part and an operation element. (A) is a side view of the rotation shaft, (b) is a rear view of the rotation shaft in the direction of arrow LXVb in FIG. 65 (a), (c) is a partial cross-sectional rear view of the push-up member FIG. FIG. 65 (a) is a top view of the rotary shaft portion in the direction of arrow LXVIa of FIG. 65 (a); FIG. 66 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the rotary shaft portion taken along line LXIVb-LXVIb of FIG. (A) is a side view of the operating element, and (b) is a top view of the operating element in the direction of the arrow LXVIb of FIG. 67 (a). (A) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the manipulator at line LXVIIIa-LXVIIIa in FIG. 67 (b), and (b) is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the manipulator at line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. 67 (b) is there. It is a partial expanded sectional view of a handle device. (A) is a top view of the switching device, (b) is a side view of the switching device in the arrow LXXb direction view of FIG. 70 (a), (c) is an arrow LXXc of FIG. 70 (b) It is a bottom view of the switching device in direction view. FIG. 70 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the switching device along the line LXXIa-LXXIa in FIG. 70 (a), and FIG. 70 (b) is a side view of the switching device as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIb in FIG. (A) is a front view of the push-in member, (b) is a side view of the push-in member in the arrow LXXIIb direction view of FIG. 72 (a), (c) is LXXIIc- of FIG. 72 (a) It is sectional drawing of the pushing-in member in a LXXIIc line. (A) is a side view of a transmission stick, (b) is a top view of the transmission stick in the arrow LXXIIIb direction view of Drawing 73 (a). It is a partial cross section side view of a handle device. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle device. It is a partial cross section side view of a handle device. It is a partially expanded perspective view of a rotating shaft part and a switching device. It is a partially expanded perspective view of a rotating shaft part and a switching device. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates the state of slide operation of a handle device typically. It is a schematic diagram which illustrates the state of slide operation of a handle device typically.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, referring to the drawings from FIG. 1, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is an open / close shaft. The lower tray unit 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the effect of super reach. Ru.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing the balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape whose upper surface is opened at the central portion thereof There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball emission unit 112a, an emission stop switch 51b for stopping emission of the ball during the pressing operation, and rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like for detecting the amount of movement operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (ballistic strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls, a windmill, and rails 61, 62, The general winning opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the first through gate 67, the second through gate 670, the variable display unit 80 And the like, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The general winning opening 63, the first entrance 64, the second entrance 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, and the variable display unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is disposed in the through hole and fixed by a wood screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a winning opening etc. is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  Two first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are disposed on the upper right side of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display device 37A is provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Aa as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Ab. Similarly, the other first symbol display device 37B is also provided with a plurality of LEDs 37Ba as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37Bb.

  The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control device 110, and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, these first symbol display devices 37A, 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. ing. Specifically, when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while when the ball wins the second ball entrance 640, The first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  Each of the plurality of LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba indicates whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady state or not or in a short time or in a normal state by a lighted state, or indicates by a lighted state whether or not it is fluctuating. It indicates whether the symbol corresponding to the jackpot or the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot or the outlier symbol is displayed by the lighting state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighting state. Each of the 7-segment display devices 37Ab and 37Bb displays the number of rounds in a big hit and an error display. In addition, LED37Aa and 37Ba are comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, and may suggest the various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are entered. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The LEDs 37Aa and 37Ba not only show whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit, a symbol according to the big hit type is shown.

  Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. Also, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds transitions to a low probability state after jackpots of 15 rounds and for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) becomes a short time state. is there.

  Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 by increasing the hitting probability of the second symbol described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, ie, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second entry ball opening It refers to the state of the game where it is easy for the ball to enter 640. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is normally medium is the state of the game which is neither a definite change nor a time reduction (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is increased).

  During a definite change or during a short time, not only is the probability of hitting the second symbol up, but also the time for which the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is open is changed, which is longer than normal. Is set. When the motorized part 640a is in the open state (opened state), the ball enters the second entrance 640 compared to the case where the motorized part 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to ball. Therefore, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 during definite change or time, and it is possible to increase the number of times the jackpot lottery is performed.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the motorized symbol 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time during a definite change or during a short time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened more than during normal operation. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during definite changes or during a short time, and the electric symbol 640a is open during the time and one hit when the electric symbol 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during definite period of time or during a short time, the time when the motorized symbol 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is opened or the number of times the motorized symbol 640a is opened at one time is not the second symbol Only the hit probability may be changed to be increased relative to the normal.

  In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display unit 80 is triggered by the ball entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 (start winning) as a trigger while being synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. 3 The third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display of symbols, and the passage of the spheres of the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 trigger the third A second symbol display device 83 configured of an LED that variably displays two symbols is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large liquid crystal display of 8-inch size, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. While the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment displays the gaming state in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) by the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol display thereof A decorative display is performed according to the display of the device 37. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

  The second symbol display device 83 takes a predetermined time for the symbol “o” and the symbol “x” as a display symbol (second symbol) every time the ball passes the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670. It is a variable display that lights up alternately. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, in the second symbol display device 83, after the variation display of the second symbol, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, in the second symbol display device 83, the symbol “x” is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the motorized role object 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a predetermined time.

  The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities for the motorized role 640 a of the second entrance 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 during definite variation and during time saving.

  In addition, the second ball exit 640 during positive or negative time by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting, increasing the opening time and opening frequency of the motorized symbol 640a per hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to enter the ball, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized role product 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The first through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the left side of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the game board on the left side is configured to be passable. ing. Further, the second through gate 670 is assembled to the game board on the right of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired to the game board, a part of the ball flowing down the right of the game board can pass through It is configured. When the ball passes the first through gate 67 or the second through gate 670, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed by the second symbol display device 83, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out If there is, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

  The number of times the ball passes through the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol hold lamp Also in 84, it is lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The second symbol display device 37 and the third symbol other than the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment. It may be performed using a part of the display device 81. Similarly, lighting of the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the balls of the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670 is not limited to four times, and may be three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times) It may be set to Further, since the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be configured not to perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 through which a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64, the first entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) makes a lottery for a big hit, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37Aa of the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the right side in a front view of the variable display unit 80, a second entrance port 640 where a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the second entrance 640, the second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second entrance switch is turned on. The main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) makes a lottery for a big hit, and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37Ba of the first symbol display device 37B.

  Further, each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the winning openings through which five balls are paid out as a winning ball when the ball is hit. In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are the same. The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 are different numbers, for example, The number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 is three, and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball is ball entering the second entrance 640 is five. May be

  The second ball entrance 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The motorized accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the motorized accessory 640a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the first through gate 67 and the second through gate 670, The motorized role object 640 a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to enter the second ball entry port 640.

  As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that in the normal condition, and the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is short as compared to the normal, and therefore, in the variable display of the second symbol The symbol of “” becomes easy to be displayed, and the number of times that the motorized role piece 640 a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during definite period of time and short time, the time when the motorized accessory 640a is opened is also longer than usual. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second ball entry port 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation and time.

  Here, in the case where the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the case where the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the probability of becoming a big hit is in the low probability state or the high probability state It is the same. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of jackpot is that the ball entered the first entrance 64 in the case where the ball entered the second entrance 640 It is set higher than the case. On the other hand, the first ball entry port 64 does not have a motorized part like the second ball entry port 640, and the ball can enter the ball at all times.

  Therefore, during the normal operation, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to enter the second entrance 640, so the first entrance without the electric accessory is entered. Aim the ball 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 toward the mouth 64 (so-called "left-handed"), and entering the first entrance 64 has many chances for a big hit lottery It is advantageous for the player to obtain and aim to be a big hit.

  On the other hand, during the definite change or time, the motorized accessory attached to the second entrance 640 is likely to be in the open state and the second entrance 640 is likely to enter the ball, so to the second entrance 640 Direct the ball so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and entering the second entrance 640 aims to become a 15R positive variation hit jackpot Is advantageous to the player.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment emits a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the process of being changed, time is short, or is normal). You can change the way of “right-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because it can change the way of hitting the ball.

  Below the first ball entrance 64, a first variable winning device 65 is disposed, and at a substantially central portion thereof, a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 becomes the jackpot, after the predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the first stop symbol for the jackpot is selected. The LED 37Aa of the symbol display device 37A is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the special winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  Further, a second variable winning device 650 is disposed below the second entry port 640, and a horizontally-long rectangular specified winning opening (large opening) 650a is provided substantially at the center of the second variable winning device 650. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 becomes a jackpot, after the predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the first stop pattern of the jackpot While making LED37Ba of the symbol display device 37B light, the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the big hit is shown. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the specific winning opening 650a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

  Each of the specific winning openings 65a and 650a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning openings 65a and 650a are opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a, 650a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are on the front side with the horizontally long rectangular opening and closing plate covering the specified winning opening 65a or the specified winning opening 650a, and the lower side of the opening and closing plate as an axis. It has all the large open mouth solenoids (not shown) for opening and closing drive. The specific winning opening 65a, 650a is normally in a closed state where the ball can not win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large open port solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball is easy to win in the specified winning port 65a. Operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. The special winning opening 65a, 650a is provided with a large opening opening which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, 650a in the game area, and the LED 37Aa, LED37Ba corresponding to the big hit in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is lit. It is opened for a predetermined time, and while the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is open, a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a, 650a is triggered by the ball winning in the specific winning opening 65a, 650a. A game state opened for a predetermined number of times may be formed as a special game state for a time.

  In the left and right corners of the lower side of the game board 13, adhesive spaces K1 and K2 for attaching a certificate, an identification label and the like are provided, and the certificate paper and the like affixed to the adhesive space K1 is a front frame 14 Can be viewed through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball which has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, 650a is guided to the ball discharge path (not shown) through the out port 66. A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

  In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

  The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are accommodated in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The substrate boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the respective substrates.

  In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if it is attempted to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100 or 102, or if the substrate box 100 or 102 is to be opened forcibly, the box base side and the box cover It is cut to the side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

  Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

  Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, the emission control device 112 is provided with the operation knob 121 of the variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with the RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the jackpot lottery, the setting of the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the lottery of the display result in the second symbol display device 83 Run.

  Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specified winning opening 65a, 650a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing drive to the front side with the axis as an axis and a solenoid for driving a motorized product etc. is connected, and the MPU 201 receives various commands for these through the input / output port 205. Send control signal.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown) and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply 115, and the MPU 201 is outputted from the various switches 208. Various processings are executed based on the control signal and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. . The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 and the like performed by the display control device 114 such as display (display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach It instructs the display control device 114 to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the sound lamp control device 113 outputs a sound corresponding to the display content from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display effect variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226 by outputting the voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by the display command. be able to.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, the detailed configuration of the handle device 51 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 32.

  5 (a) is a top view of the handle device 51, and FIG. 5 (b) is a front view of the handle device 51. As shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is a side view of the handle device 51 as viewed in the direction of arrow VI in FIG. 5 (a). In FIG. 5A and FIG. 6, the front surface of the lower tray unit 15 is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the handle device 51 mainly includes a handle mount 520, a handle base 530, a handle ring 540, a front cover 550, and a button member 570, and the pachinko machine 10 It projects horizontally from the front of FIG.

  The handle mount 520 has its rear surface (left side in FIG. 5A) fixed to the front surface of the lower tray unit 15, and the handle base 530 is disposed on the front surface of the handle mount 520 (right side in FIG. 5A). Ru. The two members 520 and 530 are connected such that one of them is pivotally supported by the other, and the handle base 530 is integrated with the handle ring 540 with respect to the handle mount 520 with the pivotally supported portion as a center. , And vertically displaceable (see FIGS. 23 and 24 (21)).

  A launch stop switch operating unit 440 is provided on the handle base 530. The firing stop switch operation unit 440 is a lever for switching on / off of the firing stop switch 51b (see FIG. 7) provided inside the handle base 530, and is a left side surface of the handle base 530 (FIG. 5 (b)). It is disposed in a state of protruding from the left side). The player can stop the firing of the game ball regardless of the amount of turning operation (turning position) of the handle ring 540 while pressing the release stop switch operation unit 440.

  The handle ring 540 is rotatably attached to the front surface (right side in FIG. 5A) of the handle base 530, and on the outer peripheral side of the handle ring 540, three finger hooks 540a and 540b for the player to hang a finger on , 540c are formed to protrude.

  The player turns the handle ring 540 in a clockwise (clockwise) direction (that is, from the initial position toward the operation end point (maximum position)) in a front view of the handle device 51 (see FIG. 5B). It is possible to increase the launch strength of the gaming ball by moving operation. That is, the handle ring 540 can be rotated in the section from the initial position to the operation end point, and the firing strength of the gaming ball is adjusted in accordance with the operation amount (rotation position) of the rotation operation.

  In this case, the handle device 51 is formed so that the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 540 can be changed. Specifically, in this embodiment, the central angle (rotational operation angle of the handle ring 540) from the initial position to the maximum position is 120 degrees, and the position of the operation end point is changed within the central angle of 120 degrees. (Setting) is possible.

  For example, when the position of the operation end point is changed (set) to a position where the central angle with the initial position is 90 degrees (that is, the position where the central angle with the maximum position is 30 degrees) When the handle ring 540 is pivoted in the direction from the initial position toward the operation end point, in the section from the initial position to the central angle of 90 degrees, the pivoting operation can be performed as usual, but between the initial position When the central angle of 90 ° reaches the position (ie, the operation end point), the pivoting operation of the handle ring 540 is restricted (ie, no further pivoting operation of the handle ring 540 is possible).

  Note that, as described above, the firing strength of the gaming ball is set in accordance with the resistance value of the variable resistor (that is, the amount of turning operation of the handle ring 540). That is, the firing intensity of the gaming ball is determined based on the operation amount (operation position) by which the handle ring 540 is rotated from the initial position regardless of whether the position of the operation end point is changed (set). Therefore, when the position of the operation end point is not changed, and the rotation operation of the handle ring 540 is possible to a position where the central angle with the initial position is 120 degrees (ie, the maximum position), such a steering ring The firing intensity of the gaming ball when the 540 is rotated from the initial position to the position at a central angle of 90 degrees is such that the central angle between the operation end position and the initial position is 90 degrees as described above. When the position is changed (set), the firing intensity of the game ball is the same as that of the gaming ball when the handle ring 540 is operated to rotate from the initial position to the 90 ° center position (that is, the operation end point). .

  When the player's turning operation is released, the turning position of the handle ring 540 is returned to the initial position by the biasing force of the handle biasing spring 537 (see FIG. 7). In this case, according to the handle ring 540, the pivot position of the handle ring 540 can be arbitrarily set by displacing the handle base 530 with respect to the pivotally supported portion with respect to the handle mount 520 (see FIG. 23). It is comprised so that fixation is possible at a rotation position. That is, the firing strength of the ball can be fixed at an arbitrary strength. The fixing structure of the handle ring 540 will be described later.

  The front cover 550 is formed in a hemispherical shape that is convex toward the front (in FIG. 5A and the right direction in FIG. 6), and is attached to the front of the handle ring 540. At the top of the front cover 550, a circular opening 550a in a front view is formed, and the button member 570 is projected (exposed) from the opening 550a.

  Further, a confirmation window 550b is formed in the front cover 550 so as to be open. The confirmation window 550b is an opening for the player to confirm whether or not the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 540 has been changed (see FIG. 32), and the upper surface side of the handle device 51 (see FIG. 5A). On the outer peripheral surface of the front cover 550 which is the front side), a plurality (three in the present embodiment) is disposed along the circumferential direction with a predetermined interval.

  Whether or not the player has changed the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 540 based on the state (the difference in the color visually recognized as described later in this embodiment) visually recognized through the confirmation window 550b. (In this embodiment, as described later, the position of the operation end point is not changed when black is visually recognized, and the position of the operation end point is changed when white is visually recognized) Can. The identification structure using the confirmation window 550b will be described later.

  The button member 570 is formed in a hemispherical shape concentric with the front cover 550, and in the initial position shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. While being formed, when pushed in, it is sunk into the inside of the front cover 550 (see FIG. 26). Here, the button member 570 is an operation member for changing (setting) and canceling the position of the operation end point.

  Specifically, when the button member 570 is pushed in from the initial position, the position of the operation end point is changed (set) to the operation position of the handle ring 540 at the time when the button member 570 is pushed in. . For example, in a state in which the turning operation of the handle ring 540 is enabled in a section at a central angle of 120 degrees from the initial position to the maximum position (that is, the position of the operation end point is not changed) When the button member 570 is pushed in from the initial position when movement operation is performed and the operation amount of the rotation operation reaches a position where the central angle is 90 degrees from the initial position, the central angle with the initial position is The position of the operation end point is changed (set) to a position of 90 degrees.

  Therefore, the player is in the pivot position where the launch intensity of the gaming ball is the desired launch intensity (e.g., the pivot position at the time of the left hitting suitable for causing the game ball to enter the first ball entrance 64). When the turning position of the handle ring 540 can be adjusted, the pressing operation of the button member 570 is performed, and the position of the operation end point is changed (set) to a position corresponding to the turning position of the handle ring 540, For example, in order to take a break, even if the pivoting position of the handle ring 540 is returned to the initial position and the game is interrupted, the pivot position of the handle ring 540 is the original pivot position (that is, the game is suspended) In the case of adjusting to the rotation position before turning and adjusting to the above-mentioned rotation position suitable for left hitting), if the handle ring 540 is turned to the operation end point (that is, the rotation operation is Regulated, more times If the handle ring 540 is turned to a position where the operation can not be performed), the operation amount (rotation position) of the rotation operation of the handle ring 540 is accurately and quickly adjusted to the original operation amount (rotation position) (The original rotational position can be reproduced accurately and quickly).

  For example, as in the case of a structure in which a scale is provided along the direction of the turning operation of the handle ring 540, it is visually checked whether the operation position of the handle ring 540 matches the target position (predetermined scale line). Since it is not necessary to make fine adjustments while determining, it is possible to accurately and quickly adjust to the original operation position (reproduce the original operation position). In addition, since the further turning operation is restricted by the operation end point, the turning operation of the handle ring 540 is not performed past the target position, so the operating speed of the handle ring 540 can be increased. Also from this point, it is possible to quickly adjust to the original operation position (reproduce the original operation position).

  According to the handle device 51, the hemispherical front cover 550 is thus disposed on the front side of the handle ring 540, and the button member 570 protrudes from the opening 550a on the top side of the front cover. Since one hemisphere is formed, the button member 570 can be easily pushed in with the palm using the operation of returning the wrist while keeping the handle ring 540 held by the fingers. it can. Therefore, when the pivot position (operation amount) of the handle ring 540 can be adjusted so that the launch intensity of the gaming ball becomes a desired launch intensity, the pivot position (operation amount) of the handle ring 540 is maintained. The button member 570 can be pressed and operated (that is, while the turning position of the handle ring 540 is shifted and the firing intensity of the gaming ball is suppressed from being inadvertently changed). As a result, the change (setting) of the operation end point can be performed quickly and at an accurate position.

  Release of the change (setting) of the operation end point can be performed by returning the pressed button member 570 to the initial position as shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, whereby the handle ring 540 is moved to the maximum position. It becomes possible to rotate. The return structure of the button member 570 to the initial position and the release structure of the operation end point will be described later.

  The handle base 530 will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the handle mounting base 520 and the handle base 530, corresponding to the front perspective view of the handle device 51 with the handle ring 540 and the front cover 550 (both shown in FIGS. 5 and 6) removed. Do.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the handle base 530 has an outer peripheral wall 531 formed in a cylindrical shape with a circular front view, and a bottom wall 532 closing an opening of one of the outer peripheral wall 531 (rear surface, rear left side in FIG. 7). And by these two members 531, 532, the inside is formed in the shape of a container which is recessed to the back side (that is, the front side is opened). On the bottom wall 532, guide columns 533 a, 533 b and 533 c, an inner circumferential wall 534 and a bearing portion 535 are erected from the front of the bottom wall 532 toward the front (front cover 550 side).

  The guide support posts 533a to 533c are portions where the front cover 550 (see FIGS. 5 and 6) is fastened and fixed to the erected tip thereof, and a fastening screw can be inserted therein (ie, the bottom wall 532 side and the erected tip It is formed in a hollow cylindrical shape in which a through hole having an opening at both ends is formed. The fastening screws inserted from the bottom wall 532 side into the through holes of the guide columns 533a to 533c are fastened to the screw pedestals 552a to 552c (see FIG. 9A) of the front cover 550, respectively. The front cover 550 is fixed to the front.

  The inner peripheral wall 534 is formed in a cylindrical shape circular in a front view, and is concentrically disposed on the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral wall 531 with a predetermined distance from the outer peripheral wall 531. The inner circumferential wall 534 is divided at two places in the circumferential direction, and at the two divided parts (notched parts 534a and 534b), the firing stop switch operating part 440 is at one side and the handle limiting member is at the other side. 700 are disposed respectively.

  The bearing portion 535 is formed in a tubular shape having an opening on the front side (the side opposite to the bottom wall 532), and the switching device 600 is rotatably inserted on the inner peripheral side (see FIG. 25). The switching device 600 is a member for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 540, and a rotatable state capable of relative rotation of the switching device 600 with respect to the bearing 535 and a relative rotation impossible. It is possible to switch between two states, ie, the fixed fixed state. The end face on the opening side of the bearing portion 535 is formed as a flat surface perpendicular to the axial direction.

  In the switching device 600, a control protrusion 630 is formed. The restricting protrusion 630 is a rod-like member that protrudes radially outward, and is located on the movement locus of the handle side protrusion 546 (see FIG. 8) when the handle ring 540 is turned. Therefore, when the handle ring 540 is turned in the turning direction (clockwise in the front view (clockwise direction), hereinafter referred to as "increasing direction") to increase the launch strength of the gaming ball, the handle projection 546 is turned. It abuts on the control protrusion 630.

  In this case, when the switching device 600 is in the rotatable state, the control protrusion 630 is pushed in the increasing direction by the handle side protrusion 546, so that the switching device 600 also increases in the bearing portion 535. It is pivoted to On the other hand, when the state of the switching device 600 is switched to the engaged fixed state, relative rotation with respect to the bearing portion 535 of the switching device 600 is disabled (fixed to the bearing portion 535). The movement of the 546 in the increasing direction is restricted by the restriction protrusion 630. Thus, the turning operation of the handle ring 540 in the increasing direction is restricted. That is, the position (rotational position) at which the state of the switching device 600 is switched from the rotatable state to the engaged fixed state is the position at which the handle ring 540 is operated.

  In addition, it is the rotation direction of the handle ring 540, and the rotation direction which reduces the launch strength of the gaming ball is hereinafter referred to as the "decrease direction".

  A biasing force in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front is applied to the switching device 600 from a switching device biasing spring 539 formed as a torsion spring, and the biasing force exerts an initial position (the restricting protrusion 630 , And is returned to the position where the rotation of the switching device 600 is restricted) by being abutted on the handle side protrusion 546 of the handle ring 540 in the initial position.

  The detailed configuration of the switching device 600 and the engagement / fixing structure for the bearing 535 will be described later. Further, switching between the rotatable state and the regulated and fixed state of the switching device 600 is performed by a pressing operation of the button member 570, as described later.

  A driven gear 536 is disposed on the side of the bearing 535. The driven gear 536 is a gear engaged with the main moving gear 544 (see FIG. 8) of the handle ring 540, and is fixed to the resistance axis VRa of the variable resistor (not shown). Therefore, when the driven gear 536 is rotated, the resistance value of the variable resistor VR is changed according to the amount of rotation (rotational position).

  A biasing force in a clockwise direction (clockwise direction) in a front view is applied to the driven gear 536 from a handle biasing spring 537 formed as a torsion spring, and the biasing force exerts an initial position (the stopper portion 536a is a bearing portion 535). Is abutted against the outer circumferential protrusion 535b, and returned to the position where the rotation is regulated. The variable resistor is fixed to the bottom wall 532.

  A firing stop switch 51 b is fixed to the side of the bearing 535 and on the opposite side of the driven gear 536. A swingable swinging piece 51b1 is projected to the side of the firing stop switch 51b, and the firing stop switch 51b is turned on and off by pressing the swinging piece 51b1 by the firing stop switch operation unit 440. Be done.

  The handle ring 540 will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a rear perspective view of the handle ring 540.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the handle ring 540 is directed from the outer peripheral edge portion of the disc portion 541 toward the back side from a disc portion 541 formed in a circular disc shape in a front view circular shape covering the front surface of the handle base 530. And an outer peripheral wall 542 which is formed in a cylindrical shape having a circular front view, and a main moving gear 544 fixed in a posture projecting toward the back to the center of the disc portion 541, its main moving gear 544 and a circle A central hole 544a formed by penetrating the central portion of the plate portion 541 in the plate thickness direction, and a guide hole 545a formed by penetrating the disc portion 541 along the periphery of the central hole 544a, 545 b, and a handle-side protrusion 546 erected from the disc portion 542 toward the back side.

  The handle ring 540 is rotatably held on the handle base 530 by inserting the handle shaft support 574 (see FIG. 11A) of the button member 570 into the central hole 544a of the handle ring 540 (see FIG. In this case, the main driving gear 544 is meshed with the driven gear 536 (see FIG. 7) of the handle base 530. Therefore, when the handle ring 540 is operated to rotate, the driven gear 536 is rotated via the main driving gear 544, and the rotation of the resistance shaft VRa by the rotation of the driven gear 536 changes the resistance of the variable resistor. Therefore, the firing strength of the ball can be adjusted according to the resistance value of the variable resistor (ie, the amount of turning operation of the handle ring 540).

  In the present embodiment, the axial directions of the bearing 535 and the resistance axis VRa are parallel to each other, and the teeth (tooth grooves) of the driven gear 536 extend parallel to the axial direction (see FIG. 7). ). Further, the teeth (tooth grooves) of the main driving gear 544 extend in parallel with the axial direction of the central hole 544a of the handle ring 540.

  The guide holes 545a and 545b are holes that are opened for inserting the guide columns 533a to 533c (see FIG. 7), and are elongated holes shaped along the outer edge of the handle ring 540 (ie, central holes 544a). The ring shape centering on the axis is formed in a shape divided at two points different in phase by 180 °. The guide support post 533a is inserted into the guide hole 545a, and the guide support posts 533b and 533c are inserted into the guide hole 545b.

  Therefore, the guide support 533a and the guide support 533b and 533c are guided in the guide hole 545a and the guide hole 545b, respectively, as the handle ring 540 rotates. Therefore, the pivotable range of the handle ring 540 is limited to the range in which the guide columns 533a to 533c can move relatively in the guide holes 545a and 545b. Specifically, the pivoting range of the handle ring 540 is defined by the guide holes 545b through which the two columns (guide columns 533b and 533c) are inserted, and the pivoting range is approximately 90 degrees in the present embodiment. / 4 laps).

  The handle side protrusion 546 is a portion for transmitting the rotation of the handle ring 540 to the switching device 600, and is formed as a rod-like body having a rectangular cross section. When the handle ring 540 is pivoted, the side surface of the handle side protrusion 546 is in contact with the side surface of the restricting protrusion 630 of the switching device 600, and the handle ring 540 is interposed between the two protrusions 546 and 630. Rotation is transmitted to the switching device 600.

  Next, the front cover 550 will be described with reference to FIG. 9 (a). FIG. 9A is a rear perspective view of the front cover 550. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, the front cover 550 is formed in the shape of a hemispherical container in which the inside is recessed to the front side (that is, the back side is opened), and the top is a circular hole in a front view. While a certain opening 550a is formed, screw pedestals 552a to 552c are erected on the inner wall surface toward the back surface. Guide columns 533a to 533c (see FIG. 7) are fastened and fixed to the screw pedestals 552a to 552c, respectively. Further, on the inner wall surface of the front cover 550, a cylindrical tubular guide portion 554 having the same inner diameter as the opening 550a is extended along the rotational axis direction. The cylindrical guide portion 554 guides the inner fitting wall portion 577 of the button member 570 along the rotational axis direction by the inner peripheral surface thereof.

  Confirmation windows 550 b and 554 b are respectively formed in the front cover 550 and the cylindrical guide portion 554. Here, these confirmation windows 550b and 554b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 (a) is a top view of the front cover 550 in the direction of arrow Xa in FIG. 9 (a), and FIG. 10 (b) is a portion of the front cover 550 at line Xa-Xa in FIG. It is an expanded sectional view.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b), the confirmation window 550b formed in the front cover 550 is composed of a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) rectangular openings in a front view, each of which is an opening Are disposed on a straight line along the longitudinal direction along the circumferential direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 10A) of the front cover 550. The confirmation window 554b disposed in the cylindrical guide portion 554 is an opening formed in the same shape as the confirmation window 550b formed in the front cover 550, and as shown in FIG. It is disposed at the facing position. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the outer wall surface of the button member 570 through the confirmation window 554b of the cylindrical guide portion 554 by visually recognizing the inside through the confirmation window 550b of the front cover 550 (see FIG. 32). ).

  As described above, the confirmation windows 550b and 554b are openings for confirming whether the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 540 has been changed based on the state of being visually recognized through the confirmation window 550b. is there. In this case, the confirmation windows 550b and 554b are disposed on the upper surface side of the front cover 550 in the assembled state of the handle device 51 (see FIG. 5A), so the player facing the pachinko machine 10 to play When starting the game, the player can easily visually recognize the confirmation windows 550b and 554b. Further, since a plurality of confirmation windows 550b and 554b are disposed along the circumferential direction, even when the player is at a position shifted from the front of the handle device 51 to the left and right, such confirmation windows 550b and 554b can be used as the player. Can be clearly identified.

  Referring back to FIG. 9A, the description will be made. Between the front cover 550 and the handle ring 540, a handle biasing spring (not shown) formed as a torsion spring is disposed. The handle biasing spring biases the handle ring 540 counterclockwise in a front view. This biasing direction coincides with the biasing direction in which the handle biasing spring 537 (see FIG. 7) for biasing the driven gear 536 described above biases the handle ring 540 via the driven gear 536 and the main driving gear 544. Do. Therefore, when the player releases the handle ring 540, the handle ring 540 is a handle biasing spring (not shown) disposed between the front cover 550 and the handle ring 540, and a handle that biases the driven gear 536. The biasing force of the two springs with the biasing spring 536 returns to the initial position.

  A base portion 551 is disposed on an inner wall surface of the front cover 550, and a guide groove 553 is recessed on a flat surface of the base portion 551. The guide groove 553 is a groove in a well-known "heart cam system" for causing the button member 570 to function as a push button switch that can be held at two positions, the first position or the second position. The guide groove 553 will be described later (see FIG. 9B).

  Next, the button member 570 will be described. FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the button member 570, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the button member 570 illustrating the connection structure between the handle shaft support 574 and the shaft 573.

  As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the button member 570 includes an operation portion 571 forming the front surface of the button member 570, a back surface base 572 protruding from the center of the back surface of the operation portion 571 and a back surface base 572 thereof. A shaft 573 extended, a handle shaft support 574 rotatably attached to the extended end of the shaft 573 and formed in a cylindrical shape, and an end surface of the handle shaft support 574 A connecting shaft 575 and a push-in piece 576, a cylindrical inner fitting wall 577 protruding from the back of the operation portion 571, and a guide pin piece 578 arranged on the outer surface of the back base 572; The operation portion 571, the back surface base 572, the shaft 573, the handle shaft support 574, the connecting shaft 575, and the inner fitting wall 577 are concentrically arranged.

  The operation unit 571 is formed in a shape obtained by cutting a part of a sphere, and protrudes from the opening 550a (see FIG. 9A) of the front cover 550, thereby enabling a player to operate a pressed spherical operated portion. (See FIGS. 25-27).

  The back surface base 572 is a portion that forms a bearing surface of the button biasing spring 590 (see FIGS. 25 to 27). That is, the button biasing spring 590 is formed as a coil spring, and between the front side of the handle ring 540 and the back side of the back base 572 while inserting the shaft 573 and the handle shaft support 574 on the inner peripheral side. In an axially compressed state. Thus, the button member 570 is always biased in the direction away from the handle ring 540 by the elastic recovery force of the button biasing spring 590.

  The shaft 573 includes a shaft-like portion 573a having a circular cross section, and a spherical portion 573b disposed at the tip of the shaft-like portion 573a and having a spherical shape larger in diameter than the shaft-like portion 573a. . The operation portion 571 is integrally formed with the base portion 572, the shaft 573, and the inner fitting wall portion 577 from a resin material.

  The handle shaft support 574 is a cylindrical portion for pivotally supporting the handle ring 540, and is inserted into the central hole 544a of the handle ring 540 (see FIGS. 25 to 27). That is, the outer diameter of the handle shaft support 574 is set to a size slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the central hole 544a of the handle ring 540, and the handle shaft support 574 is inserted into the central hole 544a. Handle ring 540 is pivotally supported by handle shaft support 574.

  In addition, the handle shaft supporting body 574 is formed by bonding two members formed by dividing a cylindrical shape into two in a plane including an axis. In these two members, a ball receiving portion 574b serving as a space for receiving the spherical portion 573b of the shaft 573 and a bearing receiving portion 574a for receiving the shaft-like portion 573a of the shaft 573 and a space in which the spherical portion 573b can not pass. And are formed. Thus, the handle shaft support 574 is mounted on the shaft 573 so as to be rotatable about its axis and immovable in the axial direction.

  Thereby, as described later, when the switching device 600 is rotated with the turning operation of the handle ring 540, only the handle shaft support 574 can be rotated independently from the shaft 573. It is possible to suppress the rotation of the operation unit 571 which is the operated portion. That is, when the player rotates the handle ring 540, it is possible to prevent the operation portion 571 from rotating in the palm of the player's hand and giving the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  The connection shaft 575 is a portion formed as a shaft having a trapezoidal cross section which is inserted into the connection hole 620 of the switching device 600 (see FIGS. 25 to 27), and is extended on the shaft of the handle shaft support 574 (Ie, formed concentrically with the handle shaft support 574). The connection hole 620 of the switching device 600 is formed as a hole having a trapezoidal cross section corresponding to the outer shape of the connection shaft 575, whereby the connection shaft 575 is axially relative to the connection hole 620 of the switching device 600. It is coupled so as to be movable and relatively unrotatable in the circumferential direction.

  Further, in addition to the fact that the connecting shaft 575 and the connecting hole 620 can be connected so as not to allow relative rotation by forming the connecting shaft 575 as a shaft body having a trapezoidal cross section, positioning of both rotating direction positions (phases) It can be done (the two can regulate the phase that can be combined at only one place). That is, in the assembly process of the handle device 51, after the rotational direction position of the push-in piece 576 is made to coincide with the relief space 661 of the switching device 600, the connecting shaft 575 and the connecting hole 620 need to be connected. In this embodiment, the rotational direction position (phase) of the connecting shaft 575 and the connecting hole 620 is positioned at one position, so that the rotational direction position is wrong (pushing piece 576 (see FIG. 25 to FIG. 27). It is possible to avoid coupling in such a state that the rotational direction position of the light source does not coincide with the relief space 661 of the switching device 600. As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the assembly operation and to suppress the assembly failure.

  The pushing piece 576 is a portion for pushing the biting balls 670a and 670b of the switching device 600 into the biting space 651 (see FIGS. 15 and 26), and the side of the connecting shaft 575 of the handle shaft support 574. It is formed in a plate shape extending along the axis and having a cross-sectional shape (that is, a shape which can be inserted into the biting space 651) corresponding to the biting space 651 of the switching device 600. As a result, when the button member 570 is pushed in, the extended tip end face of the pushing piece 576 bites the bit balls 670 a and 670 b into the bit space 651.

  The connecting shaft 575 and the push-in piece 576 are integrally formed on the handle shaft support 574. Further, as described above, in the button member 570, the connecting shaft 575 is coupled to the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 600 so as not to be relatively rotatable. Therefore, since the handle shaft support 574 and the switching device 600 are integrally rotated through the connection of the connecting shaft 575 and the connecting hole 620, the phase of the push-in piece 576 and the relief space 661 is always matched. Can maintain the That is, even when the switching device 600 is turned to any rotational position (phase) with respect to the handle base 530 (bearing portion 535), when the button member 570 is pushed in, the pushing operation is performed. The pieces 576 allow the pinching balls 670 a, 670 b of the switching device 600 to be pushed into the pinching space 651.

  The inner fitting wall portion 577 is a cylindrical portion for holding the button member 570 so as to be movable relative to the front cover 550 in the axial direction, and is inserted into the cylindrical guide portion 554 of the front cover 550 (see FIG. 25 to 27). That is, the outer diameter of the inner fitting wall 577 is set to a size slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical guide 554 of the front cover 550, and the inner fitting wall 577 is inserted into the cylindrical guide 554. As a result, the button member 570 is rotatably (axially) supported by the front cover 550 so as to be rotatable and axially movable.

  Thus, as described above, the button shaft 570 is held by the bearing 535 of the handle base 530 via the switching device 600 (ie, the coupling of the joint shaft 575 and the coupling hole 620) as described above. The inner fitting wall 577 is held by the cylindrical guide 554 of the front cover 550. That is, since the button member 570 is held at two positions axially separated from the handle base 530 and the front cover 550, which are fixed systems, the button member 570 can be held in a stable state without rattling. As a result, smooth push operation can be achieved.

  Here, the outer peripheral surface of the inner fitting wall portion 577 is formed in a color different from the outer peripheral surface of the operation portion 571. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the outer peripheral surface of the inner fitting wall portion 577 is formed in black, while the outer peripheral surface of the operation portion 571 is formed in white. Therefore, while the button member 570 is in the first position (initial position), the player is allowed to visually recognize the outer peripheral surface (black) of the inner fitting wall portion 577 via the confirmation window 550b of the front cover 550 (FIG. a) Refer to allowing the player to visually recognize the outer peripheral surface (white) of the operation unit 571 via the confirmation window 550b of the front cover 550 when the button member 570 is in the second position (the position where the push operation is performed). (See FIG. 32 (b)). Thereby, the player can determine whether the button member 570 is disposed at the first position or the second position based on the difference in color viewed through the confirmation window 550b (ie, the handle ring 540). Whether or not the position of the operation end point of (1) has been changed can be easily identified.

  The guide pin piece 578 is a member guided by the guide groove 553 (see FIGS. 9A and 9B) formed in the base portion 551 of the front cover 550, and has a bar-like shape in cross section made of a metal material. It is formed by bending the body. The guide pin piece 578 has a proximal end portion rotatably embedded in the rear surface base 572 and a main body portion extending from the proximal end portion in the axial direction of the button member 570 (that is, the direction of the pushing operation). The distal end portion of the main body portion is bent by 90 degrees outward in the radial direction of the button member 570, and the distal end portion is in contact with the guide groove 553 at an angle of 90 degrees.

  When the button member 570 is pushed in, as described above, the guide pin piece 578 moves the guide groove 553 (see FIGS. 9A and 9B), whereby the pushed-in position of the button member 570 is changed. It is switched to the first position or the second position. Here, referring back to FIG. 9B, the structure in which the button member 570 is held at the first position or the second position by the guide pin piece 578 being guided by the guide groove 553 will be described.

  FIG. 9 (b) is a front view of the guide groove 553. 9B, the right side in FIG. 9B corresponds to the operation portion 571 side of the button member 570, and the left side in FIG. 9B corresponds to the handle ring 540 side.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, the guide groove 553 is a recessed groove for guiding the guide pin piece 578 (see FIG. 11) of the button member 570, and is formed as a circumferential path having a heart shape in a front view. At the same time, a plurality of steps are formed with directivity in the path.

  By moving (guided) the guide pin piece 578 along the guide groove 553, the button member 570 is held at either the first position or the second position (see FIGS. 25 and 26). Further, in the process of returning from the second position to the first position, the button member 570 is held at the third position only while being held in the state of being pushed in by the player (see FIG. 27).

  Specifically, with the guide pin piece 578 positioned at the position P1, the button member 570 is positioned at the first position. In this state, the guide pin piece 578 is a biasing force of the button biasing spring 590 (see FIGS. 25 to 27) (a direction in which the button member 570 is separated from the handle ring 540 as described above (FIG. Force) is pressed against the wall portion 553a of the guide groove 553 and maintained at the position P1.

  When the button member 570 at the first position is pushed in, the guide pin piece 578 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 553 (path L1) and passes over the end 553b of the first step, and then the wall portion 553c Hit the As a result, the pushing operation of the button member 570 can not be performed. Thus, the player releases the button member 570 and the operation force in the pushing direction is released.

  Thus, the guide pin piece 578 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 553 by the biasing force of the button biasing spring 590 (path L2), and after crossing over the end 553d of the second step, the wall portion 553e By hitting, it is positioned at position P2. In this case, the guide pin piece 578 is maintained at the position P2 by being pressed against the wall portion 553e of the guide groove 553 by the biasing force of the button biasing spring 590. As a result, the button member 570 is set (held) at the second position.

  When the button member 570 at the second position is pushed in, the guide pin piece 578 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 553 (path L3), and after crossing over the end 553f of the third step, the wall portion 553g Hit the (position P3). As a result, the pushing operation of the button member 570 can not be performed. Thus, the player releases the button member 570 and the operation force in the pushing direction is released.

  Thereby, the guide pin piece 578 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 553 by the biasing force of the button biasing spring 590 (path L4), and after crossing over the end 553h of the fourth step, the wall portion 553a By hitting, it is positioned at the position P1. In this case, the guide pin piece 578 is maintained at the position P1 by being pressed against the wall portion 553a of the guide groove 553 by the biasing force of the button biasing spring 590. As a result, the button member 570 is set (held) at the first position. That is, the button member 570 is returned to the first position as the guide pin piece 578 makes one turn around the guide groove 553 (heart-shaped circumferential path).

  The button member 570 in the second position is pushed in, the guide pin piece 578 abuts against the wall portion 553g, and the state in the position P3 is the third position of the button member 570. That is, while the button member 570 in the second position is pushed by the player to the pushable position (position P3) against the urging force of the button urging spring 590 (ie, the third position) The guide pin piece 578 is formed only while it is kept in abutment with the wall portion 553g.

  In this case, at the first position, the push-in piece 576 of the button member 570 is at the second position and the third position at positions where the biting balls 670a and 670b of the switching device 600 are retracted from the biting space 651 to the flank surface space 761. Then, they are disposed at positions where the biting balls 670a and 670b of the switching device 600 are pushed into the biting space 651 (see FIGS. 25 to 27).

  Next, the switching device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. First, the basic configuration of the switching device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14.

  13 (a) is a front view of the switching device 600, and FIG. 13 (b) is a side view of the switching device 600 as viewed in the direction of arrow XIIIb of FIG. 13 (a). Fig.14 (a) is sectional drawing of the switching apparatus 600 in the XIVa-XIVa line of Fig.13 (a), FIG.14 (b) is a side surface of the switching apparatus 600 in the arrow XIVb direction view of Fig.13 (a). FIG. In FIGS. 13 and 14, the biting balls 670a and 670b, the pushing side biasing spring 680 and the biting side biasing spring 690 are not shown.

  As shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the switching device 600 is projected radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610, the connection hole 620 formed through the main body 610, and the connecting hole 620. And a locking surface 650 and a flank surface 660 formed by recessing the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610.

  The main body portion 610 is a portion that forms the skeleton of the switching device 600, and is formed in a cylindrical shape. The outer diameter of the main body 610 is set to a size slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the bearing 535 (see FIG. 7) of the handle base 530. Thus, the main body portion 610 is rotatably held in the bearing portion 535 by being inserted into the bearing portion 535 of the handle base 530 (see FIG. 25).

  The connection hole 620 is a through hole to which the connection shaft 575 (see FIG. 11) of the button member 570 is connected, and is formed on the axis of the main body 610 (that is, as a hole concentric with the main body 610). The cross-sectional shape of the connection hole 620 is formed in a shape (trapezoidal shape) corresponding to the connection shaft 575 of the button member 570, whereby, as described above, the connection shaft 575 is relatively movable in the axial direction and circumferentially It is coupled non-rotatably.

  Further, as described above, the cross-sectional shape of the connection hole 620 and the connection shaft 575 is trapezoidal, thereby positioning the rotational direction position (phase) of the both (a phase in which both can be coupled to each other) Can only be regulated). That is, in the assembly process of the handle device 51, after making the rotational direction position of the push-in piece 576 coincide with the relief space 661 of the switching device 600, it is necessary to connect the connecting shaft 575 and the connecting hole 620 In the present embodiment, since the rotational direction position (phase) of the connecting shaft 575 and the connecting hole 620 is positioned at one position in this embodiment, the rotational direction position is incorrect (the button member 570). It can be avoided that the push-in piece 576 is coupled in such a state that the rotational direction does not match the relief space 661. As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the assembly operation and to suppress the assembly failure.

  The restricting protrusion 630 is a portion that is in contact with the handle side protrusion 546 of the handle ring 540, and is formed as a rod-like body having a rectangular cross section. The spring receiving portion 640 is a portion serving as a seating surface for receiving a biasing force acting from the switching device biasing spring 539 (see FIG. 7).

  The restricting protrusion 630 and the spring receiving portion 640 are located on the front side (front side, upper side in FIG. 13B) in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 13B) of the main body 610, and the restricting protrusions The back surfaces (the lower surfaces in FIG. 13B) of the portion 630 and the spring receiving portion 640 are formed as flat surfaces that are flush with each other (that is, the positions of the main body portion 610 in the axial direction are the same). Thereby, in a state where the switching device 600 is inserted into the bearing 535 of the handle base 530, the back surface of the restriction projection 630 and the spring receiving portion 640 abuts on the end face of the bearing 535 on the opening side. Positioning in the axial direction of the (main body portion 610) can be performed (see FIG. 15). Further, since the restriction projection 630 and the spring receiving portion 640 are disposed at intervals in the circumferential direction, two switching devices 600 (the main body portion 610) are provided with respect to the end face on the opening side of the bearing portion 535. The switching device 600 can be stably rotated within the bearing 535 by that amount.

  The biting surface 650 makes the switching device 600 (the main body 610) relative to the bearing 535 by causing the balls 670a and 670b to bite into engagement with the inner circumferential surface of the bearing 530 of the handle base 530. The clearance surface 660 is a portion for making it impossible to rotate (engagement fixed state) (see FIGS. 15B and 15D), and the flank surface 660 is an inner circumferential surface of the bearing portion 530 of the handle base 530 Between the ball 670a and the ball 670b, and the switching device 600 (main body 610) can be rotated relative to the bearing 535 (rotational state) 15 (a) and 15 (c)).

  As shown in FIG. 13A, the biting surface 650 and the flank surface 660 are a part of the recess (bottom surface of the recess) formed by recessing the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610 in a U-shape in a front view. The engagement surface 650 is formed as a flat surface parallel to the axis of the main body 610 (the vertical direction in FIG. 14A), and the flank surface 660 is the upper surface of the engagement surface 650 (FIG. a) It is formed as a flat surface which is continuously connected to the upper side and inclined in the direction closer to the axis of the main body 610 as it is separated from the connection portion.

  Therefore, the biting space 651 formed corresponding to the biting surface 650 (that is, the space formed between the biting surface 650 and the inner circumferential surface of the bearing 535 in the handle base 530) is the main body It is formed as a space having the same cross-sectional shape along the axial direction of 610. In this case, in the biting space 651, in the front view shown in FIG. 13A, between the opposing surfaces of the inner circumferential surface of the bearing portion 535 and the biting surface 650, clearances gradually decreasing in the circumferential direction are formed at both ends. (See FIG. 15 (c) or FIG. 15 (d)).

In addition, a clearance space 661 corresponding to the clearance surface 660 (ie, a space formed between the clearance surface 660 and the inner circumferential surface of the bearing portion 535 in the handle base 530) It is formed as a space in which the cross-sectional area increases as it is separated. That is, the distance between the inner circumferential surface of the bearing portion 535 and the facing of the biting surface 650 is increased as it is separated from the biting space 651. (See FIG. 15 (c) or FIG. 15 (d))
Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the pivotable state and the restricted / fixed state of the switching device 600 and the switching structure of both the states will be described.

  FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b) are cross-sectional views of the switching device 600, and correspond to the cross section along line XIVa-XIVa of FIG. 13 (a). 15 (c) is a front view of the switching device 600 in the direction of arrow XVc in FIG. 15 (a), and FIG. 15 (d) is a front view of the switching device 600 in the direction of arrow XVd in FIG. FIG.

  In FIG. 15, a state in which the switching device 600 is attached (inserted) to the bearing 535 of the handle base 530 is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (c), the bite balls 670a and 670b are disposed in the relief space 661 in FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (d). The state where 670b is arranged in the biting space 651 is illustrated respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the switching device 600 includes biting balls 670a and 670b, a pushing side biasing spring 680 and a biting side biasing spring 690, which are disposed in the biting space 651 or the relief space 661. Ru. The biting balls 670 a and 670 b are members formed in a spherical shape, and when the ball is arranged in the biting space 651, the diameter dimension of the ball is the inner peripheral surface of the bearing 535 and the biting surface 650. The diametrical dimension is set such that it can be caught in the clearance between both ends of the opposite end which gradually decreases in the circumferential direction. When the sphere moves between the inner circumferential surface of the bearing portion 535 and the biting surface 650 and moves to a gap on the circumferential center side, a biting state is not formed between the ball and the gap. , Rollable diameter dimension is set.

  The pushing side biasing spring 680 is interposed between the end of the biting space 651 (the wall opposite to the relief space 661) and the biting balls 670a and 670b in a state of being elastically compressed, and its elastic recovery The force pushes up the biting balls 670 a and 670 b in the axial direction of the main body 610. Thus, in a state where the biting balls 670a and 670b are not pushed in by the pushing pieces 576 of the button member 570 (see FIG. 25), as shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (c) In the state of being pushed in by the pushing piece 576 of the button member 570 (see FIG. 26), as shown in FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (d), it is arranged in the biting space 651. .

  The biting side biasing spring 690 is interposed between the biting balls 670a and 670b in an elastically compressed state, and the elastic recovery force causes the biting balls 670a and 670b to move away from each other. Energize. Accordingly, when the biting balls 670a and 670b are disposed in the biting space 651, as shown in FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (d), the inner peripheral surface and the biting surface of the bearing 535 are engaged. It is caught between the facing of 650 and the clearance which gradually decreases in the circumferential direction.

  The operation of the switching device 600 configured as described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (c), the entrained spheres 670a and 670b are disposed in the relief space 661 (ie, the entrained spheres 670a and 670b are engaged by the push-in piece 576 of the button member 570). In the state where it is not pushed into the insertion space 651 (see FIG. 25), the gap between the facing of the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 and the biting surface 650 and the biting of the biting balls 670a and 670b are not formed Therefore, the switching device 600 (main body 610) is set to be rotatable, and can be rotated relative to the bearing 535 in either direction of the arrows A and B shown in FIG. Be done.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 15 (b) and FIG. 15 (d), the entrained spheres 670a and 670b are disposed in the entrapped space 651 (ie, the entrained spheres 670a and 670b by the push-in piece 576 of the button member 570). In a state where the 670 b is pushed into the biting space 651 (see FIG. 26), the biasing force of the biting side biasing spring 690 causes the inner circumferential surface of the bearing portion 535 to face the biting surface 650. Since the balls 670a and 670b are engaged in the clearance gradually decreasing in the circumferential direction, the switching device 600 is set in the engaged fixed state, and the rotation of the switching device 600 (main body 610) relative to the bearing 535 Is blocked (fixed) as follows.

  That is, when the switching device 600 (main body portion 610) tries to rotate in the direction of arrow A shown in FIG. The circumferential end (lower side in FIG. 15 (d)) of the insertion surface 650 acts to further engage the biting ball 670b between the facing to the inner circumferential surface of the bearing 535 and thereby the bearing Relative rotation of the switching device 600 (body portion 610) in the direction of arrow A relative to 535 is blocked.

  Similarly, when the switching device 600 (main body 610) tries to rotate in the direction of arrow B shown in FIG. 15 (d), it is on the rear side in the rotational direction of the main body 610 (rotational direction lag side). The circumferential end (the upper side in FIG. 15D) of the biting surface 650 acts to further bite the biting ball 670a between the facing to the inner circumferential surface of the bearing 535, thereby the bearing Relative rotation of the switching device 600 (body portion 610) in the direction of arrow B relative to 535 is blocked.

  Next, the boss member 560 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 is a rear perspective view of the handle base 530. FIG. In FIG. 16, a state in which the variable resistor and the firing stop switch operation unit 440 and the like are removed is illustrated, and the positional relationship between the shaft 563 and the bearing 523 is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line. .

  As shown in FIG. 16, the boss member 560 is a member for movably connecting the handle base 530 to the handle mount 520 about a pivotally supported portion, and from the back of the handle base 530 It is provided in a projecting manner. That is, as described later, the bearing 523 is formed on the handle mount 520, the shaft 563 is formed on the boss member 560, and the shaft 563 is rotatably supported by the bearing 523. The handle base 530 is displaceable with respect to the handle mount 520 with a pivotally supported portion as a center (fulcrum). The displacement of the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mounting base 520 with the axially supported portion as the center (fulcrum) may be expressed as "rocking" or "pivoting".

  The boss member 560 has a flat base 561 fastened and fixed to the rear surface (bottom wall 532) of the handle base 530, and a projection 562 which protrudes from the base 561 toward the rear surface and is formed in a circular rod shape. A shaft-like shaft 563 in which a pair is projected to the left and right from the outer surface of the projecting portion 562 and a harness guide 564 disposed on the lower surface of the projecting tip of the projecting portion 562 are mainly configured.

  An inclined surface 562 a is formed on the upper surface of the protrusion 562 so as to be inclined downward according to the distance from the base 561 (shaft 563) (that is, toward the harness guide 564). Here, the protruding portion 562 of the boss member 560 is a protruding tip end side (harness guide 564) relative to the shaft 563 due to the displacement centering on the shaft supporting portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) of the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mount 520. Since the part on the side is a part that is displaced upward (see FIGS. 23 and 24), the other member (ie, the switch disposed in the handle mount 520) located above, the IC device, It is necessary to avoid interference with the harness or the reinforcing rib 526 integrally formed on the handle mount 520 or the like.

  In this case, by moving the arrangement position of the other member upward, the handle mount 520 is enlarged by that much, and by forming the inclined surface 562 a on the upper surface of the protrusion 562, the handle mount Interference with other members and the projection part 562 can be avoided while achieving miniaturization of 520. In particular, as the inclined surface 562a is formed as an inclined surface which is inclined downward as it is separated from the shaft 563 as described above, the amount of clearance is increased as the protruding end side with a large amount of displacement is increased, thereby interfering with other members. The rigidity of the protrusion 562 can be secured by minimizing the amount of removal of the protrusion 562 on the side of the shaft 563 where the amount of displacement is small while avoiding effectively.

  A pair of guide walls 562 b for holding the base biasing spring SP (see FIG. 19) is provided upright at the projecting tip end of the projecting portion 562. As described above, by holding the base biasing spring SP between the pair of guide walls 562a, the structure can be simplified and the cost of parts can be reduced, and the base biasing spring SP is assembled. Thus, the assemblability can be improved. The upper surface of the projecting portion 562 located between the facings of the guide walls 562b is curved in an arc shape in a rear view, and can elastically deform the base urging spring SP smoothly.

  The harness guide 564 is a member for guiding electrical wiring, and is formed in a frame shape in a rear view. Wiring that enters the handle mount 520 from the inside of the handle base 530 through the opening of the bottom wall 532 (such as the wiring of the firing stop switch 51b) or the wire that exists in the handle mount 520 (such as the wiring of a variable resistor) When the handle base 530 is displaced about the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) by being accommodated in the frame of the harness guide 564 (passed in the frame), the upper surface of the projection 562, or It is possible to avoid breaking the wire by sandwiching the wire between the lower surface of the harness guide 564 and the inner wall surface of the other member or the handle mount 520.

  Note that projecting the guide wall 562 b from the upper surface of the projecting portion 562 increases the possibility of sandwiching the wiring with another member or the handle mount 520. In the present embodiment, by providing the harness guide 564 and passing the inside of the frame of the harness guide 564, it is possible to suppress the pinching (breaking) of the wiring. As a result, the guide wall 562b can be made to project on the upper surface of the projection 562, and the structure for holding the base biasing spring SP can be simplified and the assemblability can be improved.

  A mating surface 532 a is formed on the back surface (bottom wall 532) of the handle base 530. The mating surface 532a is a portion to which the upper mating surface 527 (and the lower mating surface 528) of the handle mount 520 abuts, and the entire longitudinal annular area surrounding the periphery of the base 561 of the boss member 560 is It is formed as a flush flat surface.

  Next, the handle mount 520 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the handle mount 520 in an exploded state. FIG. 18 (a) is a perspective view of the handle mount 520 in an assembled state, and FIG. 18 (b) is an inner side view of the first main body 520a.

  As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the handle mount 520 is formed as a vertically long cylindrical body, and is vertically divided into a first main body 520 a and a second main body 520 b. A positioning projection 521a is provided on one of the mating surfaces of the first main body 520a and the second main body 520b so as to protrude from one side, and a positioning hole 521b for receiving and positioning the positioning projection 521a is located at the other corresponding position. It is recessed. Similarly, an insertion hole 522a for inserting a fastening screw is formed to be penetrated in one side, and a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 522a is fastened to fasten and fix the first main body 520a and the second main body 520b. Fastening holes 522b are recessed at the other corresponding positions.

  A bearing 523, a locking claw 524, an accommodation recess 525, and a reinforcing rib 526 are respectively formed on the inner wall surfaces of the first main body 520 a and the second main body 520 b. The bearing 523 is a bearing portion (recessed portion) for pivotally supporting the shaft 563 of the boss member 560, and a pair of the bearings are arranged to face each other. The locking claw portion 524 is a portion for locking the end of the base biasing spring SP (see FIG. 12), and is formed in a hook shape bent downward while protruding toward the back surface.

  The housing recess 525 and the reinforcing rib 526 are portions disposed at one and the other opposite positions of the first main body 520a and the second main body 520b. That is, the storage recess 525 is a recess for storing and holding a component such as an IC device, and is formed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the component to be stored, and the reinforcing rib 526 is from the inner wall surface to the storage recess 525 The rigidity of the handle mounting base 520 as a whole is enhanced by pressing the components stored in the storage recess 525 by protruding toward the top and by the protruding tip.

  An upper mating surface 527 and a lower mating surface 528, which are brought into contact with the mating surface 532a (see FIG. 16) of the handle base 530, are provided on the front surfaces (right side of FIG. 18A) of the first main body 520a and the second main body 520b. It is formed. The upper mating surface portion 527 and the lower mating surface portion 528 are formed on the front end face of the handle mount 520 (a longitudinally long annular surface in a front view), and each is formed as a flush flat surface. The lower mating surface 528 is inclined toward the back as it is separated from the upper mating surface 527. As a result, the handle base 530 can be displaced relative to the handle mount 520 about the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) (see FIGS. 23 and 24).

  The lower mating surface portion 528 of the first main body 520a is partially enlarged (that is, the plate-like body protrudes radially inward from the inner wall surface of the first main body 520a), and the enlarged portion (protruded portion) Is a pressing surface portion 528a for pressing the pressed surface portion 702a of the handlebar regulation member 700. The reinforcing portion 528 b is continuously provided on the back side of the pressing surface portion 528 a. The reinforcing portion 528 b is formed in a plate shape, and only the upper end side of the pressing surface portion 528 a is connected to the inner wall surface of the first main body 520 a and the step surface 520 a 1. As a result, since the space can be formed between the inner wall surface of the first main body 520a and the reinforcement portion 528b, the resin material is suppressed, and the rigidity of the pressing surface portion 528a is effectively enhanced while reducing the cost of parts. The durability can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the base biasing spring SP will be described. FIG. 19 is a rear perspective view of the handle mount 520 and the handle base 530. In FIG. 19, a state in which the variable resistor and the like are removed is illustrated, and wiring of other components is not illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the base biasing spring SP is formed as a coil spring, and the annular portions at both ends are locked to the locking claws 524 in a state of being elastically deformed in tension (stretched). At the same time, a substantially middle portion of the coil spring is bridged over the protruding end of the protruding portion 562 of the boss member 560 (between the facing of the pair of guide walls 562b).

  As a result, the boss member 560 is biased in a direction (downward) in which the projecting tip end of the projecting portion 562 approaches the locking claw portion 524 around the shaft 563 by the elastic recovery force of the base biasing member SP. As a result, the handle base 530 is displaced upward with respect to the handle mount 520 (see FIG. 23).

  The handle mount 520 is formed to be open at the back, so that the inner space of the handle mount 520 can be exposed from the open portion at the back. As a result, both ends of the base biasing spring SP are locked to the locking claws 524 and work to bridge the middle portion between the pair of guide walls 562 b is performed from the open portion of the back surface of the handle mount 520. Since it can carry out, the improvement of the workability of the attachment work can be aimed at.

  When the handle base 530 is displaced upward (bumped up), the upper mating surface 527 of the handle mount 520 is in contact with the mating surface 532a of the handle base 530. That is, mating surfaces (upper mating surface 527 and mating surface 532a) formed in a flat surface shape are formed on the facing surfaces (matching surfaces) of the handle mounting base 520 and the handle base 530, and these mating surfaces are the handle base In a state where the displacement position 530 is disposed at the initial position (first position), the contact is made by the biasing force of the base biasing spring SP. Due to the close contact, in the initial position, the handle base 530 can be maintained in a stable state without being shaken with the handle mount 520. As a result, for example, the operability at the time of rotating the handle ring 540 can be improved.

  In the state where the displacement position of the handle base 530 is disposed at the initial position, the mating surfaces (upper mating surface 527 and mating surface 532a) in close contact with each other are on the handle mount 520 and the handle base 530 (upper surface). Since it is positioned, when the mating surface is opened (see FIG. 20), foreign matter such as foreign matter, dust, or dirt dropped carelessly by the player can be prevented from entering the inside of the handle mount 520. In particular, the handle base 530 is returned to the initial position (first position) by the biasing force of the base biasing spring SP, and the mating surface (upper mating surface portion 527 and mating surface portion 532a) The configuration disposed above is effective.

  Next, the handle control member 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of the handle base 530 in a state in which the handle restricting member 700 is mounted, and FIG. 21 is a front perspective view of the handle base 530 in a state in which the handle restricting member 700 is removed. FIGS. 20 and 21 illustrate a state in which the variable resistor, the emission stop switch operation unit 440, the switching device 600, and the like are removed.

  As shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 21, the handlebar regulation member 700 is attached to the notch portion 534b formed in the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handlebar base 530. In the bottom wall 532 of the handle base 530, a through hole 532b circular in a front view and penetrating from the front surface to the back surface (specifically, the mating surface 532a) is formed. The through hole 532 b and the notch 534 b are parallel to the pivot axis of the handle ring 540.

  The handle regulation member 700 is a resin material member for regulating the return of the handle ring 540 to the initial position (that is, fixing the amount of pivotal operation (rotational position) of the handle ring 540). When the handle base 530 is displaced with respect to the support 520 (center of the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) relative to the mount 520, the handle mount 520 (the pressing surface portion 528a) is pushed forward toward the front, and the circle of the handle ring 540 By pressing the plate portion 541, the rotation of the handle ring 540 is restricted (see FIG. 24). Here, with reference to FIG. 22, the handle control member 700 will be described.

  22 (a) and 22 (b) are perspective views of the handlebar regulating member 700. FIG. The handle control member 700 mainly includes a main body portion 701, a rod portion 702 protruding from the back of the main body portion 701, and a pair of arm portions 703 protruding from both sides of the main body portion 701.

  The main body portion 701 is a portion formed in a plate shape, and at least the upper surface (upper side surface in FIG. 22B) is formed to be concavely curved. As a result, when mounted on the handle base 530, the internal space of the handle base 530 can be secured, and the degree of freedom in attaching other parts can be enhanced, and the workability at the time of the attachment operation can be improved. be able to.

  Slide guide grooves 701 a are recessed in side surfaces on the left and right sides of the main body 701. The slide guide groove 701 a is a linear concave groove having a U-shaped cross section, and is extended in parallel with the direction in which the rod portion 702 projects. The inner peripheral wall 534 (both the side portions of the notch 534b) of the handle base 530 is internally fitted in the slide guide groove 701a in a state where the handle control member 700 is attached to the handle base 530. That is, the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530 is sandwiched between the portion of the main body portion 701 projecting from the bottom side and the base of the arm portion 703. As a result, only movement (slide) in the extending direction of the rod portion 702 of the main body portion 701 (handle regulation member 700) is permitted, and movement in the circumferential direction of the handle base 530 is restricted.

  A flat contact surface 701 b is formed on the front surface of the main body 701. The contact surface portion 701b is a portion that is in contact with the back surface of the disc portion 541 of the handle ring 540 (see FIG. 24), and is perpendicular to the rotation axis of the handle ring 540 (that is, movement (slide) of the main portion 701). Parallel to the direction).

  The rod portion 702 is a rod-like body having a circular cross section and provided so as to protrude from the back surface of the main body portion 701, and is formed so as to be insertable into the through hole 532b in the bottom wall 532 of the handle base 530. A hemispherical pressed surface portion 702 a is formed at the protruding end of the rod portion 702. The protruding length of the rod portion 702 from the back surface of the main body portion 701 is larger than the thickness of the bottom wall 532, and when the handlebar regulating member 700 is attached to the handle base 530, the rod portion 702 is pressed against The surface portion 702a protrudes from the back surface (the mating surface portion 532a) of the bottom wall 532 (see FIG. 23).

  Since the pressed surface portion 702a of the rod portion 702 is formed in a hemispherical shape, the handle base 530 is displaced with respect to the handle mount 520 centering on the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523), and the handle mount 520 When the pressed surface portion 702a is pressed by the pressing surface portion 528a (see FIGS. 23 and 24), the handlebar regulation member 700 can be stably moved (slided). That is, in this embodiment, the pressing surface portion 528a of the handle mount 520 moves around the shaft 563 while the handle restricting member 700 slides (moves linearly), and the relative positional relationship between the both is indeterminate. At a certain point, the pressing surface portion 528a of the handle mount 520 is formed as a flat surface, and the pressed surface portion 702a of the steering wheel regulating member 700 is formed as a spherical surface which bulges toward the pressing surface portion 528a. The force component for sliding the handlebar regulation member 700 in the direction toward the handle ring 540 can be continuously generated by moving along with the displacement centering on the bearing portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523). Thus, the handle control member 700 is clogged (that is, the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530 is caught in the slide guide groove 701a or the rod portion 702 is caught in the through hole 532b) and stabilized. Can slide.

  The arm portion 703 is a rod-like body having a substantially rectangular cross section protruding from the side surfaces on both sides of the main body portion 701, and the bottom surface of the arm portion 703 has a curvature corresponding to the inner peripheral surface of the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530. It is curved and formed. Thus, in the state where the handlebar regulation member 700 is mounted on the handlebar base 530 (the inner peripheral wall 534 is fitted in the slide guide groove 701a of the main body 701), the bottom surface of the arm 703 is the inner periphery of the inner peripheral wall 534 It can be made into the state where it was made to curve along a field, and it can control that arm section 703 falls off from receiving projection 538. Further, by extending the arm portion 703 along the circumferential direction of the handle base 530, it is possible to make the arm portion 703 longer while suppressing the influence on the arrangement space of other components. At the same time, a space necessary for elastic deformation of the arm 703 can be secured.

  Referring back to FIG. 20 and FIG. A pair of receiving projections 538 are provided on the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530 so as to project radially inward from the inner peripheral surface thereof. The receiving projection 538 is a portion for elastically deforming by constraining the arm portion 702 of the handle regulating member 700 and regulating its movement, and corresponds to the tip portion of the arm portion 703 of the handle regulating member 700. It is arranged at the position.

  The front surface (the side facing the handle ring 540) of the notch 534b in the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530 (slide holding portion for slidably holding the handle restricting member 700 toward the handle ring 540) is opened. It is formed. Therefore, since the handle control member 700 can be easily mounted to the notch portion 534b by utilizing the open portion, it is possible to reduce the assembly cost relating to the operation of mounting the handle control member 700.

  In addition, since the open portion of the notch 534b is the side facing the handle ring 540 (see FIG. 23), the handle restriction member 700 is notched by the handle ring 540 being disposed on the handle base 530. It does not fall off the open part of 534b.

  Further, a receiving projection 538 for receiving the arm portion 703 of the handlebar regulation member 700 is provided in a protruding manner on the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handlebar base 530. While the handle ring 540 is attached to the handle base 530 (i.e., in the state shown in FIG. 20), the handlebar regulating member 700 may be disengaged from the open portion of the notch 534b. It can be prevented. Therefore, the workability in the assembly process can be improved.

  On the other hand, the arm portion 703 of the handle regulation member 700 is made of a resin material and is formed so as to be elastically deformable. Therefore, the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mount 520 is centered on the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523). When the handle restricting member 700 is displaced and pushed toward the front surface (handle ring 540), the handle restricting member 700 is deformed by elastically deforming the arm portion 702 whose tip portion is restrained by the receiving projection 538. It can be moved (slide). Thereby, the contact surface 701b of the handlebar regulation member 700 can be brought into contact with the back surface (contact surface) of the handle ring 540 (see FIG. 24).

  In addition, when the displacement of the handle base 530 relative to the handle mounting base 520 about the pivoting portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) of the handle base 530 is released, the handle recovery member by the elastic recovery force of the elastically deformed arm portion 702. 700 can be moved away from the handle ring 540 and returned to the initial position (see FIG. 23). Thereby, a gap can be formed between the contact surface portion 701 b of the handlebar regulation member 700 and the back surface (contact surface portion) of the handle ring 540. As a result, it is possible to avoid that the turning operation of the handle ring 540 is hindered due to the resistance due to the contact between the two.

  Here, since the receiving projection 538 is protruded radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530, visibility during assembly can be ensured. As a result, confirmation of the positional relationship between the arm portion 703 and the receiving projection 738 (that is, whether or not the arm portion 703 is properly engaged with the receiving projection 738) is facilitated to improve the workability. be able to.

  Further, the receiving projection 738 is inclined upward from the inner circumferential surface of the inner peripheral wall 534 of the handle base 530 as it goes from the front to the back (that is, along the mounting direction of the handle restricting member 700) on the projecting upper surface Since the sloped surface is formed, when the handlebar regulation member 700 is attached to the notch 534b from the open portion thereof, the handle regulation member 700 is formed along the sloped surface formed on the projecting upper surface of the receiving projection 538. The movement of the arm portion 703 allows the arm portion 703 to easily get over the receiving projection 538. That is, it is only necessary to push in the handle regulating member 700 from the open portion of the notch 738, and there is no need to separately carry out the work of lifting the arm 703 and overcoming the receiving projection 738. Can be

  Next, the operation of the handle device 51 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24.

  FIG. 23 is a partial cross-sectional side view of the handle device 51 in a state before the displacement operation, and FIG. 24 is a partial cross-sectional side view of the handle device 51 in a state after the displacement operation. In FIGS. 23 and 24, the front surface of the lower tray unit 15 is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and the state in which the second main body 520b of the handle mount 520 is removed is also illustrated. The illustration of the wiring is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the state before the handle base 530 is displaced with respect to the handle mount 520 about the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) (ie, the handle base 530 is directed downward by the player). In the undisplaced state), the handle base 530 is in the horizontal position, and the mating surface of the handle mount 520 and the handle base 530 is such that the upper mating surface 527 is in contact with the mating surface 532a, while the lower mating surface 528 Are separated from the mating surface 532a.

  In the state shown in FIG. 23, when the handle base 530 is displaced downward with respect to the handle mount 520 with the shaft supporting portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) as the center, the pressed surface portion of the rod portion 702 of the handle restricting member 700. 702a is pressed against the pressing surface portion 528a of the handle mount 520, and the handle regulating member 700 is slid toward the front surface (handle ring 540). When the handle base 530 is further displaced downward about the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523), the lower mating surface portion 528 abuts on the mating surface portion 532a, and as shown in FIG. The contact surface 701 b of the main body 701 is in contact with the back surface of the disc portion 541 of the handle ring 540.

  As a result, return of the handle ring 540 to the initial position is restricted regardless of the amount of rotational operation (rotational position), and the amount of rotational operation is fixed. Therefore, the firing strength of the ball can be fixed at the firing strength of the ball according to the current amount of turning operation of the handle ring 540.

  In this case, there are the following as conventional techniques for fixing the amount of rotational operation of the handle ring 540. For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-5759, a hemispherical convex toward the front (the player side) on the top (the front side as viewed from the player) of the front cover base corresponding to the front cover 550 in this embodiment. A technique is disclosed in which the amount of turning operation of the handle ring is fixed by providing a button that is used by the player with the palm of the hand.

  However, in such a prior art, it is necessary to perform the pressing operation of the button while performing the turning operation of the handle ring. In detail, it is necessary to perform in parallel an operation (pivotal operation) of moving the handle ring gripped with the finger in the circumferential direction and an operation of pushing the palm of the hand toward the back while rolling the palm around the button surface. Therefore, in order to press the button while maintaining the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle ring, the player is required to have a high level of technology. Also, since this state (a state in which the button is pushed while maintaining the amount of turning operation of the handle ring) is an unreasonable posture for the player, such a state is continued (that is, the firing strength of the ball is desired). The player's burden is to fix at the firing intensity). As a result, not only when the button is pressed but also when maintaining the pressing, the amount of turning operation (turning position) of the handle ring is easily deviated, and it becomes difficult to maintain the desired amount of turning operation.

  In addition, since it is such an unreasonable attitude | position, a high-level technique is required also for operation which cancels | releases pushing of a button, maintaining the rotation operation amount (rotational position) of a handle ring.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the displacement operation centering on the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) of the handle base 530 is an operation to displace the handle base 530 and the handle ring 540 integrally. From this, the player does not release part of the fingers holding the handle ring 540 regardless of the pivot position of the handle ring 540 (the shaft 563 and the bearing 523). Displacement operation can be performed. Thereby, the operability can be improved. In addition, after performing the displacement operation centering on the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) of the handle base 530, the operation state (the rotation operation amount of the handle ring 540 is fixed to the desired rotation operation amount) It is also easy to maintain the Therefore, during operation of the handle base 530 and maintaining the operation state, occurrence of positional deviation in the rotational position of the handle ring 540 is suppressed, and the emission intensity of the ball is accurately fixed to the desired emission intensity. Can.

  Also, as described above, if the handle base 530 is displaced around the pivot portion (shaft 563 and the bearing 523), the player attaches the palm to the handle base 530 (front cover 550) and The handle base 530 can be displaced downward about the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) only by the action of applying the weight of. That is, the player can fix the firing strength of the ball to a desired firing strength only by performing a simple action of applying the weight of the hand.

  Further, since the operation is to displace the handle base 530 and the handle ring 540 integrally, one of the fingers holding the handle ring 540 no matter where the handle ring 540 is located. It is possible to perform a displacement operation centering on the shaft support portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) of the handle base 530 without separating the parts. Thereby, the operability can be improved. In addition, after performing the displacement operation centering on the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) of the handle base 530, the operation state (the rotation operation amount of the handle ring 540 is fixed to the desired rotation operation amount) It is also easy to maintain the Therefore, during operation of the handle base 530 and maintaining the operation state, occurrence of positional deviation in the rotational position of the handle ring 540 is suppressed, and the emission intensity of the ball is accurately fixed to the desired emission intensity. Can.

  Further, since the contact surface 701b of the main body 701 of the handlebar regulation member 700 and the back surface (contact surface) of the disc 541 of the handle ring 540 are formed as smooth surfaces, the rotation of the handle ring 540 is achieved. The position can be fixed at any pivot position.

  For example, serrations are provided on the contact surface 701b of the main body 701 of the handlebar regulation member 700 and the back surface (contacting surface) of the disc 541 of the handle ring 540, and these serrations are In the structure in which the pivot position of the handle ring 540 is fixed by engaging it, the pivot position of the handle ring 540 can be fixed firmly, while the pitch (interval) of the sawtooth shaped unevenness is adjusted Is the minimum value of Therefore, the fixable rotational position is intermittent, and there is a possibility that it can not be fixed at a desired rotational position.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the contact surface 701b of the main body 701 of the handlebar regulation member 700 and the back surface (contact surface) of the disc 541 of the handle ring 540 are smoothed. Since the fixable rotational position is continuous, the adjustable width can be secured as being fixable at any rotational position.

  Further, even if the contact surface 701b is in contact with the back surface (contact surface) of the disk 541 and the amount of rotational operation of the handle ring 540 is fixed, the contact surface 701b and the contact Since the contact surfaces can be made to slide relative to each other by making the contact surface portions smooth, even after the amount of rotational operation of the handle ring 540 is fixed, such The amount of rotational operation can be finely adjusted.

  Here, since the front cover 550 is disposed on the front side (right side in FIG. 23) of the handle ring 540, the player applies a palm to the outer surface of the front cover 550 when gripping the handle ring 540 with fingers. The front cover 550 can be used as a portion (force point) for applying a force when displacing the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mounting 520 about the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523). it can.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 24, in the present embodiment, the pressing surface portion 528a (a pressing surface portion 702a) is provided from the shaft 563 (fulcrum) of the boss member 560 for pivotally supporting the handle base 530 displaceably with respect to the handle mount 520. The distance A to the protruding tip (the point of action) is at least smaller than the distance B from the axis 563 of the boss member 560 to the back of the handle ring 540. Therefore, the distance from the shaft 563 (fulcrum) of the boss member 560 to the outer surface (force point) of the front cover 550 is larger than the distance A.

  That is, since the distance from the force point to the fulcrum can be made larger than the distance from the fulcrum to the action point, the force is amplified even if the force applied to the outer surface of the front cover 550 that becomes the force point is small, The handle surface regulating member 700 (the surface to be pressed 702a) can be pressed with a greater force by the pressing surface 528a which is the point of action. As a result, the handlebar regulation member 700 can be firmly abutted against the handle ring 540, and the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the handle ring 540 can be reliably fixed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27, a switching structure for switching the switching device 600 to the rotatable state or the engaged fixed state by the pressing operation of the button member 570 will be described. In the description of this switching structure, FIGS. 28 and 29 will be referred to as appropriate.

  25 to 27 are partial cross-sectional side views of the handle device 51. FIG. The state in which the button member 570 is at the first position in FIG. 25, the state in which the button member 570 is in the second position in FIG. 26, and the state in which the button member 570 is at the third position are illustrated in FIG. Ru.

  FIGS. 28 and 29 are schematic front views of the handle device 51 schematically showing the handle ring 540 and the switching device 600. 28 (a) shows the state where the handle ring 540 is at the initial position θ0 and the switching device 600 is in the rotatable state, and FIG. 28 (b) shows that the handle ring 540 turns to the operation position θ1. In FIG. 28 (c), the handle ring 540 is pivoted to the operation position θ1 and the switching device 600 is in the engagement / fixing state in which the switching device 600 is in the pivotable state. 29 (a) shows a state in which the handle ring 540 is in the range of the operation position θ0 to θ1, and FIG. 29 (a) shows a state in which the switching device 600 is changed to the engaged fixed state. b) shows a state in which the handle ring 540 is in the initial position θ0 and the switching device 600 is changed to the engaged fixed state.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, as described above, the switching device 600 is inserted into the bearing 535 of the handle base 530, and the connecting shaft 575 of the button member 570 is in the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 600. Relatively movable in the axial direction and relatively nonrotatable in the circumferential direction.

  In this embodiment, since the handle shaft support 574 of the button member 570 is rotatably connected to the shaft 573, the switching device 600 (main body 610) is rotated with respect to the bearing 575. When it is selected, only the members on the handle shaft support 574 side (the handle shaft support 574, the connecting shaft 575 and the push-in piece 576) are interlocked with the switching device 600, and the members on the shaft 573 side (The shaft 573, the back base 572 and the operation unit 571) can be prevented from rotating. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the operation unit 571 rotates in the palm of the hand of the player to give the player an uncomfortable feeling.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the connecting shaft 575 of the button member 570 is inserted in the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 600 so as not to be relatively rotatable in the circumferential direction, the switching device 600 rotates with respect to the bearing 535 Even in this case, the rotational position (phase) of the push-in piece 576 of the button member 570 with respect to the clearance space 661 of the switching device 600 can be always matched.

  Thereby, even when the switching device 600 is disposed at any rotational position (phase), the push-in piece 576 of the button member 570 is bitten by the push-in operation of the button member 570 (operation portion 571). It can be reliably moved into the containing space 651. That is, even when the handle ring 540 is turned to any rotation position, the switching device 600 can be engaged and fixed, so that the firing strength of the gaming ball becomes the desired firing strength. In this case, it is possible to change (set) the operation end point while maintaining the rotational position (operation amount) of the handle ring 540. As a result, the change (setting) of the operation end point can be performed quickly and at an accurate position.

  The handle ring support 574 of the button member 570 is inserted through the central hole 544a of the handle ring 540, and the handle ring 540 is rotatably supported by the handle support 574. That is, even when the switching device 600 is switched to the engaged fixed state in which relative rotation with respect to the bearing portion 535 can not be performed, the handle ring protrusion 546 of the handle ring 540 is a restricting protrusion of the switching device 600. It is possible to turn in the turning direction (the direction to be returned to the initial position) opposite to the turning direction in which the portion 630 abuts and is regulated.

  A button biasing spring 590 formed as a coil spring is disposed between the handle ring 540 and the button member 570 in a state of being elastically compressed and deformed, and the biasing force (elastic recovery force) causes the button member to 570 is biased away from the handle ring 540.

  As shown in FIG. 25, when the button member 570 is in the first position (in the initial position where the button member 570 is not pushed in), the push-in piece 576 of the button member 570 is a relief space of the switching device 600. Placed at 661. Therefore, in the switching device 600, the biting balls 670a and 670b are disposed in the relief space 661 by the biasing force of the pushing side biasing spring 680, and thereby, the rotation can be performed relative to the bearing 535. The movable state (see FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (c)) is set.

  As described above, in the state where switching device 600 is set to be rotatable (in a state where button member 570 is at the first position), switching device 600 is rotatable with respect to bearing portion 535. As shown in FIG. 28 (a) and FIG. 28 (b), when the handle ring 540 is rotated in the increasing direction from the initial position θ0 to the operation position θ1, the handle side projection 546 of the handle ring 540 is switched to the switching device 600. Is pushed in the increasing direction, the switching device 600 is interlocked with the handle ring 540 and is rotated in the increasing direction. The operation position θ1 is a rotation angle that does not reach the maximum position θmax of the rotation operation range of the handle ring 540. The same applies to the following.

  On the other hand, when the handle ring 540 is turned in the decreasing direction, the switching device 600 follows the handle ring 540 by the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 539 (see FIG. 7) and rotates in the decreasing direction. Be done. For example, as shown in FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b), when the handle ring 540 is rotated in the decreasing direction from the operation position θ1 to the initial position θ0, the switching device 600 also has a switching device biasing spring. By the biasing force of 539, the restricting protrusion 630 is turned in the decreasing direction, and the restricting protrusion 630 is disposed at the turning position where it abuts on the handle side protrusion 546.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 25, when the switching device 600 is set to be rotatable (in a state where the button member 570 is in the first position), the handle ring 540 is either in the increasing direction or in the decreasing direction. Even when the turning operation is performed, the switching device 600 is interlocked (synchronized) and is rotated, and the turning positions (phases) of the handle ring 540 and the switching device 600 are matched (FIG. 28A). And FIG. 28 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 26, in the state where the button member 570 is in the second position (the button member 570 in the first position is pushed in), the switching device 600 has the biting balls 670a, 670b biting in. It is arranged in the space 651 (that is, the pushing balls 670a and 670b are pushed into the biting space 651 by the pushing pieces 576 of the button member 570) and set in the engaged fixed state.

  When switching device 600 is set in the engaged and fixed state, biting balls 670 a and 670 b face the inner circumferential surface of bearing 535 and biting surface 650 by the biasing force of biting side biasing spring 690. Because the switching device 600 (main body portion 610) is in a state of being interposed between and gradually decreasing in the circumferential direction, the switching device 600 (main body portion 610) is directed in the directions of arrows A and B shown in FIG. The circumferential end of the biting surface 650 acts to further bite the biting balls 670a and 670b while facing the inner circumferential surface of the bearing 535 (see FIG. 15 (b) and FIG. 15 (d)), the rotation of the switching device 600 (main body 610) with respect to the bearing 535 is restricted (blocked).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), in the state in which the handle ring 540 is turned to the operation position θ1, switching is performed by pushing the button member 570 to change from the first position to the second position. When the device 600 is set in the engagement fixed state, as shown in FIG. 28C, the switching position of the switching device 600 corresponds to the operation position θ1 (ie, the button member 570 in the first position is in the second position). Can be fixed at the time of change to

  Thus, when the switching device 600 is set in the engaged fixed state and the rotational position thereof is fixed, as shown in FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b), the handle ring 540 is reduced. Even when the switching device 600 is rotated, the switching device 600 is not interlocked (synchronized) with the rotation of the handle ring 540, and is held at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1. That is, since the center hole 544a of the handle ring 540 is pivotally supported by the handle shaft support 574 (see FIG. 26), as shown in FIG. 29A, the handle ring 540 is independent of the switching device 600. Thus, it is possible to turn in the decreasing direction and the operating direction.

  In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), with the switching device 600 held (fixed) at the rotational position corresponding to the operation position θ1, the handle ring 540 returned to the initial position θ0 is When the turning operation is performed in the increasing direction, the operation position θ1 is set as the end point of the turning operation. That is, as shown in FIG. 28C, when the turning operation in the increasing direction of the steering wheel 540 reaches the operation position θ1, the steering wheel side projection 546 abuts on the regulation projection 630, The turning operation in the increasing direction of is restricted.

  Here, setting of the button member 570 in the second position to the first position is performed as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 27, after pushing in the button member 570 in the second position shown in FIG. 26 to the pushable position (third position), the pushing operation is released (the pushing force is reduced or Release the hand). Thereby, the button member 570 is returned from the third position to the first position shown in FIG. 25 by the biasing force of the button biasing spring 590.

  In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 29B, in the state where the switching device 600 is held (fixed) at the rotational position corresponding to the operation position θ1, the above-described operation (from the second position to the third position Since the switching device 600 is switched from the engaged fixed state to the rotatable state and made rotatable relative to the bearing portion 535 when the operation of causing the passage portion to return to the first position is performed, the switching device is attached Under the biasing force of the biasing spring 539, as shown in FIG. 28A, the initial position (the pivoting position where the restricting protrusion 630 abuts on the handle side protrusion 546) is returned.

  Here, since the switching device 600 is always rotated in synchronization (synchronized) with the handle shaft support 574 and the push-in piece 576 through the connection of the connection hole 620 and the connection shaft 575, the handle ring 540 is rotated. Even in the state in which the rotation operation is performed, switching from the engaged fixed state to the rotatable state by pressing the button member 570 (that is, return of the switching device 600 to the initial position It is possible to cancel the change).

  As a result, even when the handle ring 540 is rotated, it is not necessary to temporarily return the handle ring 540 to the initial position in order to release the change (setting) of the operation end point. Therefore, for example, when it becomes necessary to reset (for example, fine adjustment) the position of the operation end point to another position, while maintaining the turning operation of the handle ring 540 (that is, while continuing the game) , The reset operation can be performed quickly. Alternatively, for example, when it is necessary to hit the right, while maintaining the turning operation of the handle ring 540, it is possible to release the operation end point which restricted the turning operation of the handle ring 540 in the increasing direction. The state in which the turning operation of the handle ring 540 in the increasing direction can be quickly formed. That is, it is possible to quickly switch to the turning operation of the handle ring 540 in the operation direction in which the launch strength of the gaming ball is maximized.

  Also, an operation for switching the switching device 600 from the engaged fixed state to the rotatable state (canceling the operation end point, ie, returning operation for returning the switching device 600 to the initial position), and from the rotatable state to the engaged fixed state Both of the switching operation (the changing operation of changing (setting) the operation end point) are achieved by the pressing operation of the button member 570. That is, this can be achieved by operating the same member in the same direction. This makes it easy to operate the change operation and the return operation. In particular, since the state by the change operation and the state by the return operation are alternately switched, it is effective to improve the operability that the two states can be switched by repeating the same operation. Further, since the same member can be operated in the same direction, the operable direction of the button member 570 can be limited to only one direction, so the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be reduced. It is possible to reduce.

  Here, when the button member 570 is in the second position and the third position, as shown in FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, a part (the top side projecting forward) of the operation portion 571 of the button member 570 It projects to the front (right side in FIGS. 26 and 27) beyond the edge of the opening 550 a of the cover 550. Therefore, when the button member 570 (operation portion 571) at the first position (or the second position) is pushed into the second position (or the third position), the button member 570 is opened in the front cover 550. There is no need to push it to a position beyond the edge of 550 a (that is, a position where the entire operation portion 571 of the button member 570 is inserted into the front cover 550). As a result, when the button member 570 is pushed in, it is possible to suppress the edge of the opening 550a of the front cover 550 from obstructing the movement of the player's hand and to improve the operability.

  However, in the state where the button member 570 is in the third position, the entire operation portion 571 of the button member 570 may be configured to be retracted into the inside of the front cover 550. That is, in the third position, the top (the most forwardly projecting portion) of the operation portion 571 of the button member 570 is located axially inward (leftward in FIG. 27) than the edge of the opening 550a of the front cover 550. It may be formed as follows.

  In this case, the button member 570 is pushed from the second position to the third position, and the switching device 600 can be returned to the initial position (that is, the switching device 600 in the engaged fixed state is changed to the rotatable state). To cancel the change (setting) of the operation end point, the button member 570 (operation portion 571) is positioned so as to axially extend over the edge of the opening 550a of the front cover 550 (in the front cover 550). It is necessary to push it to a position where the entire operation portion 571 of the button member 570 is inserted. Therefore, when the button member 570 is pushed to the third position, the edge of the opening 550a of the front cover 550 may be an obstacle to the pushing operation (ie, the edge of the opening 550a may be made to abut the player's hand). it can. Thereby, it can be suppressed that the button member 570 in the second position is carelessly pushed to the third position. As a result, it is possible to prevent the position of the operation end point from being changed to a desired rotational position (a set state is released (or released)) by an inadvertent pressing operation of the button member 570.

  Then, referring to FIGS. 30 and 31, switching device 600 is used to change (set) the operation end point of handle ring 540, and the rotational position of handle ring 540 with respect to the position of the operation end point. The adjustment method to be adjusted (return to the original rotation position) will be described.

  FIG. 30 and FIG. 31 are schematic views schematically showing the state of the turning operation of the handle device 51. In each drawing, the left figure is a front schematic view of the handle device 51, and the right figure is a handle It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the relationship between the rotation position of the ring 540, and the operation end point. In FIG. 30 and FIG. 31, the display of the black triangle (“」 ”) means the rotational position of the handle ring 540, and the display of“ [first position] or [second position] ”is a button The position of the member 570 is meant. The “initial position θ0” is the initial position of the handle ring 540, and the “maximum position θ max” is the maximum position at which the handle ring 540 can be pivoted in a state where the operation end point is not changed (set). The “operation end point” is an end point of the turning operation of the handle ring 540 formed by setting the switching device 600 in the engagement fixed state.

  As shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b), in the state where the button member 570 is in the first position, the switching device 600 is in the rotatable state (FIG. 25, FIG. 15 (a) and FIG. 15 (c)), the handle ring 540 can be pivoted in the range from the initial position θ0 to the maximum position θmax.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b), as a result of adjusting the turning position of the handle ring 540 according to the game state, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), the handle ring 540 is operated. When it is determined that the launch intensity of the gaming ball can be adjusted to a desired launch intensity by setting the position θ1, the player maintains the condition shown in FIG. 30 (b) while maintaining the condition shown in FIG. 30 (c). As shown, by pushing the button member 570, the button member 570 is set to the second position. Thereby, the switching device 600 is set in the engagement fixed state (see FIG. 26, FIG. 15 (b) and FIG. 15 (d)), and the operation end point is at the position corresponding to the operation position .theta.1 of the handle ring 540. Changed (set)

  Thus, according to the handle device 51, since the operation end point can be set, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), for example, the pivoting position of the handle ring 540 is returned to the initial position θ0 to take a break. Even if the game is interrupted, the original slide operation position (that is, the pivot position at which the launch intensity of the gaming ball is adjusted to the desired launch intensity and the operation position θ1 before interrupting the gaming machine) It can be stored as an "operation end point".

  Therefore, when adjusting the rotation position of the handle ring 540 to the original rotation position (that is, the operation position θ1 before interrupting the game) (when reproducing the states of FIG. 30 (b) and FIG. 30 (c)) If, as shown in FIG. 31 (b), the player turns the handle ring 540 to the operation end point (ie, the turn operation of the handle ring 540 is restricted by the operation end point, and so on). The rotation position of the handle ring 540 can be quickly and easily adjusted to the original rotation position (operation position θ1) until the rotation operation is not performed).

  For example, it is conceivable to provide a scale line along the movement locus of the handle ring 540 and turn the handle ring 540 with the scale line as a target position, but the handle ring may be compared with the method. It is not necessary to finely adjust while visually determining whether or not the rotational position of 540 matches the target position (scale line), and it is possible to accurately adjust to the desired rotational position. Further, according to the present embodiment, the pivoting operation may be performed to a position where the pivoting operation can not be performed, and the operation speed of the handle ring 540 can be increased because the target position is not passed. It is possible to quickly adjust to the desired rotational position (to quickly return to the original rotational position).

  In order to return the position of the operation end point to the maximum position θmax, in the state shown in FIG. 31 (a) or FIG. 31 (b), a pushing operation of pushing the button member 570 to a pushable position (third position) After performing the pressing operation, the button member 570 is returned to the first position by releasing the pressing operation, and as shown in FIG. 30A, the position of the operation end point can be returned to the maximum position θmax.

  Here, the player who changed (set) the operation end point ends the game, and as shown in FIG. 31A, the second player starts the game while the operation end point remains changed. In such a case, such a second player may suffer disadvantages. That is, the fact that the operation end point is changed means that the handle ring 540 can not be turned to the maximum position θmax as shown in FIG. 31 (b), and the operation end point is changed. If the second player is not aware of the presence of the game player, the game is played in a state where the game machine balls can not be fired at the maximum position θmax (maximum firing intensity), which is disadvantageous. Therefore, even in such a case, it is desirable that the second player can easily recognize that the position of the operation end point has been changed when starting the game.

  On the other hand, according to the handle device 51 of the present embodiment, as described above, it is played whether the position of the operation end point is changed (set) using the confirmation window 550b provided on the front cover 550. It is formed so that the person can easily confirm. Here, a confirmation structure using the confirmation window 550b will be described with reference to FIG.

  32 (a) and 32 (b) are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the handle device 51. In FIG. 32 (a), the button member 570 is in the first position in FIG. 32 (b). The state in which the button member 570 is in the second position is illustrated respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b), according to the handle device 51, the position of the operation end point is not changed (that is, the position of the operation end point coincides with the maximum position) The state shown in FIG. 32 (a) in which the button member 570 is in the first position, and the state shown in FIG. 32 (b) in which the position of the operation end point is changed (that is, the button member 570 is in the second position). And the pressing position of the button member 570 is different. Therefore, the player can identify whether or not the position of the operation end point has been changed based on the difference between the push-in positions of the button members 570. By suppressing the player from playing the game without noticing that the position of the operation end point has been changed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

  However, in the handle device 51 according to the present embodiment, the front cover 550 and the button member 570 protruding from the opening 550a of the front cover 550 are integrally formed to form one hemispherical body (FIG. 5). And FIG. 6), even if the button member 570 is pushed into the second position, the player can not clearly recognize the difference in the pushing amount of the button member 570 because one hemisphere is formed as a whole. There is a fear.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, depending on whether the position of the operation end point is changed (that is, whether the button member 570 is at the first position or the second position), the confirmation windows 550b and 554b are used. Since the form of the object to be viewed through is made different, the judgment criteria can be binarized, and the two states can be easily distinguished clearly. This allows the player to easily and reliably identify whether or not the position of the operation end point has been changed.

Specifically, as described above, in the button member 570, the outer peripheral surface of the inner fitting wall portion 577 is formed in black, while the outer peripheral surface of the operation portion 571 is formed in white. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32A, in the state where the button member 570 is in the first position, the form in which the player is allowed to visually recognize the player through the confirmation windows 550b and 554b of the front cover 550 is In the state where the button member 570 is in the second position while the outer peripheral surface (black) is used, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), the operation for allowing the player to visually recognize via the confirmation window 550b of the front cover 550 The outer peripheral surface (white) of the portion 571 can be used.
Thereby, the player can determine whether the button member 570 is disposed at the first position or the second position based on the difference in color visually recognized through the confirmation windows 550b and 554b (ie, the handle). Whether or not the position of the operation end point of the ring 540 has been changed can be easily identified.

  In this case, the inner fitting wall 577 of the button member 570 is inserted to the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical guide portion 554 of the front cover 550, and as shown in FIG. 32A, the button member 570 is at the first position. In this state, the outer peripheral surface of the inner fitting wall portion 577 faces the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical guide portion 554, so that the confirmation window 554b can be shielded by the inner fitting wall portion 577. That is, it is possible to make it difficult for light to be led out from inside the handle device 51 through the confirmation window 554b. Further, also in the path from the confirmation window 554b to the confirmation window 550b, such a path is disposed in the closed wall formed by the outer wall surface of the front cover 550 and the handle ring 540. It can be difficult for light to be led out through the Therefore, in the state where the button member 570 is at the first position, it is possible to further darken the form (black on the outer peripheral surface of the inner fitting wall 577) to be visually recognized by the player via the confirmation windows 550b and 554b.

  On the other hand, the operation portion 571 of the button member 570 is formed in a hemispherical shape, and as shown in FIG. 32B, when the button member 570 is in the second position, the outer peripheral surface of the operation portion 571 is a cylindrical guide portion Since it faces the inner peripheral surface of 554, a space opened outward (right side in FIG. 32B) can be formed below the confirmation window 554b (the outer peripheral surface side of the operation portion 571). That is, light can be introduced from the outside into the space between the confirmation window 554b and the confirmation window 550b from the space below the confirmation window 554b. Further, the outer peripheral surface itself of the operation unit 571 can also be in a state of being irradiated with light. Therefore, in the state where the button member 570 is in the second position, it is possible to further brighten the form (white on the outer peripheral surface of the operation unit 571) for allowing the player to visually recognize via the confirmation windows 550b and 554b.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), the button member 570 is in the second position, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), as shown in FIG. 32 (b). It is possible to further increase the difference in contrast between the form that the player visually recognizes in a certain state. This makes it easy to distinguish between the two states more clearly, and therefore allows the player to easily and reliably identify whether or not the position of the operation end point has been changed.

  Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 57. In the first embodiment, the case where the change of the operation end point and the release thereof are performed by the pressing operation of the button member 570 has been described, but the change of the operation end point and the release thereof in the second embodiment This is done by displacing the handle base 530 (handle ring 540). The same parts as those of the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 33 (a) is a top view of the handle device 2051 in the second embodiment, and FIG. 33 (b) is a front view of the handle device 2051. FIG. 34 is a side view of the handle device 2051 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXXII in FIG. In FIG. 33 (a) and FIG. 34, the front surface of the lower tray unit 15 is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the handle device 2051 includes a handle mount 2520, a handle base 530, a handle ring 2540, a front cover 2550, an operation / display piece 2570, and a switching device 2600 (from FIG. 40) and is projected from the front of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) in a horizontal attitude.

  As with the first embodiment, the handle mount 2520 and the handle base 530 have the back of the handle mount 2520 (the left side in FIG. 33A) fixed to the front of the lower tray unit 15, and one is an axis in the other. The handle base 530 is vertically displaceable integrally with the handle ring 2540 with respect to the handle mount 2520, with the supported portion being connected and centered on the pivotally supported portion (from FIG. 53) See Figure 55).

  In the handle device 2051 of the present embodiment, by displacing the handle base 530 in the vertical direction with respect to the handle mount 2520, the rotation of the handle ring 540 is restricted by the pressing of the handle restriction member 700 (regulation of return to the initial position). In addition to the fact that switching is possible (i.e., changing (setting) and releasing of the operation end point) of the state of the switching device 2600 (pivotable state or engaged fixed state) is also made executable.

  An operation and display piece 2570 is disposed on the handle mount 2520. The operation / use display piece 2570 is a member for displaying whether or not the position of the operation end point is changed (set), is formed as a rod-like body bent in an L shape, and is a side of the handle mount 2520 It extends from the top to the top.

  A shaft 2802 of a linear motion conversion member 2800 which is rotated according to the state (a rotatable state or an engageable state) of the switching device 2600 is projected to the side of the handle mounting base 2520, and the projection is The base end of the operation / use display piece 2570 is fixed to the shaft 2802 (the connecting square portion 2802a). Therefore, when the state of the switching device 2600 is switched and the shaft 2802 is rotated, the extended tip of the operation / use display piece 2570 is along the top surface of the handle mount 2520 in the front-rear direction (FIG. 33 (a) left-right direction) And is held at the first position or the second position depending on the state of the switching device 2600.

  On the upper surface of the handle mount 2520, a first scale portion S1 and a second scale portion S2 having a triangular shape in top view are displayed. The first scale portion S1 is a display indicating that the switching device 2600 is in the rotatable state (that is, the change of the operation end point is released), and the switch member 2590 (see FIG. 42) is in the first position. The extended tip of the operation / use display piece 2570 in the placed state is matched. The second scale portion S2 is a display indicating that the switching device 2600 is in the engagement fixed state (that is, the position of the operation end point is changed (set)), and the switch member 2590 is disposed at the second position. It coincides with the extended end of the operation / use display piece 2570 in the second state.

  Therefore, the player determines whether or not the position of the operation end point is changed based on the relationship between the extended tip of the operation / use display piece 2570 and the display (when the extended tip is aligned with the first scale portion S1 In this case, the operation end point is released, and the position of the operation end point can be easily recognized when the extended tip coincides with the second scale portion S2.

  In this case, since the first scale portion S1 and the second scale portion S2 are disposed on the upper surface side of the handle mount 2520 in the assembled state of the handle device 2051, the player facing the pachinko machine 10 to play the game For example, when starting a game, the positional relationship between the operation / use display piece 2570 and the first scale portion S1 and the second scale portion S2 can be easily viewed by the player.

  Here, the operation / use display piece 2570 also serves as an operation unit operated by the player in order to switch the switching device 2600 to the rotatable state or the engaged / fixed state. That is, in this embodiment, in addition to pushing the handle base 530 downward with respect to the handle mount 2520, the operation / displaying piece 2570 may be rotated about the shaft 2802 (the connecting square portion 2802a). Switching of the state of the switching device 2600 (a rotatable state or an engaged fixed state) can be performed.

  In this case, the operation / use display piece 2570 extends from the side surface of the left side (the lower side of FIG. 33A) to the upper surface (the front side of the paper surface of FIG. Therefore, even during the game (that is, even in the state in which the handle ring 2540 is turned by the right hand), the player can easily operate the operation / display piece 2570 with the reverse hand (ie, the left hand) It is possible to turn it. The switching structure of the switching device 2600 will be described later.

  The front cover 2550 is formed in a hemispherical shape that is convex forward (in the right direction in FIGS. 33A and 34), and is attached to the front surface of the handle ring 540.

  Next, the handle base 530 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a front perspective view of the handle mounting base 2520 and the handle base 530, corresponding to the front perspective view of the handle device 2051 in a state in which the handle ring 2540 and the front cover 2550 (both refer to FIGS. 33 and 34) are removed. Do.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the handle base 530 is formed in the same manner as the first embodiment. In the bearing portion 535, the switching device 2600 is rotatably inserted on the inner peripheral side (see FIG. 53). Similar to the switching device 600 in the first embodiment, the switching device 2600 is a member for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 2540, and allows relative rotation of the switching device 2600 with respect to the bearing 535. It is possible to switch between two states: a rotatable state and an engaged fixed state in which relative rotation is not possible.

  The switching device 2600 differs from the switching device 600 in the first embodiment in the formation positions of the biting surface 250 and the flank surface 260 (the biting space 251 and the relief space 261) (on the front side in the first embodiment). The other configuration is the same except that it is formed open (see FIG. 7) but is formed open on the back side in the second embodiment.

  Therefore, when the state of the switching device 2600 is in the rotatable state, the restricting protrusion 630 is pushed in the increasing direction by the handle side protrusion 546, so that the switching device 2600 also increases in the bearing 535. It is pivoted. On the other hand, when the state of the switching device 2600 is switched to the engaged fixed state, relative rotation with respect to the bearing portion 535 of the switching device 2600 is disabled (fixed to the bearing portion 535). The movement of the 546 in the increasing direction is restricted by the restriction protrusion 630. Thus, the turning operation of the handle ring 2540 in the increasing direction is restricted. That is, the position (rotational position) at which the state of the switching device 2600 is switched from the rotatable state to the engaged and fixed state is taken as the operation end position of the handle ring 2540.

  Next, the handle ring 2540 will be described with reference to FIG. 36 is a rear perspective view of handle ring 2540. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 36, the handle ring 2540 has the handle ring of the first embodiment except that the inner diameter of the central hole 2544a is different (it is smaller than the inner diameter of the central hole 544a in the first embodiment). It is formed identical to 540.

  Thus, a flat surface is secured on the back surface of the main driving gear 544 by reducing the inner diameter of the central hole 2544a. In the second embodiment, by sliding on the flat surface of the back surface of the main driving gear 544, axial movement is restricted by the flat surface of the back surface of the main driving gear 544 while permitting rotation of the switching device 600. By doing this, the switching device 600 is restricted from coming out of the inside of the bearing 535 to the front side (see FIG. 53).

  The handle shaft support 2551a (see FIG. 37) of the front cover 2550 is inserted into the central hole 2544a, whereby the handle ring 2540 is rotatably held by the handle base 530 via the front cover 2550. (See FIG. 53).

  Next, the front cover 2550 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a rear perspective view of the front cover 550. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 37, the front cover 2550 is formed in the shape of a hemispherical container in which the inside is recessed to the front side (that is, the back side is opened), and the inner wall surface corresponding to the top has a cylindrical shaft. The support base 2551 is erected toward the back side. A handle shaft support body 2551 a for supporting the handle ring 2540 is erected on the back end side of the erected end of the pivotal support base 2551.

  The outer diameter of the handle shaft support 2551a is set to a size slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the central hole 2544a of the handle ring 2540, thereby pivotally supporting the handle ring 2540. The outer diameter of the handle shaft support 2551 a is smaller than the outer diameter of the support base 2551, and a stepped surface is formed at the connection portion of the two. By this step surface, the handle ring 2540 (the main driving gear 544 and the disc portion 541) is sandwiched between the switching device 2600 and the movement in the axial direction is restricted while permitting the rotation of the handle ring 2540 (see FIG. 53). ).

  Next, the switching device 2600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 40. Fig.38 (a) is a front view of the switching apparatus 2600, FIG.38 (b) is a side view of the switching apparatus 2600 in the arrow XXXVIIIb direction view of FIG.38 (a), and FIG.38 (c) is It is a rear view of the switching apparatus 2600 in the arrow XXXVIIIc direction view of FIG.38 (b). 39 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the switching device 2600 taken along line XXXIXa-XXXIXa of FIG. 38 (a), and FIG. 39 (b) is a side view of the switching device 2600 in the direction of arrow XXXIXb of FIG. FIG. In FIGS. 38 and 39, the biting balls 670a and 670b, the pushing side biasing spring 680 and the biting side biasing spring 690 are not shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the switching device 2600 is the same as the first embodiment except for the formation positions of the biting surface 650 and the flank surface 660 formed by recessing the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 610. It is formed identical to the switching device 600.

  Specifically, in the first embodiment, the flank surface 660 is continuously provided on the front surface of the main body portion 610, and the biting surface 650 is disposed on the back side of the flank surface 660 (the back surface side of the main body portion 610). Although the clearance space 661 and the biting space 651 are formed as the space opened on the front side of the main body 610 (see FIGS. 13 and 14), in the second embodiment, the clearance surface 660 is the space of the main body 610. A bite surface 650 is disposed on the back side (the lower side surface in FIG. 39A) and on the back side of the flank surface 660 (the front side of the main body 610). The insertion space 651 is formed as a space opened on the back side (the lower side in FIG. 39A) of the main body 610. Therefore, the pushing piece 2583 for pushing in the biting balls 670a and 670b is disposed on the back side of the main body portion 610 (see FIG. 53).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the pivotable state and the restricted and fixed state of the switching device 2600 and the switching structure of these two states will be described.

  FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (b) are cross-sectional views of the switching device 2600, and correspond to the cross section taken along line XXXIXa-XXXVIXa of FIG. 38 (a). Fig. 40 (c) is a back view of the switching device 2600 in the direction of arrow XLc in Fig. 40 (a), and Fig. 40 (d) is a back of the switching device 2600 in the direction of arrow XLd in Fig. 40 (b). FIG.

  In FIG. 40, a state in which the switching device 2600 is attached (inserted) to the bearing 535 of the handle base 530 is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (c), the entrapment spheres 670a and 670b are disposed in the relief space 661 in FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (d). The state where 670b is arranged in the biting space 651 is illustrated respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the switching device 2600 works in the same manner as the switching device 600 in the first embodiment. That is, as shown in FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (c), the entrained spheres 670a and 670b are disposed in the relief space 661 (ie, the entrained spheres 670a and 670b by the push-in piece 2583 of the push-in member 2580). In the state in which the inner space is not pushed into the biting space 651 (see FIG. 53), as in the case of the first embodiment, the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 and the facing of the biting surface 650 and the biting Since biting with the embedded spheres 670a and 670b is not formed, the switching device 2600 (main body portion 610) is set in a rotatable state, and the bearing is also directed in any direction of arrows A and B shown in FIG. It is rotatable relative to the portion 535.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (d), the entrained spheres 670a and 670b are disposed in the entrapment space 651 (ie, the entrained sphere 670a, In the state where the 670b is pushed into the biting space 651 (see FIG. 54), the inner peripheral surface of the bearing 535 is applied by the biasing force of the biting side biasing spring 690 as in the first embodiment. The biting balls 670a and 670b are bitten into the clearance gradually decreasing in the circumferential direction between the facing of the biting surface 650 and the arrow A shown in FIG. 40 (d) by the switching device 2600 (body part 610). When it is intended to turn in the direction (or the B direction), the circumferential end portion of the biting surface 650 (FIG. 15 (d) below the turning direction backward side (the turning direction delay side) of the main body 610 side( (The upper side) acts to further bite the biting ball 670b (or biting ball 670a) into engagement with the inner circumferential surface of the bearing 535, thereby switching the switching device 2600 (the bearing 535). The relative rotation of the main body 610) in the arrow A direction (or the B direction) is blocked.

  Next, the pushing member 2580 will be described with reference to FIG. 41 (a) is a front view of the pushing member 2580, FIG. 41 (b) is a side view of the pushing member 2580 in the arrow XLIb direction view of FIG. 41 (a), and FIG. 41 (c) is It is sectional drawing of the pushing member 2580 in the XIIc-XLIc line | wire of Fig.41 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 41, the push-in member 2580 includes a disc-like base body 2581 and a connecting shaft 2582 and a push-in piece 2583 disposed on the front of the base body 2581. It is inserted in 535 and disposed between the back side of the switching device 2600 and the front side of the switch member 2590 (see FIG. 53). The connecting shaft 2582 and the pushing piece 2583 are integrally formed on the base body 2581.

  The outer diameter dimension of the base body 2581 is set to a size slightly smaller than the inner diameter dimension of the bearing portion 535 of the handle base 530, and is pushed to the switch member 2590 from the rear side to the front side (switching device 600). It is axially slidable in the bearing 535 in a direction (see FIGS. 53 to 55).

  The connecting shaft 2582 is a portion formed as a shaft having a trapezoidal cross section which is inserted into the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 2600 (see FIG. 53 to FIG. 55), and extends on the axis of the base body 2581 (see FIG. That is, they are formed concentrically with the base body 2581). The connection shaft 2582 is formed as a cross-sectional trapezoidal hole corresponding to the connection hole 620 of the switching device 2600. Accordingly, the connecting shaft 2582 is coupled to the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 2600 so as to be relatively movable in the axial direction and to be relatively rotatable in the circumferential direction.

  In addition to the fact that the connecting shaft 2582 and the connecting hole 620 can be connected so as not to be able to rotate relative to each other by forming the connecting shaft 2582 as a shaft having a trapezoidal cross section, positioning of both rotating direction positions (phases) It can be done (the two can regulate the phase that can be combined at only one place). That is, in the assembly process of the handle device 2051, after the rotational direction position of the push-in piece 2583 is made to coincide with the relief space 661 of the switching device 2600, the connecting shaft 2582 and the connecting hole 620 need to be connected. (See FIGS. 53 to 55) In the present embodiment, since the rotational direction position (phase) of the connecting shaft 2582 and the connecting hole 620 is positioned at one position, the rotational direction position is incorrect (the pushing piece 2583). It is possible to avoid coupling in such a state that the rotational direction position of the two does not coincide with the relief space 661 of the switching device 2600. As a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the assembly operation and to suppress the assembly failure.

  The push-in piece 2583 is a part for pushing the biting balls 670a and 670b of the switching device 2600 into the biting space 651 (see FIGS. 53 to 55), and on the axis of the base body 2581 on the side of the connecting shaft 2582. It is formed in the shape of a plate having a cross-sectional shape corresponding to the biting space 651 of the switching device 2600 (that is, a shape which can be inserted into the biting space 651). Thereby, when the base body 2581 is pushed from the back side toward the switching device 2600 by the switch member 2590, the extended tip end face of the pushing piece 2583 pushes the bit balls 670a and 670b into the biting space 651.

  In addition, as described above, in the pushing member 2580, the connecting shaft 2582 is coupled to the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 2600 so that relative rotation is impossible. Therefore, since the pushing member 2580 and the switching device 2600 are integrally rotated through the connection of the connecting shaft 2582 and the connecting hole 620, the phase of the pushing piece 2583 and the relief space 661 are always matched. Can maintain That is, even when the switching device 2600 is turned to any rotational position (phase) with respect to the handle base 530 (bearing portion 535), when the switching device 2600 is pushed by the switch member 2590 The pieces 2583 allow the pinching balls 670 a, 670 b of the switching device 2600 to be pushed into the pinching space 651.

  Next, the switch member 2590 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 47. 42 (a) is a front view of the switch member 2590, FIG. 42 (b) is a side view of the switch member 2590 in the direction of the arrow XLIIb of FIG. 42 (a), and FIG. 42 (c) is It is sectional drawing of the switch member 2590 in the XLIIc-XLIIc line | wire of Fig.42 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 42, the switch member 2590 includes a cylindrical base body 2591, a cylindrical transmission rod 2592 inserted on the inner peripheral side of the base body 2591, and the transmission rod 2592 and the base body 2591. And a transmission rod biasing spring 2593 which is interposed in an elastically compressed state and applies an elastic recovery force in the extension direction to the transmission rod 2592, and the transmission rod 2592 has a first position and a second position. It is formed so as to be holdable at two positions (see FIG. 47).

  FIG. 43 (a) is a front view of the base body 2591. FIG. 43 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the base body 2591 taken along line XLIIIb-XLIIIb of FIG. 43 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 43, the base member 2591 is a portion to be fitted and fixed to the bearing portion 535 of the handle base 530, and an insertion hole 2591a is formed through at the center. A guide groove 2591b, which is a groove for holding the transmission rod 2592 at two positions, the first position or the second position, is recessed on the inner peripheral surface of the insertion hole 2591a. The holding structure of the transmission rod 2592 using the guide groove 2591b will be described later.

  Fig.44 (a) is a side view of the transmission rod 2592, FIG.44 (b) is sectional drawing of the transmission rod 2592 in the XLIVb-XLIVb line | wire of Fig.44 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 44, the transmission rod 2592 is a member inserted through the insertion hole 2591a (see FIG. 43) of the base body 2591 and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a circular cross section. The guide projections 2592a are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical body so as to protrude from the plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment). The guide protrusions 2592a are portions for moving along the guide grooves 2591b of the base body 2591. The guide protrusions 2592a are formed in the same shape and arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (120 degrees interval in this embodiment). .

  A flange-like flange portion 2591b is formed to project radially outward from the outer peripheral surface on one side (the lower side in FIG. 44A) of the transfer rod 2592 in the axial direction. The flange portion 2591 b functions as a seating surface for receiving a biasing force of a transmission rod biasing spring 2593 (see FIG. 42) interposed between the base body 2591 and the transmission rod 2592. That is, the transmission rod 2592 is always urged in the direction in which the flange portion 2592b is separated from the base body 2591 (downward in FIG. 42B) by the elastic recovery force in the extension direction of the transmission rod urging spring 2593. ing.

  Both ends in the axial direction (the upper and lower sides in FIG. 44A) of the transmission rod 2592 are formed as hemispherical spherical surfaces. In particular, the end (lower side in FIG. 44A) of the transmission rod 2592 on which the flange portion 2591b is formed is formed as a hemispherical spherical surface, thereby stably moving (sliding) the transmission rod 2592 be able to. That is, in the present embodiment, while the transmission rod 2592 is moved (slided) in a linear direction along the insertion hole 2591 a of the base body 2591, the linear motion conversion member 2800 pressing the transmission rod 2592 is a bearing portion It is a structure displaced about (shaft 2802 and bearings 2529), and the relative position relationship between the two is indeterminate, the pressing surface 2804 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is formed as a plane, and the end of the transmission rod 2592 The portion is formed as a spherical surface that bulges toward the pressing surface portion 2804 to move the contact position of the two along with the displacement centering on the shaft support portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) of the linear motion conversion member 2800, A force component for moving (sliding) the transmission rod 2592 linearly along the insertion hole 2591a of the base body 2591 can be continuously generated. . Thus, clogging of the transmission rod 2592 in the insertion hole 2591a can be suppressed, and the transfer rod 2592 can be stably moved.

  Further, when the end portion (upper side in FIG. 44A) of the transmission rod 2592 opposite to the side on which the flange portion 2592b is formed is formed as a hemispherical spherical surface, when the handle ring 2540 is turned. Thus, it is possible to improve the operation feeling of the above and the durability of the switching device 2600. That is, while the base body 2581 of the push-in member 2580 is a member which is rotated along with the turning operation of the handle ring 2540, the end of the transmission rod 2592 is always in contact with the back surface of the base body 2581. There is. Therefore, by making the end of the transmission rod 2592 hemispherical, the contact area between the transmission rod 2592 and the back surface of the base body 2581 can be reduced while securing the rigidity of the transmission rod 2592. The rotation resistance generated between the base body 2581 and the rear surface can be reduced, and as a result, the feeling of operation at the time of rotating the handle ring 540 can be improved. Further, since the reaction force acting on the transmission rod 2592 can be reduced when the base body 2581 is rotated, the transmission rod 2592 is rotated by the reaction force, and the guide projection 2592a or the guide groove 2591b (FIG. 44 and FIG. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of breakage (see FIG. 45).

  FIG. 45 is a plan development view illustrating the inner peripheral surface of the insertion hole 2591a of the base body 2591 in a plan view. In FIG. 45, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate the understanding, the reference numerals to the respective portions of the guide groove 2591b are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 45, the guide groove 2591b of the base body 2591 is formed to have periodicity along the circumferential direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 45) of the insertion hole 2591a. Specifically, the guide groove 2591 b has a shape in which a range XLVI corresponding to a range of a central angle of 120 degrees is repeated in the circumferential direction (a shape in which three shapes of the range XLVI are arranged in the circumferential direction). Thus, the three guiding protrusions 2592a of the transmission rod 2592 are guided by the guiding grooves 2591b in the respective different ranges XLVI.

  Next, referring to FIG. 46, the guide projection 2592a of the transfer rod 2592 is guided by the guide groove 2591b of the base body 2591 to hold the switch member 2590 (transfer rod 2592) in the first position or the second position. Will be described. In this description, FIGS. 47 and 53 to 55 will be referred to as appropriate.

  FIG. 46 is a partially enlarged development view of the guide groove 2591b, which is a partially enlarged view of a range XLVI in FIG. 47 (a) through 47 (c) are side views of the switch member 2590. FIG. 47 (a) corresponds to a state in which the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is disposed at the first position and the pushing member 2580 is not pushed (see FIG. 53), FIG. 47 (c). Corresponds to a state in which the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is disposed at the second position and the pushing member 2580 is pushed. Further, FIG. 47 (b) shows a state in which the switch member 2590 (transfer rod 2592) is disposed at a third position through which it transits from the first position to the second position (or from the second position to the first position). Corresponds to

  As shown in FIG. 46, in the state where the guide projection 2592a is positioned at the position P1 of the guide groove 2591b, the switch member 2590 is arranged such that the transmission rod 2592 is at the first position (see FIG. 47A). In this state, the guide protrusion 2592a is pressed against the first wall Wa of the guide groove 2591b by the biasing force of the transmission rod biasing spring 2593 and held at the position P1, whereby the transmission rod 2592 is held at the first position. Ru.

  In this state, the transmission rod 2592 is not protruded from the front of the base body 2591 and the push-in member 2580 is not pushed to the switching device 2600 side (see FIG. 53). 670a and 670b are disposed in the relief space 661 and set to be rotatable.

  From the state where the guide projection 2592a is located at the position P1 of the guide groove 2591b (that is, the state where the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the first position (see FIGS. 47A and 53)), the handle ring 540 (handle base 530). Is displaced downward and the transmission rod 2592 is pushed by the linear motion conversion member 2800 from the back side toward the push-in member 2580 (ie, in the direction of arrow G in FIG. 47A). Is guided along the shape of (path L1), and abuts against the rising inclined wall portion Wb. When the handle ring 540 is further displaced downward, and the transmission rod 2592 is further pushed by the linear motion conversion member 2800 from the rear side toward the push member 2580, the guide projection 2592a is along the upward inclined wall portion Wb of the guide groove 2591b. It is guided (path L2), and abuts on the guide regulation wall portion Wc at the position Pa. This state corresponds to the state where the transfer rod 2592 is disposed at the third position (see FIGS. 47 (b) and 55).

  After the guide projection 2592a abuts against the guide restriction wall Wc at the position Pa of the guide groove 2591b (see FIGS. 47 (b) and 55), the player loosens the operating force, whereby the handle ring 540 (handle base 530). Is released and the linear motion conversion member 2800 is retracted (see FIG. 55), the transmission rod 2592 is pulled back by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593 (FIG. 47 (b), arrow H). direction). As a result, the guide projection 2592a is guided along the shape of the guide groove 2591b (path L3) and abuts on the downward sloping wall Wd and is guided along the downward sloping wall Wd to reach the position P2 (path L4).

  In the state where the guide projection 2592a is positioned at the position P2 of the guide groove 2591b, the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the second position (see FIGS. 47 (c) and 55). In this state, the guide protrusion 2592a is pressed against the second wall portion We by the biasing force of the transmission rod biasing spring 2593 and held at the position P2, whereby the transmission rod 2592 is held at the second position.

  Further, in this state, the push rod 2592 is pushed toward the switching device 2600 by the transmission rod 2592 protruding from the front of the base body 2591 (see FIG. 55). The intruding spheres 670a and 670b are pushed into the biting space 651 and set in the engaged fixed state.

  From the state where the guide projection 2592a is located at the position P2 of the guide groove 2591b (ie, the state where the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the second position (see FIGS. 47 (c) and 55)), the handle ring 540 (handle base 530). Is displaced downward, and the transmission rod 2592 is pushed by the linear motion conversion member 2800 from the back side toward the push-in member 2580 (that is, in the direction of arrow G in FIG. 47C). It is guided along the shape (path L5) and abuts against the rising inclined wall Wf The handle ring 540 is further displaced downward, and the transmission rod 2592 is further pushed by the linear motion conversion member 2800 from the back side toward the pushing member 2580 Then, the guide projection 2592a is guided along the rising and sloping wall portion Wf (path L6), and at the position Pb Abuts the Seikabe unit Wg. That is, the transmission rod 2592 is disposed in the third position (see FIG. 47 (b) and FIG. 54).

  After the guide projection 2592a abuts against the guide regulation wall Wg at the position Pb of the guide groove 2591b (see FIGS. 47 (b) and 54), the player loosens the operating force, thereby the handle ring 540 (handle base 530). Is released and the linear motion conversion member 2800 is retracted (see FIG. 55), the transmission rod 2592 is pulled back by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593 (FIG. 47 (b), arrow H). direction). As a result, the guide projection 2592a is guided along the shape of the guide groove 2591b (path L7) and abuts on the downward sloping wall Wh and is guided along the downward sloping wall Wh to reach the position P1 (path L8). That is, the transmission rod 2592 is disposed (returned) to the first position (see FIGS. 47 (a) and 53).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 48 to 52, the handle mount 2520 and the linear motion conversion member 2800 will be described. FIG. 48 is a rear perspective view of handle base 530, handle mount 2520 and linear motion conversion member 2800 in the disassembled state, and FIG. 49 is an assembled view of handle base 530, handle mount 2520 and linear movement conversion member 2800. It is a rear perspective view.

  48 and 49 show a state where the variable resistor and the firing stop switch operation unit 440 are removed, and in FIG. 48, the positional relationship between the shaft 563 and the bearing 523 and the shaft 2802 and the bearing 2529. Each is schematically illustrated using a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, a linear motion conversion member 2800 is disposed on the handle mount 2520 so as to face the back side of the handle base 530. The linear motion conversion member 2800 is configured such that the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is located on the back side with displacement of the handle base 530 (displacement downward about the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523)) relative to the handle mount 2520. 53 to 55, and is disposed on the handle mount 2520 so as to allow displacement about the pivot portion (shaft 2802 and bearing 2529). Ru. Now, with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51, the handle mount 2520 will be described.

  FIG. 50 is a perspective view of the handle mount 2520 in an exploded state. 51 (a) is a perspective view of the handle mount 2520 in an assembled state, and FIG. 51 (b) is an inner side view of the first main body 2520a.

  As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51, the handle mount 2520 (the first main body 2520a and the second main body 2520b) is different from the handle mount 520 (the first main body 520a and the second main body 520b) in the first embodiment, The other configuration is the same except that a bearing 2529 is additionally provided (added).

  The bearing 2529 is a bearing (recess) for pivotally supporting the shaft 2802 of the linear motion conversion member 2800, and is provided on the inner wall surface of the first main body 2520a and the second main body 2520b, respectively. A pair is disposed to face each other. The shaft 2802 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is pivotally supported by the bearing 2529, so that the linear motion conversion member 2800 is displaced (rocked) with respect to the handle mounting base 2520 centering on the pivotally supported portion (fulcrum) , And rotation) (see FIGS. 53 to 55).

  A locking claw 2529a protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the bearing 2529 on one side (the first main body 2520a side) of the pair of bearings 2529. The end portion of a linear motion conversion member biasing spring 2890 for applying a biasing force to the linear motion conversion member 2800 is locked to the locking claw portion 2529a (see FIG. 48). Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), the bearing portion 2529 of the other (the second main body 2520b side) of the bearing portions 2529 of the pair of bearing portions 2529 has a handle support hole 2520 (second It is formed penetrating the wall surface of the main body 2520b). Thus, the end of the shaft portion 2802 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is protruded from the wall surface of the handle mount 2520 to the outside (see FIG. 49).

  Referring back to FIGS. 48 and 49, description will be made. The linear motion conversion member 2800 is used to push the switch member 2590 toward the push-in member 2580 in accordance with the displacement centering on the shaft support portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523) of the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mount 2520. It is a member (see FIGS. 53 to 55), and is disposed in a posture in which the shafts 563 and 2802 are parallel to each other below the boss member 560 while facing the back side of the handle base 530.

  The boss member 560 is formed in a hollow shape, the projecting portion 562 of which has an opening at the lower side, and the linear motion conversion member 2800 is disposed below the boss member 560 so that it is in the projecting portion 562 of the boss member 560. The space to be formed is used as a space for displacing the pressing surface 2804 (see FIG. 53). Thereby, the linear motion conversion member 2800 can be enlarged even in a limited space in the handle mount 2520. Here, with reference to FIG. 52, the detailed configuration of the linear motion conversion member 2800 will be described.

  52 (a) is a side view of the linear motion conversion member 2800 in the arrow LIIa direction view of FIG. 48, and FIG. 52 (b) is a linear movement conversion member 2800 in the arrow LIIb direction view of FIG. 52 (a). FIG. 52 (c) is a front view, and is a side view of the linear motion conversion member 2800 in the arrow LIIc direction view of FIG. 52 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 52, the linear motion conversion member 2800 has a cylindrical main body 2801, a shaft 2802 concentrically extending from both ends of the main body 2801, and a projection from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 2802. Interlocking surface portion 2803, a pressing surface portion 2804 and a locking claw portion 2805, which are integrally formed.

  The shaft 2802 is a portion pivotally supported by the bearing 2529 of the handle mount 2520, and has a smaller diameter than the main body 2801. Therefore, a step surface is formed at the connecting portion between the main body 2801 and the shaft 2802, and the step surface abuts on the end face of the bearing 2529 of the handle mount 2520 (see FIG. 48). Are positioned left and right (in the axial direction of the main body 2801) with respect to the handle mount 2520.

  The shaft 2802 of one of the pair of shafts 2802 (the side of the second main body 2520b and the left side of FIG. 52 (b)) is the shaft of the other (the side of the first main body 2520a and the right side of FIG. 52 (b)). The axial length dimension is increased relative to 2802. In the assembled state of the handle device 2051, the end of one shaft 2802 is projected outward from the wall surface of the second main body 2520b (see FIG. 49). A connecting square portion 2802a having a rectangular cross section is formed at an end of the one projecting shaft 2802. The base of the operation / displaying piece 2570 is fixed to the connecting square portion 2802a so as not to be relatively rotatable. (See Figure 34).

  The interlocking surface portion 2803 and the pressing surface portion 2804 are flat portions extending radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 2801, and the plate surface is parallel to the extending direction of the shaft 2802. As shown in FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (c), they are arranged in different postures from each other.

  The phases of these two are set as follows. That is, when the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is in the first position in the assembled state of the handle device 2051, the end of the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is the front surface of the pressing surface 2804 (front surface, FIG. (B) The front surface of the drawing is abutted, and the extended end (the lower end of FIG. 52B) of the interlocking surface 2803 is abutted on the back surface of the variable resistor (not shown) When the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is in the second position, the end of the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 abuts against the front surface of the pressing surface 2804, and The extended end of the interlocking surface 2803 is projected from the lower mating surface 528 of the handle mounting portion 2520 toward the handle base 530 (see FIG. 55).

  Therefore, as described later, when the handle base 530 is pushed downward with respect to the handle mounting base 2520 centering on the shaft support portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523), the extended end of the interlocking surface portion 2803 is a variable resistance It is pushed back (back side, for example, left direction in FIG. 53) by the back surface of the container (not shown). As described above, in the present embodiment, the back surface of the variable resistor is used as a portion for pushing back the extended tip of the interlocking surface portion 2803. Thus, there is no need to secure a flat surface for pushing back the extended end of the interlocking surface portion 2803 on the back side of the handle base 530, so that the handle base 530 (handle device 2051) can be miniaturized.

  Further, the rear surface of the variable resistor is projected on the rear surface side of the handle base 530, and the extended tip of the interlocking surface 2803 can be pushed back at a position closer to the shaft 2802. It can be made larger. In this case, in a structure in which a flat surface for pushing back the extending end of the interlocking surface portion 2803 is further provided on the back side of the handle base 530, the flat surface is projected to the same position as the back surface of the variable resistor If it is attempted to provide at the position), only the portion where the flat surface is provided becomes thick, so that the thickness of the handle base 530 becomes partially uneven, which leads to the deterioration of the yield at the time of injection molding. On the other hand, with the structure using the back surface of the variable resistor, the thickness of the handle base 530 can be made uniform throughout, so that the yield at the time of injection molding can be improved.

  The locking claw portion 2805 is a portion for locking the end of the linear motion conversion member biasing spring 2890 (see FIG. 53), and is formed in a bent hook shape. In addition, the linear motion conversion member biasing spring 2890 is formed as a torsion spring, and applies a biasing force in the clockwise (clockwise) direction to the linear motion conversion member 2801 in a side view in FIG. 52 (a). Thus, the linear motion conversion member 2801 is maintained in a state in which the front surface of the pressing surface 2804 is in contact with the end of the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590.

  Then, referring to FIGS. 53 to 55, downward displacement (depression operation) centering on the pivoting portion of the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mount 2520 enables the switching device 2600 to be pivotable or engaged. The switching structure for switching to the state will be described. In the description of this switching structure, FIG. 56 is referred to as appropriate.

  53 to 55 are partial cross-sectional side views of the handle device 2051, and FIGS. 53 and 55 illustrate a state before the handle base 530 is operated to be pushed downward with respect to the handle mount 2520. 54, the state in which the handle base 530 is operated to be pressed downward with respect to the handle mount 2520 is illustrated.

  FIGS. 53, 54 and 55 correspond to the state where the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the first position, the third position and the second position, respectively. 53 to 55, a state in which the second main body 2520b of the handle mount 2520 is removed is illustrated, and the wiring of each component is not illustrated.

56 (a) and 57 (a) are partially enlarged side views of the handle device 2051, and FIGS. 56 (b) and 57 (b) are partially enlarged top views of the handle device 2051. 56 (a) and 56 (b) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 53 in a state where the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the first position, and FIG. And FIG. 57 (b) shows the state where the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the second position, and corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 55, as shown in FIG. In the state where the rod 2592) is in the first position, since the tip end of the transmission rod 2592 is not protruded from the front surface (front surface, right side surface in FIG. 53) of the base body 2591 (see FIG. 47A) The push-in piece 2583 of the push-in member 2580 is a relief space 66 of the switching device 2600 because the push-in piece 2580 of the push-in member 2580 is not pushed by the transmission rod 2592 and disposed at a position retracted to the back side (left side in FIG. Placed in 1. Therefore, in the switching device 2600, the biting balls 670a and 670b are disposed in the relief space 661 by the biasing force of the pushing side biasing spring 680, and thus, it is possible to rotate relative to the bearing 535 The state is set (see FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (c)).

  In this manner, in the state where switching device 2600 is set to be rotatable (in the state where switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is in the first position as shown in FIG. 53), switching device 2600 is mounted on bearing 535 Since the operation end point is not changed (set), the handle ring 2540 increases from the initial position θ0 to the operation position θ1 in the same manner as in the first embodiment. When the rotation operation is performed, the handle side protrusion 546 of the handle ring 2540 pushes the restriction protrusion 630 of the switching device 2600 in the increasing direction, thereby interlocking the switching device 2600 with the handle ring 2540 and rotating the switching device 2600 in the increasing direction. (See FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b)).

  On the other hand, when the handle ring 540 is turned in the decreasing direction, as in the first embodiment, the switching device 2600 is operated by the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 539 (see FIG. 35). Following the and in the decreasing direction. That is, when the handle ring 2540 is rotated in the decreasing direction from the operation position θ1 to the initial position θ0, the switching device 2600 is also rotated in the decreasing direction by the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 539, and the regulating projection Positioned at a pivot position where the handle 630 abuts on the handle-side protrusion 546 (see FIGS. 28A and 28B).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 53, in the state where the switching device 2600 is set to be rotatable (the switch member 2590 (transfer rod 2592) is in the first position), the handle ring 2540 is in the increasing direction or the decreasing direction. In either of the directions, the switching device 2600 is interlocked (synchronized) and rotated, and the rotational positions (phases) of the handle rings 2540 and the switching device 2600 are matched ( 28 (a) and 28 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 53, when the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is in the first position, the transmission rod 2592 is projected to the back side (the left side in FIG. 53), Since the pressing surface 2804 is also retracted backward, the linear motion conversion member 2800 is turned counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 53 about the shaft 2802. Thus, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), the operation / use display piece 2570 is also counterclockwise in FIG. 56 (a) with its base end (that is, the connecting square portion 2802a on the shaft 2802 of the linear motion conversion member 2800) as a center. As a result, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the extended display tip of the operation / combination display piece 2570 is the first scale portion S 1 and the second scale portion The first scale portion S1 of S2 is matched (pointing to the first scale portion S1).

  Therefore, the switch member 2590 is disposed at the first position based on the relationship between the operation / use display piece 2570 and the both scale parts S1 and S2 (ie, the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 2540 is changed) Can be easily identified.

  From the state shown in FIG. 53, when the handle base 530 is pushed downward with respect to the handle support 520 (center of the shaft 563 and the bearing 523) with respect to the handle mount 520, extension of the interlocking surface portion 2803 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 The front end is slid along the rear surface of the variable resistor (not shown) of the handle base 530 to be retracted toward the rear side (left side in FIG. 53), and the linear motion conversion member 2800 moves the shaft 2802 It is turned clockwise in FIG. 53 as a center.

  Thereby, the pressing surface 2804 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is advanced toward the front side (the right side in FIG. 53), and the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is pushed toward the pushing member 2580 by the pressing surface 2804. As shown in FIG. 54, the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the third position.

  From the state shown in FIG. 54, the player depresses the handle base 530 downward to loosen the operating force to release the downward displacement of the handle base 530 (ie, the handle base 530 is displaced upward and is horizontal). As shown in FIG. 55, the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is pulled back by the biasing force of the transmission rod biasing spring 2593 (see FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c)). , Second position (see FIG. 55).

  As shown in FIG. 55, when the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is in the second position (from the first position to the second position after passing the third position), the tip of the transmission rod 2592 is A position where the push-in member 2580 is advanced (pushed in) to the front side (right side in FIG. 55) by protruding from the front (front side, right side in FIG. 55) of the base body 2591 (see FIG. Therefore, the switching device 2600 has the biting balls 670a and 670b placed in the biting space 651 (ie, the pushing pieces 2583 of the pushing members 2580 hold the biting balls 670a and 670b in the biting space 651). (Pushed in), thereby setting the engaged fixed state (refer to FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (d)) which can not be rotated relative to the bearing 535.

  In the state where the switching device 2600 is set in the engaged fixed state, as described above, the biting balls 670a and 670b gradually decrease in the circumferential direction between the opposing surfaces of the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 535 and the biting surface 650. The rotation of the switching device 2600 (main body portion 610) with respect to the bearing portion 535 is restricted (blocked) by being caught in the gap.

  Therefore, when the handle ring 2540 is turned to the operation position θ1 (see FIG. 28B), the handle base 530 is pushed downward with respect to the handle mount 2520, and the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 Switching position from the first position to the second position, the switching device 2600 is set in the engagement fixed state, and the switching position of the switching device 2600 corresponds to the operation position θ1 (ie, the handle base 530 is the handle mount As a result of the pressing operation on 2520, the transmission rod 2592 can be fixed at the pivot position at the time when the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the second position (see FIG. 28C).

  As described above, when the switching device 2600 is set in the engagement fixed state and the rotation position is fixed, the switching device 2600 rotates the steering wheel 2540 even if the steering wheel 2540 is rotated in the decreasing direction. It is not interlocked (synchronized) with the movement, and is held at the rotational position corresponding to the operation position θ1 (see FIGS. 29A and 21B). That is, the handle ring 2540 can be turned in the decreasing direction and the operating direction independently of the switching device 2600 (see FIG. 29A).

  In this case, for example, when the switching device 2600 is held (fixed) at the rotational position corresponding to the operation position θ1 (see FIG. 29B), the handle ring 2540 returned to the initial position θ0 is increased. In the case of turning to the turning position, the turning position θ1 is the end point of the turning operation. That is, when the turning operation of the handle ring 2540 in the increasing direction reaches the operation position θ1, the handle side protrusion 546 is abutted against the restricting protrusion 630, and the turning operation in the further increasing direction is restricted. (See FIG. 28 (c)).

  As shown in FIG. 55, when the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is in the second position, the transmission rod 2592 is pushed to the front side (right side in FIG. 55). Since the pressing surface 2804 is also advanced to the front side, the linear motion conversion member 2800 is turned clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 55 about the shaft 2802. Thus, as shown in FIG. 57 (a), the operation / use display piece 2570 is also centered on its base end (ie, the connecting square portion 2802a on the shaft 2802 of the linear motion conversion member 2800) in FIG. As a result, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the extended display tip of the operation / combination display piece 2570 is the first scale portion S1 and the second scale portion S2. (Corresponding to the second scale portion S2).

  Therefore, the switch member 2590 is disposed at the second position based on the relationship between the operation / use display piece 2570 and the both scale portions S1 and S2 (ie, the position of the operation end point of the handle ring 2540 is changed) Can be easily identified.

  Here, from the state shown in FIG. 55 (the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the second position), the state shown in FIG. 53 (the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the first position) (Return), the handle base 530 is pushed downward with respect to the handle mounting base 2520 centering on the pivot portion (shaft 563 and bearing 523), as shown in FIG. Can be performed by releasing the downward pushing operation of the handle base 530 (that is, displacing the handle base 530 upward to return to the horizontal state). . That is, as shown in FIG. 53, the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is pulled back by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593 by this operation (see FIGS. 47A and 47B). It is arranged (returned) from the second position to the first position (see FIG. 46).

  In this case, for example, in a state where the switching device 2600 is held (fixed) at the rotational position corresponding to the operation position θ1 (see FIG. 29B), the above-described operation (transfer rod 2592 is not performed from the second position When an operation of passing 3 positions and returning to the first position is performed, the switching device 2600 is switched from the engaged fixed state to the rotatable state and made rotatable with respect to the bearing portion 535. In response to the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 2539, the switching device is returned to the initial position (rotational position where the restriction protrusion 630 is in contact with the handle side protrusion 546) (see FIG. 28A).

  The switching device 2600 is always interlocked (synchronized) with the push-in piece 2583 of the push-in member 2580 via the connection between the connection hole 620 and the connection shaft 2582 of the push-in member 2580 and thus is rotated in the first embodiment. Similarly to the case where the handle ring 2540 is turned, the downward movement of the handle base 530 to the handle mount 2520 causes switching from the fixed engagement state to the rotatable state (ie, , And return of the switching device 2600 to the initial position, and cancellation of the change of the operation end point) is enabled. As a result, even when the handle ring 2540 is turned, there is no need to temporarily return the handle ring 2540 to the initial position in order to release the change (setting) of the operation end point. Therefore, for example, when it becomes necessary to reset the position of the operation end point to another position, the reset operation of the handle ring 2540 is maintained while maintaining the turning operation of the handle ring 2540 (that is, while the game is continued). It can be done quickly.

  In addition, an operation to switch the switching device 2600 from the engagement fixed state to the rotatable state (cancel the change of the operation end point, that is, return operation to return the switching device 2600 to the initial position), and the engagement fixed from the rotatable state Both the operation of switching to the state (the change operation of changing (setting) the operation end point) is achieved by the downward pressing operation of the handle base 530 with respect to the handle mount 2520. That is, this can be achieved by operating the same member in the same direction. Thereby, as in the case of the first embodiment, the operation of the change operation and the return operation can be facilitated. In particular, since the state by the change operation and the state by the return operation are alternately switched, it is effective to improve the operability that the two states can be switched by repeating the same operation. In addition, since the same member can be operated in the same direction, the operable direction of the handle base 530 relative to the handle mount 2520 can be limited to only one direction, so the structure can be simplified accordingly. Product cost can be reduced.

  As described above, the operation / use display piece 2570 also serves as an operation unit operated by the player in order to switch the switching device 2600 to the rotatable state or the engaged / fixed state. That is, instead of pushing the handle base 530 downward with respect to the handle mount 2520, the switching device is also switched by rotating the operation / displaying piece 2570 around the shaft 2802 (the connecting square portion 2802a). Switching of the state 2600 (a rotatable state or an engaged fixed state) can be performed.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, in the state where the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is in the first position, the operation / display piece 2570 is in the position where the extended tip points to the first scale portion S1. It is arranged. When operation and display piece 2570 is turned toward second scale portion S2 about axis 2802 (connected square portion 2802a) from the state shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, linear motion conversion member 2800 is an axis. It is turned clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 53 centering on 2802, and the pressing surface 2804 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is advanced toward the front side (right side in FIG. 53). As a result, the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is pushed toward the push-in member 2580 by the pressing surface portion 2804, and the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the third position (FIG. 47 (a) and FIG. b) see). In this state, the operation / use display piece 2570 is rotated to a position where the extended tip thereof exceeds the second scale portion S2.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 and 57, when the player loosens the operating force for turning the operation / displaying piece 2570 from the state where the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is arranged in the third state. The transmission rod 2592 of the member 2590 is pulled back by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593 (see FIGS. 47 (b) and 47 (c)), and is disposed at the second position (see FIG. 46). Along with the arrangement of the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) at the second position, the extended tip of the operation / use display piece 2570 indicates the second scale portion S2.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 57, in the state where the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is in the second position, the operation / display piece 2570 is in the position where the extended tip points to the second scale portion S2. It is arranged. From the state shown in FIGS. 55 and 57, operation / display piece 2570 is directed to the opposite side to first scale portion S1 (that is, in the right direction in FIGS. 55 and 57) with shaft 2802 (connecting square portion 2802a) as a center. When the rotation operation is performed, the linear motion conversion member 2800 is rotated about the shaft 2802 in FIG. 55 clockwise (clockwise), and the pressing surface portion 2804 of the linear motion conversion member 2800 is directed to the front side (right side in FIG. 53). Are advanced. As a result, the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is pushed toward the push-in member 2580 by the pressing surface portion 2804, and the transmission rod 2592 of the switch member 2590 is disposed at the third position (FIG. 47 (b) and FIG. c) see

  That is, in this state, as in the case where the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2529) described above is disposed from the first position to the second position, the extended tip of the operation / operation display piece 2570 has the second scale portion S2 The rotational operation is performed to a position beyond the position (that is, a position closer to the handle ring 2540 than the second scale portion S2).

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 56, when the player loosens the operation force for turning the operation / displaying piece 2570 from the state where the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) is disposed in the third state. The transmission rod 2592 of the member 2590 is pulled back by the urging force of the transmission rod urging spring 2593 (see FIGS. 47A and 47B), and is disposed at the first position (see FIG. 46). Along with the arrangement of the switch member 2590 (transmission rod 2592) at the first position, the extended tip of the operation / use display piece 2570 indicates the first scale portion S1.

  In this manner, the identification member (the operation / use display piece 2570) for indicating to the player whether the position of the operation end point is changed (set) or canceled is changed (set the operation end point (set) And the operation member operated by the player in order to perform the cancellation, and accordingly, the number of parts can be reduced and the product cost can be reduced.

  In this case, the change operation for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point (ie, the switch member 2590 (transfer rod 2592) disposed at the first position shown in FIGS. 53 and 56 is shown in FIGS. The operation of arranging at the second position) means that the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point is canceled (that is, the transmission rod 2592 is arranged at the first position) for the operation / use display piece 2570. Point to the second scale portion S2 which means that the position of the operation end point is changed (set) from the position pointing to the first scale portion S1 to be displayed (that is, the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the second position) Since this is achieved by the operation of arranging to the position, it is possible to make the player intuitively recognize that the operation is the change operation while operating it. As a result, careless operation can be suppressed.

  Similarly, the release operation (i.e., the switch member 2590 (transfer rod 2592) disposed at the second position shown in FIGS. 55 and 57) for releasing the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point is shown in FIGS. The operation of arranging at the first position shown in) means that the position of the operation end point is changed (set) (that is, the transmission rod 2592 is arranged at the second position). The first scale portion S1 means that the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point is canceled (that is, the transmission rod 2592 is disposed at the first position) from the position pointing to the second scale portion S2 This is achieved by the operation of disposing to the position pointing to, so that the player can be operated while intuitively recognizing that the operation is the release operation. As a result, careless operation can be suppressed.

  In this case, the release operation for releasing the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point directly directs the operation / combination display piece 2570 from the position pointing to the second scale portion S2 to the position pointing to the first scale portion S1. Instead, as described above, it is necessary to temporarily move the first scale S1 to a position where it points after pointing to the opposite side of the first scale S1 (that is, in the right direction in FIGS. 55 and 57). is there. That is, since it is necessary to separately perform one operation (operation) in the opposite direction, the position of the operation end point changed (set) by the player (that is, the firing intensity of the gaming ball can be fired at a desired firing intensity) It is possible to prevent in advance that the turning operation position of the handle ring 540 is released by the player's careless operation.

  The switching device 2600 is used to change (set) the operation end point of the handle ring 2540 and adjust the pivoting position of the handle ring 2540 based on the position of the operation end point (return to the original pivot position) As for the adjustment method, the operation for switching the states of the switching devices 600 and 2600 is different (that is, the pressing operation of the button member 570 in the first embodiment, and the pressing operation of the handle base 530 in the second embodiment). Since the contents are the same as the contents described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31 in the first embodiment except for the fact that the description is omitted.

  As described above, according to the handle device 2051 in the second embodiment, the switchable state or the engaged / fixed state of the switching device 2600 is switched (that is, the position of the operation end point is changed (set) and released). Therefore, the operation for changing the position of the operation end point (setting) and the operation for releasing the position can be performed by rotating the handle ring 2540. It is possible to easily carry out while maintaining the operation amount of (i.e., suppressing the careless change of the launch intensity of the gaming ball due to the shift of the operation amount of the turning operation).

  Specifically, after the player adjusts the firing intensity of the gaming ball to a desired firing intensity by turning the handle ring 2540, the handle base 530 is mounted on the handle mount 2520 while maintaining that state. Operation to change the position of the operation end point (setting) and to release it, the operation to change the handle ring 2540 or another hand opposite to the hand operating the handle ring 2540 There is no need to perform an operation to operate the operation means (operation element). Thereby, the position of the operation end point can be changed (set) and released quickly, and the position of the operation end point is adjusted to the desired rotation operation position (that is, the launch intensity of the game ball is adjusted to the desired launch intensity) It can be accurately changed (set) to the rotation operation position of the handle ring 2540).

  In particular, in the present embodiment, since the handle base 530 is operated to be pressed downward with respect to the handle mount 2520, such pressing operation can be performed using the weight of the fingers and arms gripping the handle ring 2540. The operability can be improved. In this case, the handle ring 2540 is disposed at a relatively low position of the pachinko machine 10, and the operation position is relatively low for the player, so the structure for pressing downward as in this embodiment is the player Is easy to exert force. Therefore, the operability can be improved also from this point.

  In addition, since a biasing force for returning to the horizontal position (displacement upward) is applied to the handle base 530 by the base biasing member SP, after performing a downward operation of the handle base 530 By releasing the downward operation force or releasing the hand, it is possible to return to the horizontal position by utilizing the biasing force of the base biasing member SP. As a result, the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

  Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58 to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the firing strength of the gaming ball is adjusted by turning the handle ring 540 has been described. However, the adjustment of the firing strength of the gaming ball in the third embodiment slides the operation element 3800 It is done by operating. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 58 (a) is a top view of the handle device 3051 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 58 (b) is a side view of the handle device 3051 as viewed in the direction of arrow LVIIIb in FIG. 58 (a). FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view of the handle device 3051 taken along line LIX-LIX in FIG. 58 (a).

  In FIGS. 58 (a) and 58 (b), the front surface of the lower tray unit 15 (that is, the attachment surface of the handle device 3051) is schematically illustrated by a two-dot chain line, The state in which the slide operation is performed to the approximate center of the is conveniently illustrated. Further, in FIG. 59, only the handle mount 3500 is viewed in cross section, and the cross sections of the other components are omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the handle device 3051 includes a handle mount 3500, a rotary shaft portion 3700 rotatably supported by the handle mount 3500, and an operation connected to the rotary shaft portion 3700. A main body 3810 of the operating element 3800 is horizontally projected to the front of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

  The handle mounting base 3500 includes a lower base 3510, an intermediate base 3520, and an upper base 3530, and the intermediate base 3520 is overlapped by being interposed between the lower base 3510 and the upper base 3530. The upper and lower ends (upper and lower sides in FIG. 58 (b)) are closed and an opening is formed in the side surface (right side in FIG. 58 (b)).

  A storage portion 3540 is disposed on the lower surface of the handle mount 3500 (lower base 3510). The housing portion 3540 houses a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the rotary shaft portion 3700 based on a change in electrical resistance. The gaming ball is fired with a strength (launch strength) corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor. Further, a closing member 3550 is disposed between the lower base 3510 and the middle base 3520, and the opening of the side surface of the handle mounting base 3500 is closed by the closing member 3550.

  The rotary shaft portion 3700 is rotatably disposed in the inside of the handle mount 3500 in a vertical posture in which the axial center direction is aligned with the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 59). A connection piece 3780 is provided so as to protrude from the lower end surface of the rotation shaft portion 3700, and the connection piece 3780 is connected to a variable resistor stored in the storage portion 3540. Therefore, when the rotary shaft 3700 is rotated, the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotational position) of the rotary shaft 3700.

  The operator 3800 is slidably attached to the handle mount 3500 via the rotation shaft 3700. That is, as shown in FIG. 58A, the operator 3800 rotates in the virtual plane perpendicular to the axial center of the rotary shaft 3700 as the rotary shaft 3700 is rotated about its axis. In the section from the initial position θ0 to the maximum position θmax, sliding displacement is possible in the directions of arrows I and D. That is, the direction of arrow I corresponds to the increasing direction in which the firing intensity of the gaming ball is increased, and the direction of arrow D corresponds to the decreasing direction in which the firing intensity of the gaming ball is decreased.

  When the player 3800 is slide-displaced (slide operation) by the player in the direction of arrow I or in the direction of arrow D, the rotary shaft portion 3700 is rotated about the axis, and the storage portion 3540 is adjusted according to the amount of rotation The resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. Thereby, the launch strength of the gaming ball is increased or decreased. When the player's slide operation is released, the operating element 3800 is slidingly displaced in the direction of arrow D by the biasing force of the slide direction biasing spring 3581 and returned to the initial position θ0.

  As described above, since the rotary shaft 3700 is disposed along the vertical direction (gravity direction), the slide displacement of the operator 3800 (main body 3810) is a horizontal surface perpendicular to the gravity direction (in the gravity direction). It takes place along a vertical plane).

  The manipulator 3800 is displaceable in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 59) with respect to the handle mounting base 3500 centering on a portion (connection shaft 3990) pivotally supported by the rotation shaft portion 3700. That is, the operating element 3800 is formed to be able to push down the held portion 3830 downward (in the direction of the arrow G in FIG. 58B) with the connecting shaft 3990 as the rotation center (see FIG. 64). In the present embodiment, the depressing operation of the operation element 3800 (the held portion 3830) is performed downward in the direction of gravity. Therefore, the pressing operation of the operation element 3800 (held portion 3830) causes the weight of the player's hand to act on the held portion 3830 of the operating element 3800, or the wrist holding the held portion 3830 is returned downward. Only can be done easily.

  The switching device 3600 is disposed above the rotating shaft 3700. The switching device 3600 is a member for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point of the operating element 3800 as in the switching devices 600 and 2600 in the above embodiments, and is inserted into the bearing portion 3535 and the bearing portion 3535 It is possible to switch between two states: a rotatable state in which relative rotation is possible and an engaged fixed state in which relative rotation is not possible.

  The switching device 3600 is switched to the rotatable state or the engaged fixed state by pressing the operating element 3800 (held part 3830), thereby changing (setting) the position of the operation end point or releasing the position. Is done. The structure for changing (setting) or canceling the position of the operation end point by depressing the operation element 3800 will be described later.

  In the operation element 3800, when the held portion 3830 is pushed downward (in the direction of the arrow G), the springing direction biasing spring 3880 is elastically elongated and deformed, and the operation force in the depression direction by the player is relaxed. The elastic recovery force of the spring-up direction biasing spring 3880 displaces the operating element 3800 (held part 3830) upward (opposite direction of the arrow G) to the initial position (body part 3810 shown in FIG. 58B). Is returned to the horizontal position).

  A firing stop switch 3891 and a right-handed switch 3892 are disposed on the operating element 3800. The player can stop the firing of the gaming ball during pressing by pressing the firing stop switch 3891 regardless of the slide position (operation amount) of the operating element 3800, and the right-handed switch 3892 By pressing, the gaming ball can be fired at the maximum firing intensity during the pressing.

  Next, the handle mount 3500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. 60 (a) is a side view of the lower base 3510, and FIG. 60 (b) is a top view of the lower base 3510 in the direction of the arrow LXb in FIG. 60 (a), and FIG. 60 is a cross-sectional view of the lower base 3510 taken along line LXc-LXc of FIG. 60 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 60, the lower base 3510 has a body 3511 formed in a cylindrical shape, a bottom wall 3512 for closing the lower opening of the body 3511, and an outer surface of the body 3511 from the outer peripheral surface. A fastening flange 3513 and a fastening seat 3514 which project to the other side, a bearing 3515 erected upward from the upper surface of the bottom wall 3512, and a support shaft erected on the side of the bearing 3515 A guide wall portion 3517 is provided so as to stand upward from the upper surface of the bottom wall 3512 with a predetermined interval between the portion 3516 and the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 3511.

  An opening 3511 a is formed on the front (front) side of the trunk portion 3511 by cutting a part of the trunk portion 3511. The opening 3511a is a cutaway portion for securing a displacement space in the sliding direction (arrows I and D directions) and the push-down direction (arrow G direction) of the operating element 3800 (see FIGS. 58 and 59). In a top view shown in (b), it is formed over a range of a central angle of about 170 degrees.

  In addition, since the lower base 3510 is formed as an opening in which the opening 3511a is continuous with (consecutively) an opening on the upper side (upper side in FIG. 60C) of the trunk portion 3511, the entire opening area can be secured. As a result, it is possible to improve the workability when mounting and assembling the rotary shaft portion 3700, the operation element 3800, the rotary shaft portion connection gear 3571, the slide direction biasing spring 3581 and the like in the lower base 3510. .

  The fastening flange 3513 is a plate-like body projecting outward from the outer peripheral surface of the body portion 3511 at the upper end (the upper side in FIG. 60A) of the body portion 3511. While being provided, an insertion hole 3513a is formed in each of the pair of fastening flanges 3513. Similar fastening flanges 3523, 3533 are also provided on the middle base 3520 and the upper base 3530, and these fastening flanges 3513, 3523, 3533 are superimposed on each other and inserted through the insertion holes 3513a, 3523a, 3533a. By fastening and fixing with the fastening bolt B, the bases 3510, 3520 and 3530 are connected and fixed, and the handle mount 3500 is formed (see FIG. 58).

  The fastening seat portion 3514 is a portion projecting outward from the outer peripheral surface of the trunk portion 3511 at the lower side (the lower side in FIG. 60A) of the trunk portion 3511, and the back side of the trunk portion 3511 (opening 3511a The phase is arranged 180 degrees out of phase). The outer surface (rear surface, the surface on the left side of FIGS. 60A and 60B) of the fastening seat 3514 is a flat surface parallel to the axial center of the body 3511 (hereinafter referred to as “seating surface 3514a”) The seating surface 3514a is a mounting surface (seating surface) when the handle device 3051 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the lower tray unit 15 (see FIG. 58).

  In the central portion of the bottom wall 3512, an insertion hole 3512a circular in a front view is bored. The connection piece 3780 of the rotary shaft portion 3700 is connected to the variable resistor in the storage portion 3540 via the insertion hole 3512a (see FIG. 59). The bearing portion 3515 is formed in a cylindrical shape concentric with the insertion hole 3512 a of the bottom wall 3512, and the lower end side of the rotary shaft portion 3700 is rotatably supported by the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 3515 (see FIG. 6).

  The support shaft portion 3516 is a portion for rotatably supporting the rotation shaft portion connection gear 3571 formed as a spur gear (see FIG. 59), and is formed in a shaft shape having a circular cross section. Specifically, the support shaft portion 3516 includes a small diameter portion located on the tip end side and a large diameter portion formed to be larger in diameter than the small diameter portion, and the rotation shaft portion connection gear 3571 can rotate on the small diameter portion. Supported by The rotary shaft connecting gear 3571 has a step surface between the small diameter portion and the large diameter portion of the support shaft portion 3516, and a snap ring (not shown) such as an E ring fitted on the tip of the small diameter portion of the support shaft portion 3516. As a result, the axial movement is restricted (held unremovably).

  In addition, a slide direction biasing spring 3581 formed as a torsion spring is held on the lower surface side of the rotation shaft connection gear 3571 in a state in which the slide direction biasing spring 3581 is elastically twisted and deformed (see FIG. 59). . A biasing force (elastic recovery force) is applied from the slide direction biasing spring 3581 to the rotating shaft portion connecting gear 3571, and the biasing force is applied via the connecting gear portion 3770 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 to the rotating shaft portion. It acts in a direction to return 3700 (ie, the operator 3800) to the initial position θ0.

  Therefore, when sliding the operating element 3800 in the increasing direction (direction of arrow I in FIG. 58), the biasing force of the sliding direction biasing spring 3581 imparts a sense of resistance to the sliding operation while the sliding operation When released, the operating element 3800 is slidingly displaced in the decreasing direction (direction of arrow D in FIG. 58) by the biasing force of the sliding direction biasing spring 3581, and is returned to the initial position θ0.

  The guide wall portion 3517 is a member for guiding the closing member 3550 (see FIG. 63) in the circumferential direction together with the guide wall portion 3527 (see FIG. 61) of the intermediate base 3520, and formed in a cylindrical shape with a circular top view. It is erected from the upper surface of the bottom wall 3512 at a position concentric with the body 3511. Therefore, a gap of a fixed size (an annular space in top view) is formed between the outer peripheral surface of the guide wall portion 3517 and the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 3511, and the lower end of the sealing member 3550 is inserted into this gap. (See FIG. 59). The lower end of the sealing member 3550 is guided in the gap between the guide wall portion 3517 and the body portion 3511 when the operating element 3800 is slid, and the sealing member 3550 is moved in the circumferential direction.

  61 (a) is a side view of the intermediate base 3520, FIG. 61 (b) is a top view of the intermediate base 3520 in the arrow LXIb direction view of FIG. 61 (a), and FIG. 61 (c) is It is sectional drawing of the intermediate | middle base 3520 in the LXIc-LXIc line | wire of FIG.61 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 61, the intermediate base 3520 includes a disc portion 3521 formed in a disc shape, an outer wall portion 3522 disposed along the outer edge of the lower surface of the disc portion 3521, and the disc portion 3521. The disc portion 3521 is separated by a predetermined distance between a fastening flange 3523 projecting outward from the outer peripheral surface of the disc, an insertion hole 3524 bored in the center of the disc portion 3521 and an inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 3522 And a guide wall portion 3527 erected downward from the lower surface of the lens.

  The outer diameter of the disc portion 3521 is the same as the outer diameter of the body portion 3511 of the lower base 3510 and the body portion 3531 of the upper base 3530, and the disc portion 3521 of the middle base 3520 in the assembled state of the handle mounting base 3500. Is held between the axial direction end faces of the body 3511 of the lower base 3510 and the body 3531 of the upper base 3530 (see FIGS. 58 and 59).

  The outer wall portion 3522 is a portion for shielding the internal space of the lower base 3510 from the outside (see FIGS. 58B and 59), and the cylindrical body concentric with the disc portion 3521 has a central angle of approximately 170 degrees. And is internally fitted in the opening 3511a in the trunk portion 3511 of the lower base 3510 (inserted in the opening 3511a). By the inner fitting structure of the outer wall portion 3522 with respect to the opening 3511a, the rigidity of the handle mounting base 3500 as a whole can be enhanced.

  Further, by forming the portion corresponding to the outer wall portion 3522 not to the lower base 3510 but to the intermediate base 3520, as described above, the rigidity as the entire handle mounting base 3500 is secured. Since the opening area of the side base 3510 as a whole can be secured, the rotation shaft 3700 and the operation element 3800 or the rotation shaft connection gear 3571 and the slide direction biasing spring 3581 can be accommodated in the lower base 3510 accordingly. The workability at the time of mounting and assembling can be improved.

  The fastening flange 3523 is a plate-like body that protrudes outward from the outer peripheral surface of the disc portion 3521 and is set to the same plate thickness as the disc portion 3521. Through holes 3523a are respectively provided in the pair of fastening flanges 3523. As described above, the fastening flange 3523 is superimposed on the fastening flanges 3513 and 3533 of the lower base 3510 and the upper base 3530 and fastened and fixed by the fastening bolt B (see FIG. 58).

  The insertion hole 3524 rotatably supports the rotation shaft 3700 by its inner peripheral surface (see FIG. 59). A cylindrical bearing portion 3521a is disposed on the lower surface of the disc portion 3521 at a position concentric with the insertion hole 3524. The rotary shaft portion 3700 is rotatably supported by the inner peripheral surface of the bearing portion 3521a. Be done. That is, since the insertion hole 3524 is extended in the axial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 61C) by the bearing portion 3521a, and the bearing area can be secured by that amount, the bearing strength and bearing accuracy of the rotary shaft portion 3700 can be improved and durable. It is possible to improve the quality.

  The guide wall portion 3527 is a member for guiding the closing member 3550 (see FIG. 63) along with the guide wall portion 3517 (see FIG. 60) of the lower base 3510 in the circumferential direction, and has a cylindrical shape with a circular top view. It is erected from the lower surface of the disc portion 3521 at a position concentric with the outer wall 352. Therefore, a gap of a fixed size (an annular space in a bottom view) is formed between the outer peripheral surface of the guide wall portion 3527 and the inner peripheral surface of the outer wall portion 3522, and the upper end of the sealing member 3550 is inserted into this gap. (See FIG. 59). The upper end of the sealing member 3550 is guided in the gap between the guiding wall portion 3527 and the outer wall portion 3522 when the operating element 3800 is slid, and the sealing member 3550 is moved in the circumferential direction.

  62 (a) is a side view of the upper base 3530, FIG. 62 (b) is a bottom view of the upper base 3530 in the direction of arrow LXIIb in FIG. 62 (a), and FIG. 62 (c) is FIG. 63 is a cross-sectional view of the upper base 3530 taken along line LXIIc-LXIIc of FIG. 62 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 62, the upper base 3530 is formed to have a cylindrical body 3531, an upper surface wall 3532 for closing the upper opening of the body 3531, and an outer peripheral surface of the body 3531 extending outward. The fastening flange 3533 and the fastening seat 3534 to be extended, the bearing 3535 erected downward from the lower surface of the upper surface wall 3532, and the support shaft 3536 erected downward on the side of the bearing 3535 And are formed.

  The fastening flange 3533 is a plate-like body projecting outward from the outer peripheral surface of the trunk portion 3531 at the lower side (the lower side in FIG. 62A) of the trunk portion 3531. The through holes 3533 a are formed in the pair of fastening flanges 3533. As described above, the fastening flange 3533 is superimposed on the fastening flanges 3513 and 3533 of the lower base 3510 and the upper base 3530, and fastened and fixed by the fastening bolt B (see FIG. 58).

  The fastening seat portion 3534 is a portion that protrudes outward from the outer peripheral surface of the trunk portion 3531 at the upper end (the upper end in FIG. 62A) of the trunk portion 3531 and is disposed on the back side of the trunk portion 3531 . The outer side surface (the surface on the left side of FIGS. 62A and 62B) of the fastening seat portion 3534 is formed as a flat surface (hereinafter referred to as a “seating surface 3534a”) parallel to the axial center of the trunk portion 3531 The seating surface 3534a is a mounting surface (seating surface) when the handle device 3051 is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the lower tray unit 15 (see FIG. 5).

  The bearing portion 3535 is formed in a cylindrical shape concentric with the outer wall portion 3531, and the switching device 3600 is rotatably inserted on the inner peripheral side thereof (see FIG. 59). The support shaft portion 3536 is a portion for rotatably supporting the switch connecting gear 3572 which is formed as a spur gear (see FIG. 59), and is formed in a shaft shape having a circular cross section.

  Specifically, the support shaft portion 3536 includes a small diameter portion located on the tip end side and a large diameter portion formed to be larger in diameter than the small diameter portion, and the switching device connecting gear 3572 is rotatable in the small diameter portion. Supported. The switching device connecting gear 3572 includes a step surface between the small diameter portion and the large diameter portion of the support shaft portion 3536 and a snap ring (not shown) such as an E ring fitted to the tip of the small diameter portion of the support shaft portion 3536 By being disposed in between, axial movement is restricted (impossible to hold it out).

  A switching device biasing spring 3582 formed as a torsion spring is held on the upper surface side of the switching device connecting gear 3572 in a state in which the switching device biasing spring 3582 is elastically twisted and deformed (see FIG. 59). A biasing force (elastic recovery force) is applied to the switching device connecting gear 3572 from the switching device biasing spring 3582, and the biasing force is at the initial position of the switching device 3600 (the engagement protrusion 3630 is the rotation shaft 3700). Is returned to the position where it is engaged with the step surface 3711c (see FIG. 77 (a)).

  Fig. 63 (a) is a front view of the sealing member 3550, and Fig. 63 (b) is a bottom view of the sealing member 3550 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXIIIb in Fig. 63 (a). 63 is a cross-sectional view of the sealing member 3550 taken along line LXIIIc-LXIIIc of FIG. 63 (a).

  As shown in FIG. 63, the sealing member 3550 shields the opening 3511 a formed on the front (front) side of the lower base 3510 to prevent the inside of the handle mount 3500 from being viewed from the outside. (See FIG. 58 (b)) and is formed in a cylindrical shape.

  The sealing member 3550 has an outside diameter dimension slightly smaller than the inside diameter dimension of the body 3511 of the lower base 3510 and the outer wall 352 of the middle base 3520, and the inside diameter dimension of the sealing wall 3517 of the lower base 3510. And the outside diameter dimension of the guide wall 3527 of the intermediate base 3520. Therefore, the lower end and the upper end (the lower side and the upper side in FIG. 63A) of the sealing member 3550 can be inserted into the above-mentioned gap formed on the outer peripheral side of the guide wall portions 3517 and 3527, thereby It can be moved along the above-mentioned gap (that is, in the circumferential direction).

  In the sealing member 3550, a notch 3551 is formed by cutting in a part in the circumferential direction. The notch 3551 is a notch for inserting the main body 3810 of the operating element 3800 and securing a displacement space in the push-down direction (see FIGS. 58 and 59), and the lower end of the closing member 3550 (see FIG. It is formed as a notch of a front view rectangular shape extended from 63 (a) lower side).

  The width dimension (the dimension in the horizontal direction in FIG. 63A) of the notch 3551 is set to be slightly larger than the width dimension (the dimension in the vertical direction in FIG. 58A) of the main body portion 3810 of the operating element 3800. Therefore, while enabling the depressing operation of the operation element 3800 (the arrow G direction in FIG. 58B), the operation element 3800 is slid in the increase direction or the decrease direction (the arrow I direction or the arrow D direction in FIG. 58A). At the same time, the closing member 3550 is moved in the circumferential direction in conjunction with the sliding operation.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 64 to 68, the rotary shaft portion 3700 and the operating element 3800 will be described. FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b) are partial cross-sectional side views of the rotary shaft portion 3700 and the operating element 3800, and FIG. 64 (a) shows the operating element 3800 in the initial position in the depression direction. FIG. 64 (b) corresponds to the state in which the operating element 3800 is pressed downward.

  As shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b), the operating element 3800 and the rotation shaft 3700 are connected via the connection shaft 3990. Thus, the operator 3800 can be displaced (operated) in two directions. That is, first, by rotating the operation element 3800 about the connecting shaft 3990 as a rotation center, the held portion 3830 is displaced downward (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 58B) (a pressing operation is It is possible to do). Second, by rotating the operation element 3800 integrally with the rotary shaft portion 3700 about the axis of the rotary shaft portion 3700, the held portion 3830 is slid (in the directions of arrows I and D, It is possible to displace (perform a slide operation) to FIG. 58 (a)).

  65 (a) is a side view of the rotary shaft 3700, and FIG. 65 (b) is a rear view of the rotary shaft 3700 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXVb of FIG. 65 (a). Is a partial cross-sectional rear view of push-up member 3410. FIG. 66 (a) is a top view of the rotary shaft 3700 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIa in FIG. 65 (a), and FIG. 66 (b) is a rotary shaft 3700 at line LXVIb-LXVIb in FIG. 66 (a). FIG. In FIG. 65 (b) and FIG. 65 (c), the state in which the push-up member 3410 is removed is illustrated in order to facilitate understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, the rotary shaft 3700 has a rod-like shaft body 3710, an insertion hole 3720 drilled in the shaft body 3710, and an opening formed on the back side of the shaft body 3710. Opening 3730, a hook portion 3740 disposed on the outer peripheral surface of the shaft main portion 3710, an operator restricting portion 3750, a guide shaft 3760 and a connecting gear portion 3770, and a connection protruding from the lower end surface of the shaft main portion 3710 And a piece 3780.

  The shaft main body portion 3710 is coaxially connected to a cylindrical portion 3711 formed in a cylindrical shape and the lower end (the lower side in FIG. 66B) of the cylindrical portion 3711 and is formed as a solid rod body having a circular cross section. And a real portion 3712, which are integrally formed of a resin material.

  The height position of the reference surface 3711 a and the axial direction (vertical direction of FIG. 66 (b)) of the reference surface 3711 a relative to the reference surface 3711 a A raised surface 3711 b raised upward is formed, whereby a pair of step surfaces 3711 c connecting the reference surface 3711 a and the raised surface 3711 b is formed on the upper end side of the cylindrical member 3711.

  As will be described later, the rotary shaft portion 3700 is formed so that the step surface 3711 c can be engaged with the restriction projection 3630 of the switching device 3600. In the state where the switching device 3600 is set to be rotatable, the step surface 3711c is engaged with the restricting projection 3630 to rotate the rotation shaft 3700 (sliding operation in a direction in which the operation element 3800 is increased). While the switching device 3600 is interlockedly rotated, when the switching device 3600 is set in the engaged fixed state, the step surface 3711 c is engaged with the restriction projection 3630 to rotate the rotation shaft 3700 (operation The slide operation of the child 3800 in the increasing direction is restricted (see FIG. 77 (c)). As a result, an operating end point is formed.

  The reference surface 3711 a and the raised surface 3711 b are flat surfaces perpendicular to the axial direction of the shaft body 3710, and the pair of step surfaces 3711 c are parallel to each other and parallel to the axial direction of the shaft body 3710. Flat surface. In addition, the pair of step surfaces 3711 c are arranged with a phase difference of 180 degrees. However, in the present embodiment, one stepped surface 3711 c of the pair of stepped surfaces 3711 c is engaged with the restriction protrusion 3630 of the switching device 3600.

  A guide groove 3715 is recessed on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 3711. The guide groove 3715 is a groove for holding the transmission rod 3420 (see FIG. 73) at the first position or the second position. The detailed configuration of the guide groove 3715 will be described later.

  The insertion hole 3720 is a hole having a circular cross section through which the connection shaft 3990 is inserted, and a pair of holes are formed in a straight line in the cylindrical portion 3711 of the shaft body portion 3710. In addition, the connecting shaft 3990 is formed in a shaft shape having a circular cross section from a wrought material. The opening 3730 is an opening for securing the arrangement space of the push-up member 3410, and is formed as a rectangular opening in a rear view in the cylindrical portion 3711 of the shaft main body 3710, as shown in FIG. Protrusions 3731 for rotatably supporting the push-up member 3410 are respectively provided in a projecting manner on a pair of opposing inner side surfaces of the opening 3730.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 65 (c), the push-up member 3410 is formed in a rectangular shape in a rear view, and as shown in FIG. 66 (b), a plate-shaped member having an L-shaped cross section with the lower end side bent. Recesses 3411 are respectively provided on the upper end sides of the pair of opposing outer side surfaces. The protrusion 3731 of the opening 3730 is fitted in the recess 3411, and the push-up member 3410 is rotatably supported in the opening 3730 with the protrusion 3731 and the recess 3411 as a rotation center (see FIG. 64). The push-up member 3410 is disposed in a posture in which the bent portion on the lower end side is directed to the axial center side of the cylindrical portion 3711 of the shaft main portion 3710.

  The hook portion 3740 is a portion for engaging and holding one end of the flip-up direction biasing spring 3880 formed as a coil spring (see FIG. 64), and the portion having an L-shaped cross section bent upward is A pair is disposed at a predetermined interval. The operator restricting portion 3750 is a rod-like portion for restricting the displacement of the operator 3800 whose center of rotation is the connecting shaft 3990, and is disposed on the back side of the shaft main portion 3710 and below the opening 3730. .

  That is, the flip-up direction biasing spring 3880 is mounted between the hook portion 3740 of the rotary shaft portion 3700 and the hook portion 3840 of the operating element 3800 in an elastically expanded state, and the player operates the operating element. After the button 3800 is pushed downward (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 58 (b)) (see FIG. 64 (b)), when the depressing operation is released, the operating element 3800 moves in the springing direction biasing spring 3880. Is biased upward (in the direction opposite to the arrow G, see FIG. 58 (b)) by the biasing force (elastic recovery force). In this case, when the operator restricting portion 3750 receives the lower surface of the main body 3810 of the operator 3800, the displacement of the operator 3800 in the flip-up direction is restricted. Thereby, the operating element 3800 is held at the initial position in the depressing operation (see FIG. 64A).

  As described above, since the operator restricting portion 3750 is a portion that receives the operator 3800 (the lower surface of the main portion 3810) flipped up by the biasing force of the flipping direction biasing spring 3880, a large load is applied. However, in the present embodiment, the operator restricting portion 3750 is disposed not on the thin cylindrical portion 3711 but on the solid solid portion 3712. Thereby, the rigidity can be secured, and the flipped up operator 3800 (the lower surface of the main body portion 3810) can be firmly received. As a result, the durability can be improved.

  The guide shaft 3760 is a portion for guiding the displacement direction of the operation element 3800 when the operation element 3800 is displaced in the depression direction or the opposite direction, and for smoothly performing the displacement of the held portion 3830. It is disposed on the front side of a solid portion 3712 opposite to the portion 3750 with respect to the solid portion 3712. When the operator 3800 is depressed, the guide shaft 3760 moves in the guide groove 3870 of the operator 3800 (see FIG. 64B) to displace the operator 3800 along the guide groove 3870. It can be guided. As a result, rattling of the operation element 3800 can be suppressed, and the operation at the time of pressing the operation element 3800 can be stabilized. Moreover, in connection with this, the burden of the connecting shaft 3990 can be reduced and damage to the connecting shaft 3990 can be suppressed.

  The connection gear portion 3770 is a portion formed as a spur gear, and is meshed with the rotation shaft portion connection gear 3571 (see FIG. 59). As described above, the biasing force from the slide direction biasing spring 3581 is transmitted from the rotating shaft portion connecting gear 3571 to the connecting gear portion 3770, whereby the rotating shaft portion 3700 is rotated, and the operating element 3800 is at the initial position θ0. (See FIG. 58A).

  The connection piece 3780 is a shaft-like body fixed to the lower end surface of the shaft body 3710, and is connected to a variable resistor (not shown) through the insertion hole 3512a of the lower base 3510 as described above. Be done. Thereby, the operation amount of the slide operation of the operation element 3800 is converted into the rotation amount of the rotary shaft portion 3700 and transmitted to the variable resistor.

  FIG. 67 (a) is a side view of the operating element 3800, and FIG. 67 (b) is a top view of the operating element 3800 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67 (a). 68 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the manipulator 3800 taken along line LXVIIIa-LXVIIIa in FIG. 67 (b), and FIG. 68 (b) is a manipulator 3800 taken along line LXVIIIb-LXVIIIb in FIG. 67 (b). FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, the operator 3800 has a main body 3810 including a base 3811 and a leg 3812, an insertion hole 3820 drilled in the leg 3812 of the main body 3810, and a main body 3810. A held member 3830 erected from the base 3811, a hook 3840 and a support wall 3850 disposed on the outer surface of the base 3811 of the main body 3810, and a cam member bridged between the legs 3812 of the main body 3810 3860 and a guide groove 3870 disposed on the inner surface of the leg 3812 of the main body 3810.

  The main body 3810 has a long box-like base 3811 and a pair of legs 3812 extending along the longitudinal direction from the base side (the left side of FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b) of the base 3811). Equipped with A holding portion 3830 is erected substantially vertically on the tip end side of the base 3811 (the right side in FIGS. 67A and 67B). The pair of legs 3812 are disposed substantially in parallel with each other with a predetermined distance therebetween, and the rotation shaft 3700 is disposed between the pair of legs 3812 (see FIG. 64).

  Further, in the pair of leg portions 3812, insertion holes 3820 are respectively bored along the opposing direction (vertical direction in FIG. 67 (b)). The rotary shaft portion 3700 is disposed between the pair of leg portions 3812 facing each other, and the connecting shaft 3990 inserted from one of the insertion holes 3820 of the pair of leg portions 3812 passes through the insertion hole 3720 of the rotary shaft portion 3700. At the same time, the operator 3800 is connected to the rotation shaft 3700 via the connection shaft 3990 by inserting the insertion hole 3820 into the other insertion hole 3820 of the pair of legs 3812, and the lower part of the held portion 3830 (arrow G The pressing operation to the direction, see FIG. 58 (b), is enabled (see FIG. 64).

  In the side view shown in FIG. 67 (a), the extending tip end side (left side in FIG. 67 (a)) of the pair of leg portions 3812 is curved in an arc shape and is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the arc curved portion. The elastic film members 3893 are respectively attached to the The elastic film member 3893 is a member formed in a film shape from an elastic material such as a rubber material. When the held portion 3830 of the operation element 3800 is pushed down and the leg 3812 is pushed up, the elastic film member 3893 is brought into close contact with the lower surface of the disc portion 3521 of the intermediate base 3520 (see FIG. 76).

  As a result, it is possible to restrict the displacement of the operating element 3800 in the slide operation direction by using the adhesion (frictional force) of the elastic film member 3893. Therefore, as described later, when the position of the operation end point is changed (set), it is possible to suppress an inadvertent change in the operation amount of the slide operation of the operation element 3800. That is, it is possible to suppress an inadvertent change in the firing intensity of the gaming ball due to the position shift of the slide operation position. Thereby, the position of the operation end point can be accurately changed (set) to a desired position (that is, the slide operation position of the operation element 3800 when the launch intensity of the game ball is adjusted to the desired launch intensity). .

  The held portion 3830 is a portion held by the player's hand or palm when sliding or pushing the operating element 3800, and is formed as a rod-like body having a substantially rectangular cross section with corner portions chamfered in an arc shape. Be done. As described above, by forming the held portion 3830 as a rod-like body, the held portion 3830 can be easily held (held), and as a result, when the operation element 3800 is operated to slide and push down. The operability can be improved.

  Further, since the held portion 3830 is erected from the main portion 3810 along the vertical direction, the held portion 3830 can be held (held) by the player in a natural posture. In particular, since the held portion 3830 is erected upward from the main body portion 3810, when gripping the held portion 3830, the outer edge portion of the palm corresponds to the upper surface of the main body portion 3810 (FIG. 67A). Can be placed on the surface). Thus, the player's fatigue can be reduced, and when the operator 3800 is pushed downward, for example, the hand on the upper surface of the main body 3810 even if the held portion 3830 is not gripped. The result is that the depressing operation can be easily performed.

  The above-described launch stop switch 3891 and right-handed switch 3892 are respectively disposed on the standing end of the held portion 3830 and the back side of the held portion 3830 (the side facing the connecting shaft 3990 (see FIG. 64)). Thereby, the player can easily operate the firing stop switch 3891 with the thumb or forefinger and the right strike switch 3892 with the forefinger or middle finger while holding the held portion 820 naturally.

  The hook portion 3840 is a portion for engaging and holding the other end of the flip-up direction biasing spring 3880 whose one end is engaged and held by the hook portion 3740 (see FIG. 65) of the rotation shaft portion 3700 (see FIG. 64). And L-shaped in cross section bent downward.

  The support wall 3850 is a wall portion for supporting the flip-up direction biasing spring 3880 from the lower side, and is formed to curve upward in a convex arc shape in a side view shown in FIG. 67 (a). In this manner, the support wall 3850 is curved in an arc shape, whereby the distance of the springing direction biasing spring 3880 (a distance measured along the springing direction biasing spring 3880 between both hooks 3740 and 3840) Can be made longer (see FIG. 64 (a)). Therefore, it is possible to use a springing direction biasing spring 3880 having a longer overall length in a limited space, and as a result, the biasing force can be increased and the durability of the springing direction biasing spring 3880 is improved. Can be

  The cam member 3860 is a member for pushing up the push-up member 3410 disposed displaceably on the rotary shaft portion 3700 upward (see FIG. 64), and is a rod-like member bridged between the pair of leg portions 3812 673 and the center of the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 67B) of the bridging portion 3861 from the center to the base 3811 side (that is, the side on which the rotary shaft 3700 is disposed, right side in FIG. 67B) And an upwardly extending push-up cam 3862, which are integrally formed. The cam member 3860 is formed separately from the main body portion 3810, and both ends of the bridging portion 3861 are fastened and fixed to the leg portions 3812 of the main body portion 3810 by fastening bolts (not shown).

  The lifting cam 3862 is formed in a triangular shape in cross section, and as shown in FIG. 68, is disposed in a posture in which the top of the triangular shape is directed upward. In a state in which the rotary shaft 3700 is connected to the main body 3810 (between the pair of legs 3812 facing each other) via the connecting shaft 3990, the triangular cam portion of the push-up cam 3862 is the rotary shaft of the push-up member 3410 (protrusion 3731 and the concave portion 3411, which are disposed at the lower position in the vertical direction in FIGS. 65 (b) and 65 (c), and the slope of one side of the triangle (right side in FIG. 68 (a)) It is arrange | positioned by the position which supports the lower end of 3410 (refer FIG. 64 (a)).

  The cam member 3860 is an inclined surface on one side (right side in FIG. 68A) of the triangle shape of the push-up cam 3862 when the operating element 3800 is pressed downward (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 58B). Using the top (FIG. 68 (a) upper side), the push-up member 3410 disposed on the rotary shaft 3700 is pushed upward (see FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b)).

  As described above, by forming the push-up cam 3862 in a triangular shape in cross section, and by using the slope and the top to push the push-up member 3410 upward, in a normal state in which the operating element 3800 is not depressed. (See FIG. 64 (a)), the push-up member 3410 can be disposed further downward, and the overall height dimension (axial dimension, dimension in FIG. 64 (a) vertical direction) can be reduced while the operating element is being operated. When pressing down the 3800 (see FIG. 64 (b)), the amount by which the lifting member 3410 is pushed up can be secured, so the stroke amount necessary for the pressing operation of the operating element 3800 can be reduced to improve operability. And increase the lifting stroke of the transmission rod 3420 (see FIG. 73) to reliably switch the state of the switching device 3600. Kill (see FIG. 76 from FIG. 74).

  The guide groove 3870 is a recessed groove for guiding the guide shaft 3760 (see FIG. 65) of the rotating shaft portion 3700, and is formed as a groove having a rectangular cross section on the opposite surface of the pair of leg portions 3812. It is curved and extended in an arc shape centering on Therefore, when the operating element 3800 is pressed downward (in the direction of arrow G, see FIG. 58B) (see FIGS. 64A and 64B), the guide shaft 3760 of the rotary shaft portion 3700 is used. However, by being guided along the guide groove 3870, rattling of the operating element 3800 can be suppressed, and the depression operation of the operating element 3800 can be smoothly performed. Moreover, in connection with this, the burden of the connecting shaft 3990 can be reduced and damage to the connecting shaft 3990 can be suppressed.

  The main body portion 3810 and the held portion 3830 have a two-split structure in which the center in the width direction (vertical direction in FIG. 67B) is a split surface (a mating surface). That is, the main body portion 3810 and the held portion 3830 are formed in a plane symmetry of the first component forming one side of the main body portion 3810 and the held portion 3830 with respect to the first component with the division plane as a symmetrical plane. 3810 and a second part forming one side of the held portion 3830, and by joining the first part and the second part at the division surfaces of each other, the inside of the firing stop switch 3891 etc. It is formed in a hollow shape having a space for wiring the electrical connection lines.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 69 to 73, the switching member 3600, the pushing member 3430 and the transmission rod 3420 will be described. FIG. 69 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the handle device 3051.

  As shown in FIG. 69, in the handle mount 3500, the switching device 3600, the push-in member 3430 and the transmission rod 3420 are coaxially arranged in series in order from the top. The switching device 3600 is inserted into the bearing portion 3535 of the upper base 3530, and the push-in member 3430 and the transmission rod 3420 are inserted into the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 (shaft main body 3710).

  First, the switching device 3600 and the pushing member 3420 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72.

  FIG. 70 (a) is a top view of the switching device 3600, FIG. 70 (b) is a side view of the switching device 3600 in the arrow LXXb direction view of FIG. 70 (a), and FIG. 70 (c) is FIG. 70 is a bottom view of the switching device 3600 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXc in FIG. 70 (b). 71 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the switching device 3600 taken along line LXXIa-LXXIa of FIG. 70 (a), and FIG. 71 (b) is a side view of the switching device 3600 in the arrow LXXIb direction of FIG. 70 (b). FIG.

  72 (a) is a front view of the pushing member 3430, and FIG. 72 (b) is a side view of the pushing member 3430 in the arrow LXXIIb direction view of FIG. 72 (a), FIG. 72 (c) FIG. 73 is a cross-sectional view of the pressing member 3430 in the line LXXIIc-LXXIIc of FIG.

  In FIGS. 70 and 71, the biting balls 670a and 670b, the pushing side biasing spring 680 and the biting side biasing spring 690 are not shown.

  Here, the switching device 3600 is connected instead of the point that the shape of the restricting protrusion 3630 is different from the shape of the restricting protrusion 630 in the first and second embodiments, and the spring receiving portion 640 in the first and second embodiments. It is technically substantially the same as the switching devices 600 and 2600 in the first and second embodiments, except that the gear portion 3640 is provided. Also, the push-in member 3430 is technically substantially the same as the push-in member 2580 in the second embodiment. Therefore, substantially the same parts will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, the switching device 3600 is projected radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610, the connection hole 620 formed through the main body 610, and the connection hole 620. The projection 3630 includes a restriction projection 3630 and a connection gear 3640, and a biting surface 650 and a flank 660 formed by recessing the outer peripheral surface of the main body 610.

  The outer diameter of the main body portion 610 is set to a size slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the bearing portion 3535 (see FIG. 69) of the upper base 3530. Thus, the main body portion 610 is rotatably held in the bearing portion 3535 by being inserted into the bearing portion 3535 of the upper side base 3530 (see FIG. 74).

  The restricting protrusion 3630 is a portion that is in contact with the step surface 3711c (see FIGS. 77 and 78) in the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotary shaft 3700 (shaft main body 3710), and is formed as a rod having a circular cross section. It is disposed radially outward of the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 610 and protrudes downward from the lower surface (the lower surface in FIG. 71B) of the main body portion 610.

  The connection gear portion 3640 is a plate-like body formed so as to project radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 610, and the outer peripheral surface of the plate-like body is connected to the switching device connection gear 3572 (see FIG. 69). Spur gears capable of meshing are engraved. The lower surface of the coupling gear portion 3640 (the surface on the front side of the drawing of FIG. 70C) is flush with the lower surface of the main body portion 610 (the surface of the front side of the drawing of FIG. It is formed as a flat surface which is axially aligned and perpendicular to the axis.

  As shown in FIG. 72, the push-in member 3430 includes a base body 2581 and a connecting shaft 2582 and a push-in piece 2583 disposed on the upper surface of the base body 2581. The outside diameter size of the base body 2581 is set to a size slightly smaller than the inside diameter size of the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotating shaft 3700 (shaft main body 3710), and the switching device 3600 is pivoted in the bearing 3535. In such a case, the inside of the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 can be turned, and the inside of the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 is switched when pushed upward by the transmission rod 3420 from the lower surface side. It is slidable towards the device 3600 (see FIGS. 74 to 76).

  The switching device 3600 is brought into an engaged fixed state by the biting balls 670 a and 670 b being pushed into the biting space 651 by the pushing piece 2583 of the pushing member 3430, with respect to the bearing portion 3535 of the upper base 3530. When the push-in pieces 2583 of the push-in member 3430 are retracted while the bite balls 670 a and 670 b are disposed in the relief space 661, they are switched to the pivotable state. It can be rotated relative to the bearing 3535. The switching structure of the switching device 3600 is the same as in the first and second embodiments (see FIGS. 15 and 40), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the transmission rod 3420 will be described. FIG. 73 (a) is a side view of the transmission rod 3420, and FIG. 73 (b) is a top view of the transmission rod 3420 viewed in the direction of arrow LXXIIIb of FIG. 73 (a).

As shown in FIG. 73, the transmission rod 3420 is a member disposed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 3711 of the shaft body portion 3710 of the rotating shaft portion 3700 (see FIG. 69), and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a circular cross section. Be done. Guide projections 3421 are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical body so as to project from a plurality of locations (three locations in the present embodiment). Each guide protrusion 421 is a portion for moving along a guide groove 3715 (see FIG. 66 (b)) formed on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 3711 in the rotation shaft portion 3700, and each has the same shape. And at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (120 degrees in this embodiment).

The lower end (the lower portion in FIG. 73 (a)) of the transmission rod 3420 is formed in a conical shape coaxial with the cylindrical portion. Thus, the transfer rod 3420 can be made closer to the push-up member 3410 on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 3711 of the rotary shaft portion 3700 (see FIG. 69), so a limited space on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 3711 Can be used effectively, and the overall size can be reduced.

  The transmission rod 3420 is held at the first position or the second position by the guide projection 3421 being guided along a guide groove 3715 formed on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 3711. Specifically, each time the push-up member 3410 pushes up, the first position is converted to the second position or the second position to the first position (see FIGS. 74 to 76). The structure in which the guide projection 3421 is guided by the guide groove 3715 and the transmission rod 3420 is held at the first position or the second position is the same as the structure in the second embodiment (see FIGS. 41 to 47). ), The description is omitted. That is, the transmission rod 3420 and the guide groove 3715 are formed technically substantially the same as the transmission rod 2592 and the guide groove 2591b in the second embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74 to FIG. 76, a switching structure for switching the switching device 3600 to the rotatable state or the engaged fixed state by the depression operation of the operating element 3800 will be described. In the description of this switching structure, FIGS. 77 and 78 will be referred to as appropriate.

  74 and 75 are partial cross-sectional side views of the handle device 3051, and FIG. 74 shows the state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position and FIG. 75 shows the state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the second position. Be done. FIG. 76 is a partial cross-sectional side view of the handle device 3051 and illustrates a state in which the operating element 3800 is operated to be depressed downward and the transmission rod 3420 is disposed at an intermediate position.

  77 and 78 are partially enlarged perspective views of the rotary shaft 3700 and the switching device 3600. 77 (a) shows the state where the rotary shaft 3700 (manipulator 3800) is at the initial position θ0 and the switching device 3600 is in the rotatable state, and FIG. 77 (b) shows the rotary shaft. In FIG. 77 (c), the rotary shaft 3700 (manipulator 3800) shows a state in which 3700 (manipulator 3800) is rotated (slide operation) to the operation position θ1 and the switching device 3600 is in a rotatable state. Is rotated to the operation position θ1 (slide operation) and the switching device 3600 is changed to the engaged fixed state, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the rotation shaft portion 3700 (operation element 3800) is the operation position In FIG. 78 (b), the rotating shaft 3700 (the operating element 3800) is at the initial position θ0, in the range of θ0 to θ1 and the switching device 3600 is changed to the engaged fixed state, And cut The state example apparatus 3600 is changed to the engagement fixing state, are shown respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, the switching device 3600 is inserted into the bearing portion 3535 of the upper base 3530 as described above, and the connecting shaft 2582 of the pushing member 3430 is in the connecting hole 620 of the switching device 3600. Relatively movable in the axial direction and relatively nonrotatable in the circumferential direction.

  In this embodiment, the connection shaft 2582 of the push-in member 3430 is inserted into the communication hole 620 of the switching device 3600 regardless of whether the transfer rod 3420 is disposed at the first position or the second position. (That is, the communication hole 620 and the connecting shaft 2582 are coupled so as not to be rotatable relative to each other). Therefore, even if the switching device 3600 is pivoted with respect to the bearing portion 3535, the rotational position (phase) of the push-in piece 2583 of the push-in member 3430 with respect to the clearance space 661 of the switching device 3600 can always be matched.

  Thus, regardless of the rotational position (phase) of the switching device 3600, the upward movement of the transmission rod 3420 associated with the depression operation of the operation member 3800 (ie, pushing by the transmission rod 3420) By pushing the member 3430 upward, the push piece 2583 of the push member 3430 can be reliably moved into the biting space 651 of the switching device 3600.

  That is, even in a state where the slide 3800 is operated to slide at any slide position, the switching device 3600 can be brought into the engaged and fixed state by pressing the slide 3800. Therefore, when the launch intensity of the gaming ball becomes a desired launch intensity by the slide operation of the operation element 3800, the change (setting) of the operation end point is maintained while maintaining the operation position (operation amount) of the slide operation. Can do. As a result, the change (setting) of the operation end point can be performed quickly and at an accurate position.

  As shown in FIG. 74, when the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position, the push-in piece 2583 of the push-in member 3430 is disposed in the relief space 661 of the switching device 3600. Therefore, in the switching device 3600, the biting balls 670a and 670b are disposed in the relief space 661 by the biasing force of the pushing side biasing spring 680, and thereby, the rotation can be performed relative to the bearing 3535. The movable state (see FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (c) or FIGS. 40 (a) and 40 (c)) is set.

  As described above, in the state where the switching device 3600 is set to be rotatable (the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position), the switching device 3600 is rotatable with respect to the bearing portion 3535. As shown in FIG. 77 (a) and FIG. 77 (b), when the operating element 3800 (rotation shaft 3700) is rotated in the increasing direction from the initial position θ0 to the operation position θ1, the step surface of the rotation shaft 3700 The rotation of the switching device 3600 is interlocked with the rotation shaft portion 3700 by the rotation of the switching device 3600 by the rotation of the switching device 3600 while the 3711 c is pushed while pushing the restriction protrusion 3630 of the switching device 3600 in the increasing direction (the arrow direction in FIG. Let The operation position θ1 is an operation position not reaching the maximum position θmax of the slide operation range of the operation element 3800. The same applies to the following.

  On the other hand, when the operating element 3800 (rotation shaft portion 3700) is rotated in the decreasing direction, the switching device 3600 follows the rotation shaft portion 3700 by the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 3582 (see FIG. 69). And is rotated in the decreasing direction. For example, as shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b), the operating element 3800 (rotation shaft 3700) decreases from the operation position θ1 to the initial position θ0 (opposite to the arrow in FIG. 78 (b)). When the sliding operation (rotation) is performed, the switching device 3600 is also rotated in the decreasing direction by the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 3582, and the regulating projection 3630 abuts on the step surface 3711c of the rotating shaft 3700. Is placed at the pivot position.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 74, in the state where the switching device 3600 is set in the rotatable state (the state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position), the operating element 3800 moves in either the increasing or decreasing direction. Even when the slide operation is performed, the switching device 3600 is interlocked (synchronized) and rotated, and the rotational positions (phases) of the operation elements 3800 (rotation shaft portion 3700) and the switching device 3600 are matched ( 77 (a) and 77 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 75, in the state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the second position, the switching device 3600 is disposed in the biting space 651 of the biting balls 670a and 670b (ie, by the pushing pieces 2583 of the transmission rod 3420). The biting balls 670a and 670b are pushed into the biting space 651) and set in the engaged fixed state (see FIG. 15 (b) and FIG. 15 (d) or FIG. 40 (b) and FIG. 40 (d)). Ru.

  In a state where the switching device 3600 is set in the engaged and fixed state, the biting balls 670 a and 670 b face the inner circumferential surface of the bearing portion 3535 and the biting surface 650 by the biasing force of the biting side biasing spring 690. Because the switching device 3600 (main body 610) is in a rotational state (for example, FIG. 15 (d)), the switching device 3600 (main body portion 610) is in a rotating state. Even when trying to rotate in the direction B), the circumferential end of the biting surface 650 acts to further bite the biting balls 670a and 670b while facing the inner circumferential surface of the bearing portion 3535. The rotation of the switching device 3600 (main body portion 610) with respect to the bearing portion 3535 is restricted (blocked) (see FIGS. 15 (b) and 15 (d) or FIGS. 40 (b) and 40 (d)).

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), when the operator 3800 (rotational shaft 3700) is turned to the operation position θ1, the position of the transmission rod 3420 is set to the first position by the depression operation of the operator 3800. By changing the position from the position to the second position, the switching device 3600 is set in the engagement fixed state, and as shown in FIG. 77C, the switching position of the switching device 3600 corresponds to the operation position θ1 (ie, The transmission rod 3420 in the first position can be fixed at the pivot position at the time when it is changed to the second position.

  Thus, when the switching device 3600 is set in the engagement fixed state and the rotation position is fixed, as shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b), the operating element 3800 (rotation shaft portion Even if the sliding operation (rotation) of 3700) is performed in the decreasing direction, the switching device 3600 is not interlocked (synchronized) with the rotation of the rotation shaft portion 3700, and is held at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1. That is, the position of the operation end point is changed (set) to the operation position θ1.

  Therefore, in this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), in the state where the switching device 3600 is held (fixed) at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1, the operating element returned to the initial position θ0 When the slide operation (rotation) of 3800 (rotation shaft portion 3700) is performed in the increasing direction, the operation position θ1 is taken as the operation end point of the rotation of the rotation shaft portion 3700. That is, as shown in FIG. 77 (c), when the slide operation in the increasing direction reaches the operation position θ1, the stepped surface 3711c of the rotation shaft 3700 is abutted against the control projection 3630, as shown in FIG. The slide operation in the further increasing direction (rotation of the rotary shaft 3700 in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 77C) is restricted.

  Here, the change (setting) to the second position of the transmission rod 3420 in the first position is performed as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 74, when the operating element 3800 is pushed downward (in the direction of the arrow G in FIG. 58B) from the state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position, as shown in FIG. The push-up member 3410 pushes the transmission rod 3420 upward. The transfer rod 3420 has its guide projection 3421 guided along the shape of the guide groove 3715, and abuts on a predetermined wall portion (guide restriction wall portion Wc, see FIG. 46) of the guide groove 3715. As a result, the downward pushing operation of the operation element 3800 can not be performed. Therefore, when the player loosens the operation force and the downward pushing operation of the operation element 3800 is released, the transmission rod 3420 is biased on the pushing side. The biasing force (elastic recovery force) of the spring 680 pushes back downward. As a result, the guide protrusion 3421 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 3715, and reaches the predetermined position (position P2, see FIG. 46) of the guide groove 3715. That is, as shown in FIG. 75, the transmission member 3420 is disposed at the second position.

  Similarly, changing (setting) the transmission rod 3420 in the second position to the first position is performed as follows. That is, as shown in FIG. 75, when the operating element 3800 is pushed downward (in the direction of the arrow G in FIG. 58B) from the state where the transmission rod 3420 is in the second position, as shown in FIG. The push-up member 3410 pushes the transmission rod 3420 upward. The guide rod 3420 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 3715 and abuts on a predetermined wall (guide restriction wall Wg, see FIG. 46) of the guide groove 3715. As a result, the downward pushing operation of the operation element 3800 can not be performed. Therefore, when the player loosens the operation force and the downward pushing operation of the operation element 3800 is released, the transmission rod 3420 is biased on the pushing side. The biasing force (elastic recovery force) of the spring 680 pushes back downward. As a result, the guide protrusion 3421 is guided along the shape of the guide groove 3715, and reaches the predetermined position (position P1, see FIG. 46) of the guide groove 3715. That is, as shown in FIG. 74, the transmission member 3420 is disposed at the first position.

  In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), in a state in which the switching device 3600 is held (fixed) at the rotational position corresponding to the operation position θ1, the transmission rod 3420 described above is When the operation of arranging in the position is performed, the switching device 3600 is switched from the engaged fixed state to the rotatable state, and can be rotated with respect to the bearing portion 3535. Therefore, the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 3582 As a result, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the initial position (rotational position where the restriction projection 3630 is in contact with the step surface 3711c of the rotary shaft 3700) is returned.

  Alternatively, for example, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the switching device 3600 is held (fixed) at the rotation position corresponding to the operation position θ1, and the operation element 3800 (rotation shaft 3700) is operated. In a state where the sliding operation (rotation) to the position θ1 is performed, when the above-described operation of arranging the transmission rod 3420 from the second position to the first position is performed, the switching device 3600 can rotate from the engaged fixed state 77B and can be turned with respect to the bearing portion 3535, so as to receive the biasing force of the switching device biasing spring 3582, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the operating position θ1 (the regulation protrusion 3630 With the slide operation of the operation element 3800, the rotational position returned to be in contact with the step surface 3711c of the rotating shaft portion 3700 during the rotational movement is returned.

  Therefore, from this state, when the operating element 3800 (rotation shaft portion 3700) is slid (turned) in the increasing direction or decreasing direction, the switching device 3600 is also interlocked (synchronized) in response to the turning. Be done.

  As described above, according to the handle device 3051, the operation end point can be canceled even during the slide operation of the operation element 3800 (during playing the game ball), for example, to cancel the operation end point There is no need to temporarily return the operating element 3800 to the initial position. Therefore, when the position of the operation end point once set needs to be reset (for example, fine adjustment) to another position, the slide operation of the operation element 3800 is maintained (that is, the game is continued). , The reset operation can be performed quickly. Alternatively, for example, when it is necessary to hit the right, while maintaining the slide operation of the operation element 3800, it is possible to release the operation end point which restricted the slide operation in the increase direction of the operation element 3800. It is possible to quickly form a state in which the slide operation in the increasing direction of the child 3800 is possible. That is, it is possible to quickly switch to the slide operation operation of the operation element 3800 in the operation direction in which the launch strength of the gaming ball is maximized.

  In addition, an operation for switching the switching device 3600 from the engaged fixed state to the rotatable state (canceling the operation end point, that is, returning operation for returning the switching device 3600 to the initial position) and from the rotatable state to the engaged fixed state Both of the switching operation (the changing operation of changing (setting) the operation end point) are achieved by the depression operation of the operation element 3800. That is, this can be achieved by operating the same member in the same direction. This makes it easy to operate the change operation and the return operation. In particular, since the state by the change operation and the state by the return operation are alternately switched, it is effective to improve the operability that the two states can be switched by repeating the same operation. In addition, since the same member is operated in the same direction, the operation direction of the operating element 3800 required for the change operation and the return operation can be limited to one direction only, and accordingly, The structure can be simplified to reduce the product cost.

  Then, referring to FIGS. 79 and 80, using switching device 3600, the position of the operation end point is changed (set), and the position of the slide operation of operating element 3800 is adjusted based on the position of the operation end point. The adjustment method (return to the original slide operation position) will be described.

  79 and 80 are schematic views schematically illustrating the sliding operation of the handle device 3051. In each drawing, the left view is a front schematic view of the handle device 3051, and the right view is a control It is a schematic diagram which shows typically the relationship between the position of slide operation of 3800, and the operation end point. In FIGS. 79 and 80, the display of “[first position] or [second position]” means the position of the transmission rod 3420. Further, “initial position θ0” is the initial position in the direction of the slide operation of the operation element 3800, and “maximum position θmax” is the maximum position at which the operation end of the operation element 3800 can be operated in the state where the operation end point is not changed (set). It is. The “operation end point” is an end point of the slide operation of the operation element 3800 formed by the switching device 3600 being set in the engagement fixed state.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), since the switching device 3600 is in a rotatable state when the transmission rod 3420 is in the first position (FIG. 74, FIG. 15 (a) and FIG. 15 (c)), the manipulator 3800 can slide in a range from the initial position θ0 to the maximum position θmax.

  In the state shown in FIGS. 79A and 79B, as a result of adjusting the slide operation position of the operation element 3800 according to the game state, as shown in FIG. 79B, the operation element 3800 is When it is determined that the launch intensity of the gaming ball can be adjusted to a desired launch intensity by setting the operation position θ1, the player maintains the state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 6B, the transmission rod 3420 is set to the second position by depressing the operation element 3800 downward. Thereby, the switching device 3600 is set in the engagement fixed state (see FIGS. 75, 15 (b) and 15 (d)), and the operation end point is located at the position corresponding to the operation position θ1 of the operation element 3800. Changed (set)

  Thus, according to the handle device 3051, since the operation end point can be set, as shown in FIG. 80A, for example, the position of the slide operation of the operation element 3800 is returned to the initial position θ0 to take a break. Even if the game is interrupted, the original pivot position (ie, the pivot position at which the launch intensity of the gaming ball is adjusted to the desired launch intensity and the operation position .theta.1 before interrupting the gaming machine) It can be stored as an "operation end point".

  Therefore, when adjusting the position of the slide operation of the operation element 3800 to the position of the original slide operation (that is, the operation position θ1 before interrupting the game), the state of FIG. 79 (b) and FIG. 79 (c) is reproduced When the player slides the operation element 3800 to the operation end point (ie, the slide operation of the operation element 3800 is restricted by the operation end point, as shown in FIG. 80B), If the slide operation is performed until the slide operation can not be performed), the position of the slide operation of the operator 3800 can be quickly and easily adjusted to the original slide operation position (operation position θ1).

  For example, it is conceivable to provide a scale line on the handle mount 3500 along the movement trajectory of the operation element 3800 and slide the operation element 3800 with the scale line as the target position, as compared with such a method. It is not necessary to make a fine adjustment while visually determining whether the position of the slide operation of the operation element 3800 matches the target position (scale line), and it is possible to accurately adjust to the desired position of the slide operation. it can. Further, according to the present embodiment, the slide operation may be performed to the position where the slide operation can not be performed, and the target position can not be passed, so the operation speed of the operation element 3800 can be increased. The position of the slide operation can be adjusted quickly (return to the original slide operation position quickly).

  When the position of the operation end point is returned to the maximum position θmax, as described above, in the state shown in FIG. 80 (a) or FIG. 80 (b), the operating element 3800 is pushed downward to a position where it can be pushed downward. After the depression operation is performed, the transmission rod 3420 is returned to the first position by releasing the depression operation, and the position of the operation end point can be returned to the maximum position θmax as shown in FIG. 79 (a). it can.

  As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  The pachinko machine 10 may be configured by combining or replacing part or all of the configuration of one of the above-described embodiments with part or all of the configuration of another embodiment.

  In the above embodiments, when the connecting holes 620 of the switching devices 600 to 3600 and the connecting shafts 575 and 2582 inserted into the connecting holes 620 have a trapezoidal cross-sectional shape, positioning in the rotational direction is possible. However, the cross-sectional shape of the connecting hole 620 and the connecting shafts 575 and 2582 may be another shape. As another shape, for example, a polygon having an unequal shape, a shape in which a key and a key groove are formed, and the like are exemplified.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is a coin, a medal, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

  In a gaming machine provided with an operating element operated by a player and in which the launch intensity of the gaming ball is adjusted in accordance with the operating amount of the operating element, the operating element is operable in the section from the initial position to the operation end point And the position of the operation end point is changeable.

  According to the gaming machine A1, it is possible to accurately and quickly adjust the operation amount of the operation element to a desired operation amount.

  Here, as a method of adjusting the operation amount of the operation element to a desired operation amount, for example, a method of providing a scale along the movement locus of the operation element, or reference to an arbitrary position along the movement locus of the operation element It is conceivable to make the piece fixable. According to these methods, the operation amount of the operation element is set by operating the operation element with the scale line or the reference piece as the target position (ie, matching the operation position of the operation element with the scale line or the reference element). It can be made easy to adjust to the desired operation amount.

  However, in the method described above, the accuracy of the adjustment of the operator depends on the skill of the player. That is, it is necessary to finely adjust the operating position of the operating element with respect to the target position while visually determining whether the operating position of the operating element matches the target position (scale line or reference piece) or not. Adjustment is difficult. Further, for example, if the operating speed of the operating element is increased, the target position may be passed. Therefore, the operating speed of the operating element needs to be reduced in the vicinity of the target position, which makes quick adjustment difficult.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the operator can be operated in the section from the initial position to the operation end point, and since the position of the operation end point can be changed, the desired operation amount (target position By changing (setting) the position of the operation end point to the position corresponding to), if the player operates the operating element until the operation end point (ie, the operation is restricted by the operation end point, further operation) The user can easily adjust the amount of operation of the operator to a desired amount of operation by operating the operator to a position where the operator can not perform the operation.

  Thus, for example, it is not necessary to finely adjust while visually determining whether the operation position of the operation element matches the target position, and it is possible to accurately adjust to a desired operation amount. In addition, since the target position is not passed, the operation speed of the operation element can be increased, and the desired operation amount can be quickly adjusted.

  More specifically, when the launch intensity of the gaming ball reaches a desired launch intensity as a result of adjusting the operation amount of the operator, the position corresponding to the state (the operator having the desired launch intensity is obtained Change (set) the position of the operation end point to the position corresponding to the operation amount of. Thereby, for example, even after the game is interrupted for a break and the operator is returned to the initial position, the player operates the operation only by operating the operator to the operation end point as described above. The operation amount of the child can be returned (adjusted) to the original operation amount (that is, the operation amount before interrupting the game), and such return operation can be performed accurately and quickly.

  A gaming machine A2 comprising operation end point changing means for changing the position of the operation end point at a position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation element in a state where the operation element is operated.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, in the state where the operation element is operated, the operation end point change to change (set) the position of the operation end point to a position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation element Since the means is provided, when the launch intensity of the gaming ball reaches a desired launch intensity, the position of the operation end point can be changed (set) while maintaining the operation amount of the operation element. Thereby, the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point can be performed quickly and can be performed at the correct position.

  In the gaming machine A2, the operating element is formed to be displaceable in a second direction different from the operating direction for adjusting the emission intensity of the gaming ball, and the operating end point changing means is configured to A game machine A3 characterized by changing the position of the operation end point to a position corresponding to the operation amount of the operating element by being operated in the direction of 2.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A2, the operation element is displaced in a second direction different from the operation direction for adjusting the launch intensity of the gaming ball, whereby the operation end point changing means Since the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point is performed, the change operation can be easily performed. That is, after the player operates the operating element to adjust the firing strength of the gaming ball to a desired firing strength, the player may then operate the operating element in the second direction from that state, and the operation end point changing means For example, there is no need to perform an operation of switching the operating element or an operation of operating another operating means with the opposite hand to the operation of operating the operating element. As a result, it is possible to easily perform an operation (changing operation) for changing the position of the operation end point by the operation end point changing means.

  The gaming machine A3 includes an attaching member disposed on the gaming machine main body, and a base member disposed displaceably with respect to the attaching member, and the operating element is capable of pivotally operating on the base member. While being arranged, the firing strength of the gaming ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the turning operation of the operation element, and the base member is displaced relative to the mounting member, thereby being displaced in the second direction. A game machine A4 characterized in that it is made possible.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the operating element is rotatably disposed on the base member which is displaceable with respect to the mounting member, and the operating element in the second direction. The displacement (that is, the operation for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point to a position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation element) is performed by displacing the base member with respect to the mounting member. The operation for changing (setting) the position (displacement in the second direction), while maintaining the operation amount of the turning operation of the operating element (that is, the operation amount of the turning operation is shifted, It can be easily performed while suppressing an accidental change in the emission intensity.

  That is, after the player adjusts the firing intensity of the gaming ball to a desired firing intensity by turning the operating element, the player may then perform an operation to displace the operating element in the second direction from that state. In order to change (set) the operation end point, there is no need to perform an operation to switch the operating element or an operation to operate another operating means with the opposite hand to the operation of the operating element. As a result, the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point can be performed quickly and can be performed at the correct position.

  In the gaming machine A4, the base member is pivotally supported by the mounting member, and is displaceable between a first position and a second position above the first position with respect to the pivotally supported portion. And the biasing force applied from the biasing means is biased to return to the second position, and the displacement of the operation element in the second direction is determined by the base member being attached to the attachment member. A game machine A5 characterized in that the direction from the second position toward the first position is against the urging force of the urging means.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, the displacement from the second position to the first position is performed centering on the portion where the base member is pivotally supported by the mounting member. The operation in the second direction (operation direction different from the operation direction for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball) can be easily performed, for example, by an operation of bending the wrist. As a result, the operation (displacement in the second direction) for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point is maintained while maintaining the operation amount of the rotation operation of the operation element (that is, the operation amount of the rotation operation is It is possible to shift more easily while suppressing the accidental change of the launch intensity of the game ball. As a result, the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point can be performed quickly and can be performed at the correct position.

  In particular, since the biasing means is applied to the base member from the biasing means to return the displaced position to the second position, the operating element is displaced in the second direction (ie, the base member is used as the mounting member). After displacing (depressing) in the direction toward the first position about the pivotally supported portion, by releasing the downward pressing force, the second position is utilized using the biasing force of the biasing means. It can be returned to. As a result, the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

  On the other hand, the operation of displacing the operating element in the second direction (displacement of the base member against the biasing force of the biasing means (pushing down)) is performed using the weight of the finger or arm gripping the operating element Since it can be done, the operability can be improved. In addition, since the operation element is disposed at a relatively low position of the gaming machine main body, and the operation position is relatively low for the player, it is easier for the player to exert a force by an operation of displacing downward. Therefore, the operability can be improved also from this point.

  The gaming machine A3 includes an attaching member disposed on the gaming machine main body, and the operating element is disposed so as to be slideable with respect to the attaching element, and the game is carried out according to the operation amount of the sliding operation of the operating element A game machine A6 characterized in that the firing strength of the ball is adjusted.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the operating element is disposed on the mounting member so as to be able to slide. Therefore, when adjusting the operability of the operating element, that is, the firing intensity of the gaming ball The operability of the device can be improved. The operator is not limited to a shape that can be held by the player with his / her finger, and may have another shape. As another shape, for example, a dish-like shape in which the player can place the palm of the hand or the back of the hand is exemplified.

  In this case, as described above, the operating element is displaced in a second direction different from the operation direction of the slide operation for adjusting the firing intensity of the gaming ball, thereby changing the position of the operation end point (setting) Such setting operation can be easily performed. That is, after the player operates the operating element in the operating direction of the slide operation to adjust the firing intensity of the gaming ball to a desired emitting intensity, the player then displaces the operating element in the second direction from that state. In order to change (set) the position of the operation end point, it is necessary to perform the operation of switching the operating element or the operation of operating the other operation means with the opposite hand to the operation of the operating element. Absent. Therefore, the operation (displacement in the second direction) for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point is performed while maintaining the operation amount of the slide operation of the operation element (that is, the operation amount of the slide operation shifts), It can be easily performed while suppressing an accidental change in the emission intensity. As a result, the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point can be performed quickly and can be performed at the correct position.

  In the gaming machine A6, the operation element is pivotally supported by the mounting member, and is displaceable between a first position and a second position above the first position with respect to the pivotally supported portion. And the biasing force applied from the biasing means is biased to return to the second position, and the displacement of the operating element in the second direction is determined by the operating element being attached to the attachment member. A game machine A7 characterized by being directed from the second position to the first position against the biasing force of the biasing means.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, the displacement from the second position to the first position is performed centering on the portion where the operating element is pivotally supported by the mounting member. The operation in the second direction (operation direction different from the operation direction for adjusting the firing intensity of the game ball) can be easily performed, for example, by an operation of bending the wrist. As a result, the operation (displacement in the second direction) for changing (setting) the position of the operation end point is maintained while maintaining the operation amount of the slide operation of the operating element (that is, the operation amount of the slide operation deviates) ,) Can be performed more easily, while suppressing an accidental change in the launch intensity of the game ball. As a result, the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point can be performed quickly and can be performed at the correct position.

  In particular, since the urging means for applying the urging force to return the displacement position to the second position is applied to the operating element, the operating element is displaced in the second direction (that is, the operating element is attached to the mounting member After displacing (depressing) in the direction toward the first position about the pivotally supported portion, by releasing the downward pressing force, the second position is utilized using the biasing force of the biasing means. It can be returned to. As a result, the operation burden on the player can be reduced.

  On the other hand, the operation of displacing the operating element in the second direction (displacement of the operating element against the biasing force of the biasing means (pushing down)) is performed using the weight of the finger or arm gripping the operating element Since it can be done, the operability can be improved. In addition, since the operation element is disposed at a relatively low position of the gaming machine main body, and the operation position is relatively low for the player, it is easier for the player to exert a force by an operation of displacing downward. Therefore, the operability can be improved also from this point.

  One of the gaming machines A2 to A7 includes a button member pressed and operated by the player, and the operation end point changing means is a position corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating element by the button member being pushed and operated. A game machine A8, characterized in that the position of the operation end point is changed.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A7, the change operation of changing the position of the operation end point to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operating element by pressing the button member. Is performed by the operation end point changing means, the change operation can be performed separately from the operation of the operator. That is, the change operation can be performed while maintaining the operation amount of the operation element (that is, suppressing the careless change of the launch intensity of the game ball due to the operation amount change of the operation element). . The button member may be disposed on any of the operation element, the base member on which the operation element is disposed, or the attachment member on which the base member is disposed. In the case of being disposed on the operating element, the operation of the operating element and the operation of the button member can be more easily performed with only one hand. In the case of being disposed on the base member or the attachment member, it is possible to suppress the influence on the operation amount of the operating element due to the operation of the button member.

  The gaming machine A8 includes a hemispherical front cover, the operating element is formed so as to be able to rotate, the front cover is disposed on the front side of the operating element, and a button member is provided on the top of the front cover A game machine A9 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, the hemispherical front cover is disposed on the front side of the operator, and the button member is disposed on the top of the front cover. The button member can be easily pushed in with the palm using the action of returning the wrist while maintaining the state of gripping with the finger. Therefore, when the operation amount of the turning operation of the operating element is adjusted to the operation amount at which the firing strength of the gaming ball becomes the desired firing strength, the operating amount of the turning operation of the operating element is maintained (that is, The operation amount of the rotation operation is shifted, and the button member can be pressed and operated while suppressing the careless change of the launch strength of the gaming ball. As a result, the change (setting) of the position of the operation end point can be performed quickly and can be performed at the correct position.

  In the gaming machine A9, the front cover is provided with an opening formed at the top to expose the button member, and the button member is pushed in by the player to be positioned at a position corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating element. In the state in which the position of the operation end point is changed, at least a part of the button member is projected from the edge of the opening of the front cover.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A9, when pressing the button member to change the position of the operation end point to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operating element, the button member There is no need to push it to a position beyond the edge of the opening of the front cover (the position where the entire button member is inserted into the front cover). That is, when the button member is pushed, it is possible to suppress the edge portion of the opening of the front cover from being obstructed, and to improve the operability.

  In the gaming machine A9 or A10, the front cover includes an opening formed at the top to expose the button member, and the button member is positioned at a position corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating element. And the button member is pushed to the third push-in position so that at least the operation end point can be returned to the maximum position by pushing the button member to the third push-in position. And the button member is sunk into the front cover more than the edge of the opening of the front cover in the third push-in position. According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 8 or 9, the button member is pushed from the second pushing position to the third pushing position to make the position of the operation end point returnable to the maximum position. It is necessary to push such a button member to a position where it is inserted beyond the edge of the opening of the front cover (the position where the entire button member is inserted into the front cover). Therefore, when the button member is pushed to the third push-in position, the edge of the opening of the front cover can be obstructed, so the button member in the second push-in position inadvertently reaches the third push-in position It is possible to suppress the pressing operation. As a result, the end point position which has been changed (set) to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operating element is inadvertently returned to the initial position by the pressing operation of the button member carelessly (or can be restored) ) Can be suppressed.

  A gaming machine characterized by comprising operation end point return means for returning the position of the operation end point changed to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operating element by the operation end point changing means to the maximum position in the game machines A2 to A11. Machine A12.

  According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A11, an operation for returning the position of the operation end point changed to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation by the operation end point changing means to the maximum position Since the end point return means is provided, the operation end point return means can be used to return the position of the operation end point to the maximum position. That is, the operation element can be operated to an operation position where the game ball can be fired with a predetermined maximum firing intensity.

  In the game machine A12, the operation end point return means is capable of returning the position of the operation end point to the maximum position in a state where the operation element is operated.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A12, the operation end point return means can return the position of the operation end point to the maximum position while the operation element is operated. In order to return the position of the end point to the maximum position, there is no need to temporarily return the operating element operated to a predetermined operation amount to the initial position. Therefore, for example, when it becomes necessary to reset the position of the operation end point to another position, the resetting operation can be performed quickly. Alternatively, for example, when it is necessary to hit the right, the position of the operation end point is released (that is, returned to the maximum position), and the operation of the operation element in the operation direction to maximize the firing intensity of the gaming ball Can be done quickly.

  In the gaming machine A13, the operation element is formed displaceable in a third direction different from the operation direction for adjusting the emission intensity of the game ball, and the operation end point return means is the operation element is the second operation A game machine A14 characterized in that the position of the operation end point is returned to the maximum position by being operated in the direction of 3.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A13, the operation element is displaced in a second direction different from the operation direction for adjusting the launch intensity of the gaming ball, whereby the operation end point return means Since the return to the maximum position of the position of the operation end point is performed, such return operation can be easily performed while continuing the game (that is, while launching the gaming balls at a desired firing intensity). That is, the player may operate the operating element in the third direction from that state in a state where the operating strength of the gaming ball is adjusted to a desired emitting strength by operating the operating element, and the operation end point return means In order to perform the return to the maximum position, for example, there is no need to perform an operation of switching the operating element or an operation of operating another operating means with a hand opposite to a hand operating the operating element. As a result, it is possible to easily perform an operation (return operation) for returning the position of the operation end point to the maximum position by the operation end point return means while continuing the game.

  In the gaming machine A14, the operation element is formed to be displaceable in a second direction different from the operation direction for adjusting the emission intensity of the game ball, and the operation end point changing means is configured such that the operation element is the second operation The position of the operation end point is changed to a position corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation element by being operated in the direction of 2, and the second direction and the third direction are the same direction. A game machine A15 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine A15, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A14, the second direction and the third direction are made the same direction, and the position of the operation end point is changed to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operator. Since the change operation and the return operation for returning the position of the operation end point changed by the change operation to the maximum position can be performed by the same operation, the change operation and the return operation can be easily performed. That is, since the state by the change operation and the state by the return operation are alternately switched, it is effective to improve the operability that the two states can be switched by repeating the same operation. In addition, by making the second direction and the third direction the same direction, it is possible to reduce the operable direction of the operating element, so the structure is simplified and the product cost is reduced accordingly. Can be

  The gaming machine A12 or A13 includes a button member pressed and operated by the player, and the operation end point return means returns the position of the operation end point to the maximum position when the button member is pushed and operated. A game machine A16 to feature.

  According to the gaming machine A16, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A12 or A13, the operation of returning the position of the operation end point to the maximum position is performed by the operation end point return means by pressing the button member. Such return operation can be performed separately from the operation of the operator. That is, such return operation can be performed while maintaining the operation amount of the operating element (that is, suppressing the inadvertent change of the firing intensity of the gaming ball due to the operation amount of the operating element shifting). .

  In the gaming machine A16, the change of the position of the operation end point by the operation end point changing means and the return to the maximum position of the position of the operation end point by the operation end point return means are alternately performed by pressing the button member. A game machine A17 characterized by being executable.

  According to the gaming machine A17, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A16, the change of the position of the operation end point by the operation end point changing means and the return of the position of the operation end point to the maximum position by the operation end point return means Since the execution can be alternately performed by the pressing operation, the operation of the change operation and the return operation can be easily performed. That is, since the state by the change operation and the state by the return operation are alternately switched, it is effective to improve operability that the two states can be switched by repeatedly operating the button member 1. Become. Also, since one button member can be used in this way, the number of parts can be reduced and the structure can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  A game machine A18 according to any one of the game machines A1 to A17, wherein the game machine A18 is formed such that the player can distinguish whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position.

  According to the gaming machine A18, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A17, the player can identify whether or not the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position. It is possible to suppress the situation where the player plays a game without knowing that the adjustment range of is restricted, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

  That is, in the configuration in which the position of the operation end point can be changed when the operator is operable in the section from the initial position to the operation end point, the player is aware that the position of the operation end point is changed. If you are playing without knowing, you will play in the condition that the adjustment range of the launch intensity of the gaming ball is restricted, that is, you can not launch the game sphere with the maximum launch intensity set in advance. As a result, the player may suffer disadvantages.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A18, since the player can distinguish whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position (ie, It is possible to suppress the player from playing the game without noticing that the adjustment range of the launch intensity of the game ball is restricted), making it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

  The gaming machine A18 includes a button member pressed and operated by the player, and the position of the operation end point can be changed from the maximum position by pressing the button member, and the position of the operation end point is maximized. In the state changed from the position, compared with the state in which the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position, the push-in position of the button member is different.

  According to the gaming machine A19, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A18, the position of the operation end point can be changed from the maximum position by pressing the button member, and the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position Since the push-in position of the button member is different compared to the state where the position of the operation end is at the maximum position, it is played whether the position of the operation end is changed from the maximum position based on the difference of the push-in positions of the button member. Can be identified by As a result, the player can be prevented from playing a game without noticing that the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, and it is difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine A19, the operation member (button member) operated to change the position of the operation end point from the maximum position is for identifying whether the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position. Since it is also used as an identification member, it is possible to reduce the number of parts and to reduce the product cost.

  The gaming machine A19 includes a wall portion disposed on the outer peripheral surface side of the button member, and an opening formed in the wall portion so that at least a part of the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visible. In a state in which the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, the form of an object to be viewed through the opening is different from that in the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position. A20.

  According to the gaming machine A20, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A19, in the state where the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, compared with the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position Since the form of the target to be played is different, it is possible to easily and reliably identify to the player whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position based on the difference in the form of the visually recognized target.

  That is, in the configuration in which the determination of whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position based on the difference between the push-in positions of the button members, the judgment criterion is the difference in the degree of push-in. Difficult to distinguish.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A20, since the form of the object visually recognized through the opening is different, the determination criterion can be binarized, and the two states can be easily distinguished clearly. This allows the player to easily and reliably identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, and as a result, it is possible to play without knowing that the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position. It is possible to suppress the player from playing the game and make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.

  It should be noted that, for example, in the two states where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position and the state where the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, one of the states is different. In the state, only the outer peripheral surface of the button member is viewed through the opening, and in the other state, only the members other than the outer peripheral surface of the button member are viewed through the opening (that is, the button member It is binarized as to whether or not the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized, and a configuration to distinguish based on these two values is exemplified.

  Second, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, but the color of the outer peripheral surface of the visually recognized button member is different in one state and the other state (that is, And B) binarized by the color (for example, white and black) of the button member visually recognized through the opening, and the configuration to be distinguished based on the two values is exemplified.

  Third, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is viewed, but the area (proportion occupied in the opening) of the outer peripheral surface of the viewed button member is the one state and the other The configuration that differs depending on the state (that is, the configuration in which the area of the button member (the area occupied by the outer peripheral surface of the button member in the opening) viewed through the opening is binarized and distinguished based on these two values) is illustrated Be done.

  Fourth, in the one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, but the outer peripheral surface of the visually recognized button member is drawn in the opening in the one state and the other state A different configuration (i.e., a configuration in which the outer peripheral surface of the button member is binarized by the shape drawn in the opening and distinguished based on these binary values) is exemplified.

  Fifth, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, and the area of the outer peripheral surface of the visually recognized button member and the shape drawn by the outer peripheral surface of the button member are the same. The position of the outer peripheral surface in the visible opening is different in one state and the other state (that is, it is binarized by the position of the outer peripheral surface of the button member in the opening and distinguished based on these binary values Configuration) is illustrated.

  In the gaming machine A18, the operation end point is located at the first position when it is at the maximum position, and when the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, it is located at the second position. A game machine A21 comprising a member.

  According to the gaming machine A21, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A18, the interlocking member is disposed at the first position when the operation end position is at the maximum position, and the operation end position is changed from the maximum position In the second state, the player can easily and reliably identify whether the operation end position has been changed from the maximum position based on the difference in the arrangement of the interlocking members. . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage by preventing the player from playing the game without noticing that the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position.

  In the gaming machine A21, the interlocking member is formed so as to be operable by the player, and the interlocking member arranged at the second position is operated to be arranged at the first position, whereby the position of the operation end point Is returned to the maximum position. A game machine A22.

  In the gaming machine A21 or A22, the interlocking member is formed so as to be operable by the player, and the interlocking member disposed at the first position is operated to be disposed at the second position, so that the operator A game machine A23 characterized in that the position of the operation end point is changed to a position corresponding to the amount of operation of the game machine A23.

  According to the gaming machine A22, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A21, the interlocking member is formed so as to be operable, and the interlocking member disposed at the second position is operated to be disposed at the first position. The position of the end point can be returned to the maximum position. That is, the operation element can be operated to an operation position where the game ball can be fired with a predetermined maximum firing intensity. Further, according to the gaming machine A23, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A21 or A22, the interlocking member is formed to be operable, and the interlocking member disposed at the first position is operated to be disposed at the second position. Thus, the position of the operation end point can be changed to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation element.

  In this case, according to the gaming machine A22 or the gaming machine A23, the identification member (interlocking member) for identifying whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position returns the position of the operation end point to the maximum position Since it is also used as an operation member operated to change the position of the operation end point, the number of parts can be reduced by that amount, and the product cost can be reduced.

  Also, as described above, according to the gaming machine A22, the return operation for returning the position of the operation end point to the maximum value is interlocking disposed at the second position indicating the state where the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position. This is achieved by performing an operation of disposing the member to the first position indicating the state where the position of the operation end is at the maximum position, so that the player is made to operate while intuitively recognizing that it is the return operation. As a result, careless operation can be suppressed.

  Similarly, according to the gaming machine A23, the change operation for changing the position of the operation end point to the position corresponding to the operation amount of the operation element is arranged to the first position indicating the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position. This is achieved by performing the operation of arranging the interlocking member at the second position indicating the state where the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, so the player can intuitively recognize that it is a change operation. It is possible to operate while making it possible, and as a result, it is possible to suppress careless erroneous operation.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operation element is displaced in the second direction, whereby the position of the operation end point is changed by the operation end point changing means, and the slide operation of the operation element can be regulated. A game machine A24 characterized in that it is formed.

  According to the gaming machine A24, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operation element is displaced in the second direction, whereby the change by the operation end point changing means is performed and the slide operation of the operation element is restricted. Since it can be formed, when changing (setting) the position of the operation end point by the operation end point changing means, the restriction of the change (displacement) of the position of the slide operation of the operating element may also be performed. it can. Therefore, it is possible to accurately change (set) the position of the operation end point to the intended position while suppressing the change (displacement) of the position of the slide operation of the operation element from the intended predetermined position.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element is formed in a rod shape that can be gripped by a player.

  According to the gaming machine A25, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element is formed in a rod shape that can be gripped by the player, so that such operating element can be held easily. It is possible to improve the operability when operating the operator in a predetermined direction (for example, the direction of the slide operation or the second direction).

  In the gaming machine A25, the operation element is a main body portion supported by the mounting member so that one side is slidably displaceable, and a holding portion which is erected upward from the other side of the main body portion and held by the player And a game machine A26 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine A26, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A25, since the held portion held by the player is erected upward from the other side of the main body in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A25, the held portion Can be held (held) by the player in a natural posture, and the slide operation and the operation in the second direction can be easily operated. In particular, since the held portion is erected from the other side of the main body portion, when gripping the held portion, the outer edge portion of the palm of the hand can be placed on the main body portion to reduce fatigue. While performing the operation in the second direction (pressing-down operation), the weight of the hand can be applied to the main body, and the operation can be facilitated.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element includes a placement surface formed in a shape in which a player can place a part of a hand.

  According to the gaming machine A27, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element is provided with a placement surface formed in such a shape that the player can place a part of the hand. Even the player who can not grip the player can slide the controller using the mounting surface of the controller. That is, it is difficult for a player who can not grip the operation part to play a game in a conventional gaming machine that adjusts the firing intensity of the gaming ball by rotating the rotation handle, and slides the operating element as in the present invention. An operation portion can not be gripped by adopting a structure that is configured to be operable and adjusts the launch intensity of the gaming ball according to the amount of slide operation of the operation element, and by forming the mounting surface on the operation element It is for the first time possible for the player to play a game.

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element is slide operated in a direction in which the operating element is inclined downward from the initial position to the operation end point.

  According to the gaming machine A28, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element is slide operated in the direction to be inclined downward from the initial position to the operation end point, so the operation amount of such slide operation is increased It is possible to easily perform an operation in a direction to cause (i.e., an operation to increase the launch strength of the game ball) using the weight of the hand. In addition, when sliding the operating element to the operation end point and maintaining the firing intensity of the gaming ball constant, the weight of the hand is used to counter the biasing force that tries to return the operating element to the initial position. Since it is possible, the player's fatigue can be reduced. The above configuration is particularly effective when the player performs a slide operation using the placement surface of the operation element as in the gaming machine A27 (that is, when the player can not grip the held portion). .

  In the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element is slide operated in a direction in which the operating element is inclined upward from the initial position toward the operation end point.

  According to the gaming machine A29, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6 or A7, the operating element is slide operated in the direction of being inclined upward from the initial position to the operating end point. By hanging, it is possible to eliminate the act of trying to keep the firing intensity of the game ball constant.

  That is, in the structure in which the operating element is formed so as to be slideable and the firing intensity of the gaming ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the sliding operation of the operating element, the operation is performed if the direction of the sliding operation is inclined horizontally or downward By hanging a shopping bag, for example, on the child, even if the player releases his hand from the operating element, it is possible to maintain the operating element at the operation end point by using the weight of the shopping bag, and fair game is possible. It is disturbed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A29, since the direction of the slide operation of the operating element is inclined upward, the player holds the operating element by hand when, for example, a shopping bag is hung on the operating element. Unless it is, the weight of the shopping bag can return the operating element to the initial position. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the operation element is maintained at the operation end point in a state in which the player has released the hand, and secure fair game.

  A gaming machine B1 according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A29, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  A gaming machine B2 according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A29, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

A gaming machine B3 according to any one of gaming machines A1 to A29, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one in which a handle rotation portion is rotatably attached to a handle base, and the firing strength of a ball is adjusted according to the amount of rotation operation of the handle rotation portion. In addition, when the desired firing strength is obtained by the turning operation of the handle turning portion, the turning strength of the handle turning portion is fixed to reduce the player's fatigue while maintaining the firing strength. (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-005759).
A biasing force by a biasing spring is applied to the operating element (handle rotating portion), and when the player releases the hand, the operating position of the operating element is returned to the initial position. Therefore, for example, when the game is interrupted, it is difficult to adjust the operation position of the operating element to the original operation position before interrupting the game.
The present technical idea is made to solve the problems exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which can easily adjust the operating position of the operating element to the original operating position.
<Means>
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 includes an operating element operated by the player, and the emission intensity of the game ball is adjusted in accordance with the operation amount of the operating element, and the operating element is operated from the initial position Operation is enabled in the section up to the operation end point, and the position of the operation end point can be changed, and the player can identify whether the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 and further includes a button member pressed and operated by the player, and the position of the operation end point is determined by pressing the button member. When the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, the pressing position of the button member is different compared to the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, wherein a wall portion disposed on the outer peripheral surface side of the button member and an opening formed in the wall portion are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the button member. And an opening through which at least a portion is made visible, and in the state where the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, compared to the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position The form of the object to be viewed is different.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the operation amount of the operating element can be easily adjusted to the original operation amount.
Here, as a method of adjusting the operation amount of the operation element to a desired operation amount, for example, a method of providing a scale along the movement locus of the operation element, or reference to an arbitrary position along the movement locus of the operation element It is conceivable to make the piece fixable. According to these methods, the operation amount of the operation element is set by operating the operation element with the scale line or the reference piece as the target position (ie, matching the operation position of the operation element with the scale line or the reference element). It can be made easy to adjust to the desired operation amount.
However, in the method described above, the accuracy of the adjustment of the operator depends on the skill of the player. That is, it is necessary to finely adjust the operating position of the operating element with respect to the target position while visually determining whether the operating position of the operating element matches the target position (scale line or reference piece) or not. Adjustment is difficult. Further, for example, if the operating speed of the operating element is increased, the target position may be passed. Therefore, the operating speed of the operating element needs to be reduced in the vicinity of the target position, which makes quick adjustment difficult.
On the other hand, according to the technical idea 1, the operator can be operated in the section from the initial position to the operation end point, and since the position of the operation end point can be changed, the desired operation amount (target By changing (setting) the position of the operation end point to the position corresponding to position), the player operates the operation element until the operation end point (ie, the operation is restricted by the operation end point, If the operator is operated to a position where the operation can not be performed), the operation amount of the operator can be easily adjusted to a desired operation amount.
Thus, for example, it is not necessary to finely adjust while visually determining whether the operation position of the operation element matches the target position, and it is possible to accurately adjust to a desired operation amount. In addition, since the target position is not passed, the operation speed of the operation element can be increased, and the desired operation amount can be quickly adjusted.
More specifically, when the launch intensity of the gaming ball reaches a desired launch intensity as a result of adjusting the operation amount of the operator, the position corresponding to the state (the operator having the desired launch intensity is obtained Change (set) the position of the operation end point to the position corresponding to the operation amount of. Thereby, for example, even after the game is interrupted for a break and the operator is returned to the initial position, the player operates the operation only by operating the operator to the operation end point as described above. The operation amount of the child can be returned (adjusted) to the original operation amount (that is, the operation amount before interrupting the game), and such return operation can be performed accurately and quickly.
Furthermore, since it is possible for the player to distinguish whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, it is possible to suppress the situation where the game is played without knowing that the adjustment range of the launch intensity of the game ball is restricted. This can make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.
That is, in the configuration in which the position of the operation end point can be changed when the operator is operable in the section from the initial position to the operation end point, the player is aware that the position of the operation end point is changed. If you are playing without knowing, you will play in the condition that the adjustment range of the launch intensity of the gaming ball is restricted, that is, you can not launch the game sphere with the maximum launch intensity set in advance. As a result, the player may suffer disadvantages.
On the other hand, according to the technical idea 1, since the player can distinguish whether the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position (i.e., It is possible to suppress the player from playing the game without noticing that the adjustment range of the launch intensity of the game ball is restricted), and it is difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the position of the operation end point can be changed from the maximum position by pressing the button member. In the state where the position of the operation end is changed from the maximum position, the pushing position of the button member is different compared to the state where the position of the operation end is at the maximum position. The player can be made to identify whether the position has been changed from the maximum position. As a result, the player can be prevented from playing a game without noticing that the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, and it is difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.
In this case, according to the technical idea 2, in order to identify whether the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, the operation member (button member) operated to change the position of the operation end point from the maximum position Since it is also used as an identification member of the above, the number of parts can be reduced accordingly, and the product cost can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, when the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, the state where the operation end point is at the maximum position Since the form of the object to be viewed through the opening is different compared to the above, it is easy for the player to determine whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position based on the difference in the form of the object to be viewed. It can be identified reliably.
That is, in the configuration in which the determination of whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position based on the difference between the push-in positions of the button members, the judgment criterion is the difference in the degree of push-in. Difficult to distinguish.
On the other hand, according to the technical idea 3, since the form of the object viewed through the opening is different, the judgment criterion can be binarized, and the two states can be easily distinguished clearly. . This allows the player to easily and reliably identify whether the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position, and as a result, it is possible to play without knowing that the position of the operation end point has been changed from the maximum position. It is possible to suppress the player from playing the game and make it difficult for the player to suffer a disadvantage.
It should be noted that, for example, in the two states where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position and the state where the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position, one of the states is different. In the state, only the outer peripheral surface of the button member is viewed through the opening, and in the other state, only the members other than the outer peripheral surface of the button member are viewed through the opening (that is, the button member It is binarized as to whether or not the outer peripheral surface is visually recognized, and a configuration to distinguish based on these two values is exemplified.
Second, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, but the color of the outer peripheral surface of the visually recognized button member is different in one state and the other state (that is, And B) binarized by the color (for example, white and black) of the button member visually recognized through the opening, and the configuration to be distinguished based on the two values is exemplified.
Third, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is viewed, but the area (proportion occupied in the opening) of the outer peripheral surface of the viewed button member is the one state and the other The configuration that differs depending on the state (that is, the configuration in which the area of the button member (the area occupied by the outer peripheral surface of the button member in the opening) viewed through the opening is binarized and distinguished based on these two values) is illustrated Be done.
Fourth, in the one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, but the outer peripheral surface of the visually recognized button member is drawn in the opening in the one state and the other state A different configuration (i.e., a configuration in which the outer peripheral surface of the button member is binarized by the shape drawn in the opening and distinguished based on these binary values) is exemplified.
Fifth, in one state and the other state, the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visually recognized, and the area of the outer peripheral surface of the visually recognized button member and the shape drawn by the outer peripheral surface of the button member are the same. The position of the outer peripheral surface in the visible opening is different in one state and the other state (that is, it is binarized by the position of the outer peripheral surface of the button member in the opening and distinguished based on these binary values Configuration) is illustrated.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
51, 2051, 3051 Handle device (operation device)
520, 2520 Handle mounting base (mounting member)
530 Handle base (base member)
540, 2051 Handle ring (operator)
550 front cover 550a opening 550b, 554b confirmation window ( opening )
570 Button member 577 Inner fitting wall (wall)
600, 2600, 3600 Switching device (part of operation end point changing means)
3800 manipulator 3880 springing direction biasing spring (biasing means)
3810 Main body 3830 Holding part SP Base biasing spring (biasing means)
θ0 initial position

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine provided with an operating element operated by a player, and in which the firing intensity of the gaming ball is adjusted in accordance with the operation amount of the operating element,
The operator can operate in the section from the initial position to the operation end point, the position of the operation end point can be changed, and the player can change whether the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position. A game machine characterized by being formed so as to be identifiable.   A position of the operation end point can be changed from the maximum position by having the button member pressed and operated by the player, and the position of the operation end point is changed from the maximum position. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein in the state, the push-in position of the button member is different as compared with the state where the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position.   A wall portion disposed on the outer peripheral surface side of the button member, and an opening formed in the wall portion so that at least a part of the outer peripheral surface of the button member is visible, the position of the operation end point being The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein in the state changed from the maximum position, the form of the object visually recognized through the opening is different as compared with the state in which the position of the operation end point is at the maximum position. .

Images